INSTALLATION, OPERATING & MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR

This instruction manual is available only for the following project.

-. Project Name : GENERATOR FOR MARAN GAS

(DSME/H2288,H2291,H2292,H2295,H2296)
-. Customer : MARAN
-. Reference No. : APP-MARAN H2288-Rev.0

Hyundai Heavy Industries, Co., Ltd

Electro Electric Systems
1, Jeonha-dong, Dong-gu,
Ulsan, 682-792, Korea
Tel. : +82-52-202-6671~3
Fax.: +82-52-202-6996

ⓒCopyright July 2011 Hyundai Heavy Industries, Co., Ltd

All rights reserved throughout the world
Specifications subject to change without notice
 Contents

Section 1. Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

- For Generator
- For Bearing
- For Jack-up & Lube Oil Unit
- For Excitation System
Section 1. Installation, Operating &
Maintenance Manual

Contents

2.1 OPERATING MANUAL FOR SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR

- WITH INSTRUCTION FOR ALIGNMENT OF GENERATOR

- WITH GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY ( DWG. NO. : 3G-003983)

- WITH EMERGENCY COOLING (DWG. NO.:3G-003981)

2.2 BEARING MANUAL

2.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL FOR JACK-UP & LUBE OIL UNIT

2.4 EXCITATION SYSTEM

- FOR DECS200
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

Operating Instructions
for
Synchronous Generator

Read and understand the instruction in this manual contained

safety information before operating the product.

Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd

Electro Electric Systems

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 1 of 26
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

Contents

1. Construction of Brushless A.C Generator

Safety Notes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5

1.1 Component --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5

1.2 General -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5

1) Type definition ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5

2) Specification & regulation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6

3) Degree of protection ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6

4) Type of construction ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6

5) Cooling and ventilation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6

6) Connecting up ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6

7) Insulation testing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

8) Noise emission ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

9) Vibration stability -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

10) Transport ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9

11) Storage ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9

12) Installation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

13) Operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

14) Maintenance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11

15) Inspection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11

1.3 Composition ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12

1) Stator frame and winding--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 2 of 26
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

2) Rotor and windings ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

3) AC exciter ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

4) Rotating rectifier-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

5) Shaft ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 13

6) Bearing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

7) Cooling fan --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

8) End shield AS/BS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14

9) Thermometer ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 14

10) Space heater-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14

11) Terminal box ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14

2. Maintenance

2.1 Installation & Inpsection Check List --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15

1) Inspection schedule---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17

2.2 Flange-Type Sleeve Bearing for ring lubrication system ----------------------------------------------------- 18

1) Mounting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18

2) Operating description ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18

3) Oil change ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18

4) Dismantling, assembling -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19

2.3 Air Filters ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20

1) Air filter cleaning period --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20

2) Air filter cleaning procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20

3) Location of air filter ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 3 of 26
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

2.4 Terminal box ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 21

1) Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21

2.5 Disassembly of A.C Generator ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22

3. Trouble Shooting

3.1 Main Machines and Exciters -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23

3.2 Bearing Part ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 24

3.3 Operating Procedure & Check Sheet for Trouble Shooting -------------------------------------------------- 24

1) Single running ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24

2) Parallel running (for manual synchronizing) ------------------------------------------------------------------ 25

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 4 of 26
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

1. Construction of Brushless A.C Generator

Safety Notes

The warnings “DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE, NOTE “ are used to draw the user’s attention
different points :

This warning is used when an operation, procedure, or use may cause

personal injury or loss lf life.

This warning is used when an operation, procedure, or use may cause

a latently dangerous state of personal injury or loss of life.

This warning is used when an operation, procedure, or use may cause

damage to or destruction of equipment and a slight or serious injury.

This warning is used when an operation, procedure, or use may cause

damage to or destruction of equipment.

1.1 Component

The Brushless A.C. generator is of drip-proof type.

For the details, check the supplementary drawings.

1.2 General

1) Type definition

The supply scope of the machine designs is determined entirely by the data given in the catalogs or offers.
The machines of basic design are open-circuit cooled, Brushless, low-voltage, synchronous machines
with top-mounted excitation control unit.

The machines have a shaft- mounted exciter on the inboard side of the non-drive end shield. The three-
phase AC current they generate is rectified and fed to the rotor winding of the main machine.

The excitation current required for the shaft-mounted exciter is provided by the main machine via an
excitation control unit placed in the top mounted housing or self free standing panel.

For further information, see the supplementary instructions entitled excitation system.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 5 of 26
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

2) Specification & regulation

The machines comply with the IEC60034-1 & DIN standards and with may the requirements of VDE 0530.
They may have been adapted to different classification requirements and foreign standards and
regulations.

The rated output for continuous operation applies to a frequency of 60 Hz, a cooling-air temperature of
50°C and a site altitude of up to 1000m above sea level.

3) Degree of protection

The generator enclosure is designed to comply with degree of protection IP44.

4) Type of construction

IM1101 with double sleeve bearing.

The type of construction of the machine supplied is shown in the dimension drawing.

5) Cooling and ventilation

The cooling of the internally-ventilated generators is in accordance with IEC34-6(IC0A1).

Two fans at both sides of the drive and non-drive ends draw the cooling air axially through the machine.

6) Connecting up

Check the system voltage against the data given on the rating plate. Select the size of the supply cables
to match the particular current rating.

Connect the machines in accordance with the diagram in the working drawing.

Before closing the terminal box, check to chippings

z Its interior is clean and free from any cable chippings

z All terminal screws or bolts are tight
z The minimum clearances in air are maintained
(>100mm for 11000V; check for any projecting wire ends)
z Entry openings which not in use are closed off by firmly screwed-in plugs
z For maintaining the particular degree of protection all sealing surfaces of the terminal box are in
order. The surfaces of metal-to-metal sealing joints must be cleaned and thinly regreased.

Before stating a machine and during operation make sure that all relevant safety regulations are complied
with.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 6 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

7) Insulation testing

Hazardous voltage
Will cause death, serious injury, electrocution or property damage.
Disconnect all power before working this equipment.
Before commissioning and after long periods of storage or standstill the insulation resistance of the
windings to the frame must be measured with D.C voltage.

Do not discontinue measurement before the final resistance value is indicated (with high-voltage
machines, this process may take up to 1minue).

The limit values for minimum insulation resistance and critical insulation resistance (for measurement at a
winding temperature of 25°C) and for measuring voltage can be derived from the following table 1
depending on the rated voltage for the machine.

[Table 1]
Insulation testing

Limit values at rated voltage

Rated voltage < 2kV Rated voltage >2kV

Measuring voltage 500V DC (min.100V DC) 500V DC (max. 5000V Dc)

Minimum insulation resistance with
new machine. 10 MΩ 10MΩ
Cleaned of repaired windings
Critical specific insulation Resistance
0.5 MΩ/kV 5MΩ/kV
after long period of operation

Dried new windings have insulation resistance values between 100MΩ and 2000MΩ or higher.
If the insulation resistance value is in the region of the minimum value, dampness and or dirt could be the
cause.

If the insulation resistance value falls below this minimum figure, the cause must be established and the
winding dried.

In case of drying by warm air oven,

z Remove bearing housings
z Remove rotor
z Remove diode varistor is excitation equipment part

Bake in the oven at temperatures as per below table 2.

The heat should be applied slowly so the desired temperature will not be obtained in less than six hours.
Insulation resistance should be measured before the heat is applied every six to eight hours thereafter.
[Table 2]
Insulation Drying Temperatures*
Class “F”
245°F*
118°C

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 7 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

*Class “F” insulated units should be baked at 70% specified temperature (to avoid steam inside winding)
for about six hours, before temperature is raised to drying temperature.
The insulation resistance for clean windings is largely dependent on temperature : for each 10K rise in
temperature it falls by half, i.e. with a temperature rise of 50K (e.g. from 25°C to 70°C) it falls to about
1/30 of the initial value.
During operation the insulation resistance of the windings may decrease as result of environmental and
operating conditions.

The critical value of the insulation resistance at a winding temperature of 25°C can be calculated
depending on the rated voltage by multiplying the latter (kV) by the specific critical resistance value in the
table (MΩ/kV).

For example : critical resistance for rated voltage

660V : 0.66 kV x 0.5 MΩ/kV = 0.33 MΩ

If the measured insulation resistance value is above the calculated critical figure during operation, the
machine can still operate further.

When the measured value reaches or falls below this critical insulation resistance figure, however, the
windings must either be dried, or the rotor must be removed and the windings thoroughly cleaned and
dried.

If the measured value approaches the critical value, the resistance should subsequently be checked at
appropriate short intervals.

Insulation resistance measurements on low-voltage machines with a measuring voltage of 1000V are only
permissible if the insulation resistance has previously been measured with a measuring voltage of a
maximum of 500V and has not fallen below the permitted values.

8) Noise emission

The noise level of the generator will not exceed that specified in part 9. VDE 0530(1981).

9) Vibration stability

Reciprocating engines used as prime mover impress vibrations on the alternator of the pulsating torque
output.

Permissible vibration stress measured at the bearing is:

< 10 HZ Vibration amplitude(s) < 0.40 [ mm-peak ]

10-100HZ Vibration velocity (v) < 18 [ mm/s-rms ]
>100HZ Acceleration(b) < 1.6 [ g ]

Please inquire if a higher vibration stress level is expected.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 8 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

10) Transport

Improper handling can cause severs injury or property damage

when lifting generator.
. Lift only at designated locations.
. Use spreader for lifting.
. Apply tension gradually to slings.
. Do not jerk or attempt to move unit suddenly
. Do not use cover lugs when lifting.

The rotor of machines with cylindrical roller bearings, angular-contact ball bearings, or
double sleeve bearing are locked in position for transport by a shaft block to protect the bearings.

Do not remove this block until the transmission element is fitted,

Should the machine have to be transported after the transmission element is fitted, other suitable
measures have to be taken.

If the machine is not put into service immediately after arrival, store it in a dry, vibration-free room.

11) Storage

Improper handling can cause severe injury or property damage.

. Lift only at designated locations.
. Use spreader for lifting.
. Apply tension gradually to slings.
. Do not jerk or attempt to move unit suddenly.
. Do not use cover lugs when lifting.

The location for storage should be dry and clean. There should be no fever min that could attack the
winding. The machined surfaces (coupling part, foots part, etc) are coating with rust-resistant grease. If
the costing is broken, immediately remover the rust or moisture and recoat with grease for rust prevention.

If the machine is to be stored for some time, apply all openings with waterproof paper, wooden, or metallic
covers.

It is necessary, to protect from the machine wind and rain during transportation and storage and to select
less humid place for storage.

For storage for a long-term or in the rainy season, it is the best to insert heaters to remove moisture or
prevent its condensation.

To keep the coil dry, maintain the coil temperature several degrees above room temperature by arranging
heaters appropriately under the machine part to warm the coils.

For long time storage, a space heater is placed inside the generator. Its specification is described in the
generator final specification and on the nameplate attached to the generator.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 9 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

12) Installation

Experience has shown that any base mounted assemblies of generator and driven
units temporarily aligned at the factory, no matter how rugged or deep in section
may twist during shipment.
Therefore, alignment must be checked after mounting.

The lubrication measures for normal bearings to be carried out before or during erection of the machines
are specified in the instructions “Sleeve Bearings”.

Install the machines so that the cooling air has free access and can escape unobstructed. Warm exhaust
air must not be drawn in again.

Louver openings must face upwards to maintain the particular degree protection.
Remove the shaft block (where applicable).

The rotors are normally balanced dynamically by mans of a half feather key placed in the shaft extension.
Align the machines carefully and accurately balance the elements to be fitted on the shaft to ensure
smooth and vibration-free running.

Place shims under the feet of the machines if necessary to prevent them from being stressed
mechanically. Transmission elements may be fitted and removed only by prevent them from falling out
during shipment. A machine must not be commissioned without its transmission element having been
fitted.

The alignment for site installation is according to the instructions “Alignment of Generator”.

13)Operation

Do not operate equipment beyond design limitations.

Can cause personal injury or damage to equipment.
Operate in accordance with instruction in the manual and nameplate ratings.

In case of cooling system of IP44 (air to water), check the flow of

cooling water for sure before starting. Internal temperature rise may cause fatal
damage to the generator.

Before starting, check if the bearing oil is filled with or, not to the sufficient oil
level.

Covers fitted to prevent access to rotating and current carrying parts or to correct the air flow for better
cooling must not be open in operation.

If machine application is abnormal (high temperature, extreme vibration, etc.), consult Hyundai Service
Team (Tel. : +82-52-202-6671~3) for special instructions.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 10 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

14) Maintenance

Before starting any work on a machine, make sure that it has been disconnected from the power supply
and that unintentional starting is safely prevented.

Clean the cooling air passages a regular intervals, matching the degree of pollution and using oil-free
compressed air, for example.

The inside of totally-enclosed fan-cooled machines need only be cleaned during normal overhauls.

If dust or moisture has penetrated into the terminal compartment, it should be carefully cleaned and dried,
in particular the surfaces of the insulating parts.

Check the seals and eliminate the leak.

Before forcing off a part, replace two upper fixing screws with longer screws or threaded bolts to support
the part after forcing it out of its central facility.

For the details of generator disassembly, refer to the supplementary drawing (Drawing No. : 2G-000546).
Additionally, check Section 2 for the more details.

15) Inspection

The first inspection should be carried out after approximately 500 hours.
The rate of fouling should be assessed and appropriate periods for cleaning the cooling air ducts decided
upon.

The following checks should also be carried out :

z Running smoothness of machine satisfactory

z Rotor alignment within tolerances
z No subsidence or cracks in he foundation
z All fixing bolts of mechanical and electrical joints tight
z Insulation resistance of windings satisfactory
(compare with previous rearing and record)
z No bridging of any bearing insulation
Any excessive deviations or changes ascertained during the checks must be corrected immediately.
Damaged or used locked elements from released bolted joints must be renewed.
The basic intervals between inspections ate approximat-ely 4000 hours, 1000 switching operations or 1
year for intermittent operation and approximately 16,000 hours or 2 years for continuous operation
depending on which occurs first.

The cleaning of all parts becoming fouled by the flow of cooling air depends on the intervals decided after
the first inspection according to the rate of fouling which occurs locally.

Cleaning should be carried out with dry compressed air. Information on oil changes, regreasing, etc. is
given on the lubrication instruction plate in the machine or in the supplementary instruction for bearings.
The checks stated for the first inspection after 500 hours should be performed during these inspection

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 11 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

also. When a machine is dismantled the following checks should be made :

z Slot wedges in stator and rotor cores tight

z Windings, connection leads, and insulating parts in satisfactory condition with no discoloration

After reassembly, again follow the instructions given for installation.

1.3 Composition

1) Stator frame and winding

The stator frame is of welded design. The stator core is centered in the frame and locked against rotation
and shifting. The stator winding is of a two-layer coil design with insulation class F.
This insulation is made in a special way and is comprised of integrated-mica & enamel coated insulating
material impregnated with cast resin.

It is characterized by high dielectric strength, resistance to moisture, aggressive gases and vapours, as
well as rigidity and long life.

2) Rotor and windings

The shaft for machines construction type B20 is designed with a normal cylindrical shaft extension for two
bearings.

The rotor core of the main machine is mounted on the shaft, tensioned axially, and supports the field and
damper windings, The damper winding bars lie in the slots of the rotor core and are welded to the rings.

The rotor core of the exciter is mounted in the shaft and supports the three-phase field winding.

The rectifier supporting wheel is mounted on the shaft between the two laminated cores.

The rotor is balanced dynamically.

3) AC exciter

The AC exciter is composed for revolving-armature type, three-phase, synchronous generators.

In revolving-armature type generators, unlike ordinary ones, the stator and rotor are in reverse relation.

The armature is installed at the shaft end in the non-connection side where AV power is generated, and
the output of the static excitation device for control is connected to the field winding installed on the fixed
side.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 12 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

4) Rotating rectifier

The rotating rectifier is a silicon rectifier which is connected so as to compose a three-phase full-wave
rectification circuit as shown in Fig. 3 and is mounted in the rotor shaft of generator.

z The mounting screws are between 4.5 Nm and 5.5 Nm

z The contact screws are between 2.5 Nm and 3.5 Nm

The rotating diode fastening screws must be tightened to the recommended torque.

[Fig.3]

5) Shaft

Concerning the generator shaft, the forged steel is adopted and designed with ample strength for
coupling with the prime mover.

6) Bearing

Depending in the design and the operating conditions specified in the order, the machines are fitted with
with sleeve bearings with or without forced-oil lubrication.

For a full description and special instruction, reference should be made to the supplementary instructions.

7) Cooling fan

To let the required amount of cooling air pass through, a fan of either cast iron or welded steel plate
construction is provided.

Concerning the site of its installation, two fans are located on the prime mover and opposite side of it in
the generator.

It is a two-way ventilating system which takes in air from prime mover and opposite side of it and lets out
exhaust air at the frame center position.

We have taken into consideration that the engine’s oil vapor should not be sucked into the machine.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 13 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

8) End shield AS/BS

Both end shields are designed as flat plates and can take either a bearing or a shaft extension in
accordance with the particular type of machine construction.

The exciter yoke ring on which the exciter poles are bolted in regular distribution, is welded to the BS-end
shield.

9) Thermometer

For checking the bearing temperature, a mercury thermometer is provided.

10) Space heater

Hazardous voltage
Will cause death, serious injury, electrocution or property damage.
Disconnect all power before working on this equipment.

[Fig. 4]
In order to prevent the accumulation of moisture and condensation
while the generator is idle, space heaters are provided within the
stator frame.

The space heaters can be easily removed from outside the

enclosure.
The heater is comprised of stainless-sheathed Ni-chrome, filled
with insulators in the sheath and is U-shaped as shown in Fig. 4.
01 Insulation materials
02 Heating conductor
03 Heatimg pipe
04 Lead cable

11) Terminal box

Hazardous voltage
Will cause death, serious injury, electrocution or property damage.
Disconnect all power before working on this equipment.

Degree of protection : IP44

4 leads wired out : U, V, W
Terminal box is located on the right side when viewed from drive end.

And auxiliary terminals are separately arranged with aux. terminal box located on the left side when
viewed from drive end.

For the details, check the main terminal box drawing and aux. terminal box ass’y drawing.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 14 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

2. Maintenance

2.1 Installation & Inspection Check List

Hazardous voltage
Will cause death, serious injury, electrocution or property damage.
Disconnect all power before working on this equipment.

Before the initial starting for in-service, check the items on table 3-1 for
sure. If not, may cause fatal damage in generator.

The purpose of this check-list is to ensure that all installation and inspection work is fully carried out. It is
therefore essential for the list to be filled in carefully. The number of relevant questions will depend on the
scope of the work to be carried out,

In the “Answer” column, “yes” or “no” or “n/a” (for “not applicable”) should therefore be checked off in
each case. In some lines, additional data or information must be entered or irrelevant items deleted.

If any further explanations are necessary, they should be placed in the report or final specification of the
generator.

[ Table 3 ]
Answer Installation
Condition of machines before installation
Yes No N/A

Packing of all machine components undamaged?

Winding guards properly fixed and locked?

All parts of the enclosure properly assembled?

Stator dowel-pinned?

Earthing or protective conductor connected?

High Voltage machines must be connected to the earth bus by a conductor of
equal cross-section
Low Voltage machines are to be Included in the protection arrangements by the
connection of the green yellow protective conductor or the concentric protective
conductor connecting terminal.
Insulation resistance Values at °C winding temperature

3 phases/earthed frame : MΩ
phase/phase : MΩ
measuring voltage: V
(usually 2000V or 5000V, DC)

Rotor Insulation resistance values at °C winding temperature

Rotor winding /earthed shaft : MΩ

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 15 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

Measuring voltage : V
(always 500V DC)

Cables/bars properly connected?

Cable strain-relief connected?

Journal bearings (Lubricating oil used)

Oil grade Viscosity at °C condition of bearings and shaft

Have any shipping bearing shells and/or shaft blocks been removed?

Anti-rust coating removed?

Shaft journals satisfactory?

Oil-ring fitted in the bearings?

Circularity of oil rings satisfactory?

Oil-ring slot of bearings shells debarred and rounded off?

Joint locked?

Bearing sealing rings properly fitted?

Bearing thermometers fitted?

All bearing bolts properly tightened and locked?

Bearing filled with oil to center marks of oil-level sight glasses?

Running of oil rings checked?

Oil pipe work cleaned and pickled?

Pressure reducer fitted?

Drive-end Journal bearing ℓ/min
Non-drive-end Journal baring ℓ/min
The specified oil flow rates are indicated on the bearing instruction plate. With the
specified flow rates, about half the clear cross-sections
of the oil drain pipes are filled with oil.
Rolling bearings

Grease lubrication

Type of grease

Check the flow of cooling water (IP44) :

Check the safety device in service or not?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 16 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

1) Inspection schedule

Daily
- Check bearing.
- Lubrication oil condition.
- Oil ring.
- Noise.
- Vibration.
- Temperature.
- Check electric circuit.
- Earth fault by earth lamp.
- Check loading condition.
- Voltage, output kW, current.

Monthly
- Check insulation resistance.
Caution : Before checking insulation resistance, disconnect and earthed the leads from A.V.R. Bolts and nuts.
- Tighten all bolts and nuts.
- Check ventilation openings.
- Check air intake opening and its air filter, clean or replace the filter if necessary.

Every 6 month
- Change lubrication oil and clean bearing.
- At the same time, check fitting or seating of bearing.
- Clean generator.

Flying dirt and dust of other particles.

They may cause eye injury.
Wear safety glasses and dust mask when using compressed air.

Inspect generator winding and air filters for dirt, dust, oil, and salt vapor accumulation.
Blow of contamination by dry and oil free compressed air.
Wipe off accumulated vapor with a lint free cloth and adequate solvent.
Check electrical connection.

Hazardous voltage
It will cause death, serious, electrocution or property damage.
Disconnect all power before working on this equipment.

z Inspect for loose electrical connection.

z Inspect cracked, frayed or oil soaked insulation.
Tighten or replace if necessary.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 17 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

2.2 Flange-Type Sleeve Bearing for ring lubrication system

1) Mounting

The flange-type sleeve bearings of electrical machines are of the split type.
They are ring-lubricated and are subject to the following instructions supplementing and modifying the
operating instruction of the machine:

Corresponding to the operating conditions the sleeve bearings of new machines should not be changed.
Scraping (spot-grinding) is not allowed not to make worse the anti-frictional qualities.

It is recommended that the contour of the transmission element remain within the hatched range to
remove the upper part of the bearing housing for maintenance without removing the transmission element.
Before the machines are aligned and commissioned, the bearings should be filled with lubricating oil
since the machines are delivered without oil in the bearings
(oil type is indicated on the name plate of the bearing).

For the details, check the supplementary instruction manual.

2) Operating description

Before starting, check if the bearing is filled with oil or not to the sufficient oil level.

Upon stopping, the shaft rests on the lower bearing, there is metal-to-metal contact.
During the start-up phase, the shaft rubs against the anti-friction metal of the bearing.
Oil lubrication is used.

After having reached its transition speed, the shaft creates its oil film.
At this point, there is no further contact between the shaft and bearing.

For the details, check the supplementary instruction manual.

Prolonged operation at extremely slow rotation speeds (several rpm) without

lubrication could seriously damage the service life of the bearing.

If the bearing temperature exceeds the normal operating value of 15K, stop the
machine immediately. Inspect the bearing and determine the causes.
Setting values of a safety device
- Alarm : 95°C
-Trip : 100°C
3) Oil change

Check the bearing temperature regularly.

The governing factor is not the temperature rise itself, but the temperature variations over a period of time.
Of abrupt variations without apparent cause are noticed, shut down the machine and renew the oil.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 18 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

The lubrication oil indicated on the data plate is used for starting up the machines at an ambient
temperature of above +5°C
At lower temperatures (to about -20°C) it is sufficient to preheat the oil.
If the ambient temperature us below -20°C another type of oil according to the special conditions is used.
Do not mix oils of different grades.

Recommended oil changing intervals are about 3000 and 6000 operating hours in the case of intermittent
and continuous duty. When cleaning, first flush the bearings with kerosene and then with oil.

If the lubricating oil contains unusual residues or is visibly changed, an inspection.

Pour in the kerosene and oil through the top sight-glass hole.

Leave the drain open until all the kerosene has been removed and clean oil runs out.

Now, plug the drain and fill the bearing with oil up to the center of the lateral inspection glass.

When the machine has run up to speed, check the oil ring through the top inspection glass to see that it
rotates correctly, and check he bearing shells be inspected.

Should the bearing temperature not drop to the normal value after the oil change, it is recommended that
the surfaces of the bearing shells be inspected.

If the bearings are fitted with thermometers for checking the bearing temperature, fill the thermometer well
in the upper bearing shell for thermo feeler with oil to improve heat transfer and top up with oil every time
the lubricating oil is changed.

For oil quantity applied, check the supplementary instruction manual.

For recommended oil grade, follow the SAE #40.

4) Dismantling, assembling

When insulated shaft current is applied the accessories in contact with the bearing
housing must be electrically insulated.

When dismantling the machine the lower part of the bearing housing need not be unscrewed from the end
shield. When opening the bearing housing shims (upper and lower parts) are installed.

These shims must be installed in the sane place when assembling the machine.

Exceptions are possible if the stator core was changed.

Drain the oil, take off the upper part of the bearing housing and the upper bearing shell, lift the shaft very
slightly and turn out the lower bearing shell and the sealing rings in a peripheral direction.

The oil ring can be withdrawn by holding it at an inclined position to the shaft.

If only slight damage has occurred to the bearing surface, it may be re-conditioned by scraping, as long

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 19 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

as the cylindrical shape of the bore is maintained, so that a good oil film can form.

The lining must be renewed if more serious damage is found.

The replacement bearing shells are delivered by the works with a finished inner diameter.

Oil rings which have become bent through careless handling will not turn evenly.

Straighten of replace such rings.

Replace any damaged sealing rings.

For the details, check the supplementary drawings (2G-000546) and instruction manual.

2.3 Air Filters

1) Air filter cleaning period

The cleaning period depends on the site conditions and can change. The cleaning of the filter is
requested if the record of the stator winding temperature (using the stator winding sensors) indicates an
abnormal increase in temperature.

2) Air filter cleaning procedure

The filter element (flat or cylindrical) is immersed in a tank of cold or warm water (temperature less than
50℃). Use water with detergent added.

Shake the filter gently to ensure that the water flows through the filter in both directions.

When the filter is clean, rinse it with clear water.

Drain the filter properly (there must be no more formation of droplets).

Refit the filter on the machine.

3) Location of Air filter

The air filter is incorporated with air inlet ventilation cover. If necessary, the air inlet cover should be
removed from generator body. For the details, check the supplementary drawings.

Do not clean the filter using compressed air.

This procedure would reduce filter efficiency.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 20 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

2.4 Terminal Box

High voltage
Power source must be disconnected before be fore working on equipment.
Failure to disconnect power source could result in injury or death.
Terminal box only to be opened by authorized personnel.

1) Description

Use the attached terminal box drawing in the final specification.

The main terminal box of the machine is located on the top of the machine.

The neutral and phase wires are connected to the copper bus bar-one copper bus bar per phase and one
copper bus bar per neutral line (option).

See terminal box diagram in the final specification.

The openings provide access to the terminals.

The gland plates are made of non-magnetic materials in order to avoid circulating currents if needed.

Compare the supply voltage with the data on the rating plate. Connect the supply leads and the links in
accordance with the circuit diagram on the inside of the terminals box.

Pay attention to the right direction of rotation (phase sequence in the case of three phase and polarity in
the case of direct current).

The supply leads should be matched to the rated current in line with VDE100 and their cross section must
not be excessive.

The main circuit is normally connected at both sides of the circuit bars with conductor cross section of
max. 300mm² and may be made by cable lugs or when connecting parts used in hazardous locations
which are present without any lugs.

The ends of the conductors should be stripped in such a way that the remaining insulation almost reaches
up to the lug or terminal (≤ 5mm).

In the case of cable lugs with long sleeves, it may be necessary to insulate the latter to maintain the
proper clearances in air.

If using cable lugs, se that the dimension of the cable lugs and its fastening elements (normally M12)
agree with the holes in the copper bus bar.

Use hexagon –head screws with a min. breaking point of 500 N/mm² , hexagon nuts and spring elements
which are protected against corrosion according to DIN 43673.

The connection of accessories is achieved by terminal strips.

Use a 5 mm maximum screwdriver to work on the blocking screws.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 21 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

See the terminal connection diagram in the final specification.

The supply leads-particularly the protective conductor-should be laid loosely in the terminal box with an
extra length for protecting the cable insulation against splitting and to prevent the terminals and circuit
bars from the tension load of load of the leads.

They should be introduced into the terminal box through cable entry fittings with strain-relief cleats should
be used for loose leads to prevent them from becoming twisted.

Close off any unused cable-entry openings.

2.5 Disassembly of A.C Generator

For the details, check the supplementary drawings (Drawing No. : 2G-000546)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 22 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

3. Trouble Shooting

3.1 Main Machines and Exciters

Hazardous voltage
Will cause death, serious, electrocution or property damage.
Disconnect all power before working on this equipment.
[Table 4] Fault diagnosis chart for excitation equipments, main machines and exciters
Voltage Too warm
deviates
Electric fault symptoms from rated Main
Exciter

Generator excitation fails

value machine

Defective rectifier
No load following

Stator winding

Stator winding
Rotor winding

Rotor winding
conditions
load duty

On-load
Cause

PMG

AVR
Incorrect service
Overload • • • • • • •
conditions or duty
under conditions
Speed deviating from set point • • •
deviating
order
from Excessive deviation from rated power factor • • • • • •
•
nd
specifications Incorrect operation, e.g. paralleling with 2
generator in phase opposition
Stator • • •
Main machine
Rotor • • •
Inter-turn fault
Stator • • •
Exciter
Rotor • • •
Stator •
Main machine
Winding
Rotor •
discontinuity
Stator •
Exciter
Rotor •
Defective rotating rectifier • • •
No remanence •
Inter-turn fault • • •
PMG
Winding discontinuity • • •
Single –phase
Inter-turn fault • • •
Faults on
current transformer
Winding discontinuity •
excitation
equipment AVR fault • • • •
AVR
-

- -

Defective rectifier - • • •

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 23 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

3.2 Bearing Part

Hazardous voltage
Will cause death, serious, electrocution or property damage.
Disconnect all power before working on this equipment.
[Table 5] Sleeve bearing
Defects
Possible cause Oil Large Remedy
Bearing Bearing Oil in
discolors temperature
overheats leaks machine
quickly variations
Oil aged or dirty • • Clean bearing housing;
renew oil
Oil ring does not rotate evenly • • • Straighten and deburr the
ring or renew it
Excessive axial thrust or radial load • • Check alignment and
coupling
Too little crest clearance 1) • • Rescrape bearing surface
Oil grooves too small or not wedge-
shaped
• • Refinish the oil grooves

Oil viscosity too high • Check viscosity change

oil
Oil viscosity too low • • Check viscosity change
oil
Defective bearing surface • • Renew lining

Defective seals • Renew seals

Incorrect oil discharge from sealing
rings
• Clean return
and groves
openings

Bearing too cold during stat-up • • Preheat the bearing or oil

Gap between sealing cover and shaft
too large
• Brush or replace the
cover
Pressure compensation opening
clogged
• Clean
opening
compensation

Forced-lubrication system failure • • Inspect system

Oil flow too high • Readjust the flow rate;

check oil discharge
1) Crest clearance = Inside diameter of bearing shells minus diameter of shaft

3.3 Operating Procedure & Check Sheet for Trouble shooting

Hazardous voltage
Will cause death, serious, electrocution or property damage.
Disconnect all power before working on this equipment.

1) Single running

- Start the Engine at its rated speed.

- Adjust No.1 generator voltage to its rated value at no-load using reference value setter (V.R)
which is mounted on control panel side. After adjusting the voltage to its rated value, on the
check the generator voltage using a digital tester at switch board side.
- Proceed above steps for No.2, No.3 and other generators.
- After completion of the no-load setting, read the indicative value on the panel and record the
results according to table 6.
- Circuit Breaker ‘ON’.
- Increase the load constantly from zero (0) to a rated load (as much as possible) and record

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 24 of 25
 Hyundai Heavy Industries Co., Ltd
Electro Electric Systems

the results according to Table 6.

- Proceed to above steps for No.2, No.3 and other generators.

2) Parallel running (for manual synchronizing )

- After load testing of each generator, start No.1 single running and proceed to above step 1).
- If the synchro scope indicates a synchronized position, insert the generator circuit breaker
carefully.
If synchronizing fails, the generator can be damaged by a transient current.
Please refer to synchronizing instructions of the switchboard maker.

- Increase the load constantly from zero(0) to a rated load.

- Record the results according to Table 8.

A. Parallel running of other generator : The method is the same as No.1.

B. If power factor and kVAR of one generator are greatly different when
compared with other generators after completion above the procedure,
consult the generator manufacturer using Table 8.
[Table 6] Single running
Item No. No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 Notes

R.P.M or Hz

Voltage
※ After match the no-load voltage of each generator, don’t adjust generator voltage (Before, during and after parallel running)

[Table 7] Single running

Item No. kW Volt(V) R.P.M (Hz) Current (A) Power Factor Notes

Each generator
(No.1, 2 …)

[Table 8] Parallel running

Item No. kW Volt(V) R.P.M (Hz) Current (A) Power Factor Notes

No.1 / / /

No.2 / / /

Each condition / / /

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 2012.03.15 Page: 25 of 25
 INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ALIGNMENT OF GENERATOR

HYUNDAI
HEAVY INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

1
ALIGNMENT OF GENERATOR
The correct alignment of machinery is very important for reducing the stress and vibration of
the shaft and the wear of the bearing and coupling.
In case a coupling maker gives those instructions, it is recommended that the instructions be
followed.

Flexible Coupling
The flexible coupling set forth herein means the one driven through the rubber brush or the
leather brush including the gear coupling. In aligning the motor equipped with the sleeve bearing,
attention is to be paid to the endplay of the motor bearing and to the position of the coupling. The
center of the motor bearing endplay is indicated by the end play indicator.
The bearing endplay can be equally divided by setting the end play indicator to the standard line of the shaft
as shown in Fig. 1.

Fig. 1 Endplay Indicator

CAUTION : In case the coupling is used, it may be considered that the rotor can
be easily moved in the axial direction. In fact, however, it hardly slides in the
axial direction at the coupling as the torque grows greater. When by some
reason the rotor has undergone some axial movement, and the coupling does
not provide enough slip to allow the rotor to return to the magnetic center of
the motor, it will continue to operate with the bearing end in contact with the
shoulder of the journal.
Rigid Coupling
In case of the sleeve bearing, when both flanges are connected to each other, the endplay indicator is referred
to install the flexible coupling in order to determine the position of the generator.

Alignment

NOTE: The foot plane is of concern for each unit of rotating equipment. Checked
driven equipment if necessary.

Alignment is made to bring the shaft centers of the motor and machine combined with it
into the same line; the parallel and eccentricity are measured through the coupling.
Generally a thickness gauge or a taper gauge is used in measuring the parallel, and in
measuring the eccentricity, a dial gauge is to be fitted to the coupling on one side; the
both shafts are to be turned by 0 deg, 90 deg, 180 deg and 270 deg; and the dial gauge
reading is to be taken at the four points as shown in Fig. 2. The alignment accuracy is to
be generally 0.025 mm or less (both plate and circle).

2
 Fig. 2 Procedure for Alignment

Measurement of Eccentricity
The both shafts are to be simultaneously turned; the values shall be obtained from the
measurement made at four points by means of a dial gauge and are to be recorded; and the
corrected value is to be obtained in the following manners.

90 deg

180 deg Circle 0 deg

270 deg

(Measuring Point)

C Circle A

(Measured Value)

A–C
Corrected value of left and right =
2

B–D
Corrected value of left and right =
2
(Corrected Value)
3
CAUTION; The difference between the total of the measured values at the left
and right points (A-C) and the total of the measured values at
the top and bottom points (B- D) should not
exceed 0.03 mm. The improper fitting of the dial gauge and the erection of the
fitting arm, if any, may cause greater difference.

Measurement of parallelism
The values at the four points of E1, F1, G1 and H1 are to be corrected after measurement
made by means of a thickness gauge at the position where both shafts were connected to
each other at the time of eccentricity measurement; and measurements are to be made
again at the points of E2,F2,G2 and H2 after turning both shafts.

F1

G1 Circle E1

H1
(Measured Value)

F2

G2 Circle E2

H2

(Measured Value)

Corrected value of top and bottom =

( F1 + F2 ) - ( H1 + H2 )
=
2
Corrected value of left and right =
( E1 + E2 ) - ( G1 + G2 )
=
2
(Measured Value)
4
 HSM BEARING MANUAL

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

Contents

1. Considerations for use………………………………………………………………. 10

2. Safety Instructions……………………………………………………………………. 11

3. Maintenance Schedule ………………….…………………………………………… 12

4. Oil Change……………………………………………………………………………… 13

5. Dismantling of the Bearing…………………………………………………………... 14

5.1 Tools and equipment……………………………………………………………… 14
5.2 Use of the lifting equipment……………………………………………………… 14
5.3 Preparation for dismantling…………………………………………………….... 15
5.4 Dismantling of the shaft seal –out board side…………………………………. 16
5.5 Dismantling of the top part of the housing……………………………………... 17
5.6 Removal of the top part of the shell…..………………………………………… 17
5.6.1 Dismantling of the loose oil ring……………………………………………. 17
5.6.2 Dismantling the machine side shaft seal……………………………….. … 17
5.7 Removal of the bottom part of the shell………………………………………... 17

6. Cleaning and Checking of the Bearing…………………………………………… 18

7. Assembly of the bearing…………………………………………………………….. 19

7.1 Fitting in the bottom part of the shell……………………………………………… 19
7.2 Assembly of the shaft seal – machine-side…………………………………….. 20
7.3 Installation of the loose oil ring……………………………………………………. 21
7.4 Fitting in the top part of the shell………………………………………………….. 21
7.5 Closing of the bearing……………………………………………………………… 22
7.6 Assembly of the Seals – Outboard side…………………………………………. 23

8. Starting Operation after Inspection…………………………………………………. 26

9. Corrosion Protection Longer Standstill Periods…………………………………. 27

10. Transport Protection…………………………………………………………………… 28

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 2

 6 8
7
5 4
3 9
2
1 10 12
11

13 14
16
17
xxx

xxx
18

20

21
22
24
23

19
15

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 3

1. Top part of the housing
2. Hole for position pin
3. Positioning pin
4. Oil ring
5. Top sight glass
6. Eye bolt
7. Screw
8. Screw
9. Tapped hole
10. Sealing cover
11. Top part of the shell
12. Screw
13. Bottom part of the shell
14. Spherical seating
15. Engraved number – housing
16. Tapped hole
17. Screw
18. Screw
19. Engraved number – shell
20. Bottom part of the housing
21. Tapped hole for temperature measurement of the journal part
22. Oil inlet connection hole
23. Tapped hole for the oil sump temperature measurement
24. Outlet / bottom sight glass

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 4

 25

26

27

28

Oil Ring

25. Division Oil ring

26. Pin
27. Hole
28. Screw

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 5

 29

30

35

34
31

32

33

36

39

38

37

29. Seal carrier – top part

30. Garter spring
31. Groove
Floating Seal 32. Seal carrier – bottom part
33. Bottom part of the seal
34. Top part of the seal
35. Anti – rotation pin
36. Screw
37. Engraved number
38. Groove
39. Engraved number

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 6

 40
41

46

x
x
x
42

43

x
x
x

45

44

Rigid Seal

40. Rigid labyrinth seal – top self

41. Screw
42. Screw
43. Groove
44. Rigid labyrinth seal – bottom part
45. Engraved number
46. Engraved number

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 7

 47

48

50

51

49

Baffle Type Seal

47. Baffle – top part

48. Screw
49. Baffle –bottom part
50. Engraved number
51. Engraved number

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 8

 52

53

xx

54 xx

55

Dust Flinger

52. Dust flinger

53. Screw (split line)
54. Engraved number
55. Engraved number

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 9

1. Considerations for use

The instructions maintenance and inspection are addressed to qualified technical

personnel (fitters, mechanic installers, mechanical engineers)

Read these instructions carefully before starting assembly

Slide bearing of type HSM are almost universally used in the engineering industry.
Therefore it is not possible to provide detailed information on all possible types and
Range of applications for these bearing types.
In form, the kind on oil ring and sealing ring, type can be changed by the requirement of the
Customers. Consequently we must work the specification of a bearing housing readiness after
The grasp.

Following indications should be observed when reading these instructions.

Danger

!
Warning of dangers for personnel.
Example: warning of injury

Attention!
Warning of damage for the bearing or installation.

Useful recommendations and additional information are framed.

This is how chapters, instructions or recommendations are marked when referring to a HSM type
bearing

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 10

2. Safety Instructions

Danger!

!
The maintenance and inspection of the slide bearings should be
carried out by:
• persons nominated by safety representative
• persons correspondingly trained and instructed
• persons with knowledge on appropriate standards, regulations and
accident prevention rules
• persons with knowledge on first-aid measures and local rescue
centers.

Warning of injury!

! Before starting work on the bearing:

- Switch off the installation
- Make sure the installation is no in operation.
* Never lift or transport machines, etc. by the bearing eye bolts.
These are only intended for assembly and dismantling of the bearing.
- Do not grab such heavy bearing parts as the housing during
assembly or dismantling work.

Attention!
- All metal parts of a slide bearing consisting of top and bottom part such as the
Housing, shells, shaft seals marked by engraved numbers. Fit together only the
part with the same number.
- In case
• the admissible bearing temperature exceeds by 15K
• inadmissible vibrations occur
• monitoring equipment triggers alarm
Shut down the installation and inform the maintenance personnel in charge.
- Do not operate the bearing below the transition speed values indicated in the
bearing calculation, thus avoiding inadmissible operating conditions, which could
lead to damage of the bearing

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 11

3. Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance work Deadline

Exterior cleaning of the bearing Every 100~ 1000 hours

Oil change Bearing in reversing operation every 5000 operating

hours.
Bearing in continuous operation every 20,000
operating hours (please observe also the indications
for the use of the lubricating oil).
Bearing inspection During prevention maintenance work for the
installation.
Immediately if:

• the bearing temperature exceeds 15K over the

indicated value
• unusual operating noises occur

• unusual changes of the lubricating oil become

visible

• increased oil level in the case of bearing

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 12

4. Oil change

Risk of pollution
- Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricating oil.
- Shut down the installation and secure it against unintended operation.
- Shut down the oil supply system.
- Take all necessary measures to collect the whole quantity of the lubricating oil.
- Drain off the lubricating oil while still in a warm condition. Impurities and residues will thus be
scavenged. Go ahead as follows:
- Drain off and collect the lubricating oil supply system.
- Unscrew the hexagon head plug (27). Drain off the lubricating oil and collect it.

Attention!
In case where the lubricating oil contains unusual residues or is visibly changed,
eliminate the causes. If necessary, carry out an inspection.

- Clean the oil tank.

- Fill up the oil supply system with lubricating oil. Use a lubricant with viscosity
indicated on the bearing type plate.
- Start the oil supply system in order to fill up the with lubricating oil.
- Tighten the hexagon head plug (27) to the following torque rates.

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 13

5. Dismantling of the bearing

5.1 Tools and equipment

- Following tools and equipment are necessary

5.2 Use of lifting equipment

Risk of injury!

!
Before transport or lifting check if the eye bolts tight! Insecure eye
bolts could result in bearing becoming loose.

Before moving the bearing by the bolts make sure that the split line
screws are tightened, otherwise the bottom half of the bearing could
become detached.

Make sure that the eye bolts are exposed to bending stress, otherwise
the bolts could break.

Follow exactly instructions for the use of the lifting equipment.

- Following step are observed before using the lifting equipment

Whole bearing unit

- Check if the eye bolts are tight
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eyebolts

Top half of the housing

- Check if the eye bolts are tight.
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts

Bottom half of the housing

- Screw two eye bolts with suitable threads tight into the cross-placed opposite tapped
holes.
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts

Shells
- Screw two eye bolts or screw hooks with suitable threads tight into tapped holes
- Connect the lifting equipment to the screw hooks.

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 14

5.3 Preparation for dismantling

Attention!
Make sure that work place is clean. Contamination and damage to the bearing, especially to
the working surfaces, have a negative influence on the operating quality and could lead to
premature failure

Attention!
Do not use any violence or force!

- Shut down the installation and ensure it against unintended operation.

- Shut down the oil supply system
- Interrupt the cooling water supply
- Disconnect all thermo sensors from the tapped holes.
- Take all necessary measures to collect the lubricating oil.
- Unscrew the hexagon head plug and collect the lubricating oil.

Risk of pollution!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricating oil

- Inform yourself about maintenance and inspection of the oil supply system

5.4 Dismantling of the shaft seal - outboard side

- Dismantle the outboard side seals of the bearing

5.4.1 Floating labyrinth seal

- Loosen all screws and take them out.

- Remove simultaneously in axial direction both top half and bottom half of the seal carrier from
the housing.
- shaft about 20mm the top half of the seal. Tilt over carefully until the garter spring unbends.

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 15

 Warning of injury!

! During dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal hold tight the garter spring which is
under tension and could bounce back and lead to injury.

- Open the garter spring and remove the bottom half of the seal from the shaft

5.4.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger

- Dismantle the dust flinger(52). Loosen the screws(53) and take out the dust flinger (52) from the
groove (38) of the seal carrier. Remove both halves of the dust flinger.
- go on as indicated for chapter 5.4.1

5.4.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle

- Disconnect both top (47) and bottom (49) halves of the baffle by untightening the screws(48).
- Go on as indicated for chapter 5.4.1

5.4.4 Rigid labyrinth seal

- Loosen all screws (41) and take them out.
- take out the screws (42).
- Remove simultaneously in axial direction both top (40) and bottom (44) halves of the rigid
labyrinth seal.

5.4.5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger

- Dismantle the dust flinger (52). Loosen the screws (53) and take out the dust flinger (52) from
the groove (43) of the rigid seal.

5.4.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle

- Unscrew the top half (47) and the bottom half (49) of the baffle by untightening the screws(48)

5.5 Dismantling of the top half of the housing

- Unscrew the screw plug with the welded – on positioning pin.
- Remove the screws (8).
- Remove the screws(12).
- Lift the top part of the housing until the top part of the housing can be moved in axial line over
the shell, without touching it.

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 16

5.6 Removal of the top half of the shell
- Unscrew the screws (18) and lift the top half of the shell(11)

Attention!
Do not damage the thrust and working surfaces.

Attention!
In the case of insulated housings (white plastic insulating foil) avoid any jamming of the top half
of the shell when you lift it up.
Jamming could lead to damage of the insulating foil in the bottom half of the housing

5.6.1 Dismantling of the loose oil ring

- Open both split lines of the loose oil ring (25) by untightening and tasking out the screws(28)

To check the geometry of the loose oil ring put it together as follows:
- Press the positioning pin (26) into the holes (27).
- Adjust both halves of the loose oil ring till the split line match each other.
- Tighten the screws(28).

5.6.2 Dismantling the machine side shaft seal

- Shift a little (about 20mm) the top half (34) of the seal. Tilt it over carefully until the garter spring
(30) unbends

Warning of injury!

! During dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal hold tight the garter spring which is
under tension and could bounce back and lead to injury.

- Open the garter spring and turn the bottom half of the seal (52) in opposite direction from the
anti-rotation pin out of the integrated seal groove of the bottom half of the housing

5.7 Removal of the bottom half of the shell

Attention!
The lifting equipment should not come into contact with the seal and working surfaces of the
shaft

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 17

- Lift the shaft up to the point where shaft and bottom half of the shell (13) do not touch each
other any more. protect the shaft against unintended movement.
- Turn the bottom half of the shell (13) out of the bottom half of the (20)housing and remove it
from the shaft.

6. Cleaning and checking of the Bearing

Attention!
Use only non – aggressive detergents such as for instance
• VALVOLINE 150
• Alcaline cleaning compounds (PH- value 6 to 9, short reaction time).

Warning of injury!

!
please observe the instructions for the use of the detergents.

Attention!
Never use cleaning wool or cloth. Residues of such materials left in the bearing could lead to
excessive temperatures.

- Clean the following parts thoroughly

• top part of the housing (1)
• bottom part of the housing (20)
• top part of the shell (11)
• bottom part of the shell (13)
• sealing surfaces of the top part (29) and bottom part (32) of the seal carrier or of the
rigid labyrinth seal.
• oil ring (25)

- Check the insulating layer of the spherical seating of the top part (1) and bottom part(20)
of the hosing

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 18

7. Assembly of the Bearing

Attention!
Remove all impurities or other objects such as screws, nuts, etc. from inside the bearing. If left
Inside they could lead to damage of the bearing. Cover up the opened bearing during work
Breaks.

Attention!
Carry out all assembly operations without making use of force.

Attention!
Secure all screws at the split line, of the housing and flange with a liquid screw locking
compound (.LOCTITE 242).

7.1 Fitting in the bottom half of the shell

Attention!
Mounting the bottom part of the shell correctly will ease the assembly of the top part shell

- Place the bottom part of the shell (13) on the working surface of the shaft. Turn the bottom part
of the shell into the bottom part of the housing (20) with the split line surfaces of both halves in
true alignment.

In case the bottom part of the shell doesn’t turn in easily, check the position of the shaft and the
Alignment of the housing

Attention!
These operations should be carried out most carefully. The thrust parts of the bottom shell must
not be damaged.

- Lower down the shaft till it sits on the bottom part of the shell(13)

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 19

7.2 Assembly of the shaft seal –machine- side

The machine – side shaft seal, as standard, a floating labyrinth seal. The integrated seal groove
Is in the top and bottom parts of the housing.

Warning of injury!

! During assembly hold the garter spring ends (30) securely to avoid them suddenly
releasing and causing possible injury!

Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft in the seal area outside the
housing:

- Put the garter spring(30) around the shaft and hook both ends into each other.
- Put both halves of the seal (33), (34) in their place on the shaft.
- Put the garter spring into the groove (50)
- Turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft

Attention!
The floating labyrinth seal should turn easily on the shaft. A jammed seal could lead to
overheating during operation and even to shaft wear. If the floating labyrinth seal jams.
- dismantle the seal and
- remove the worm parts of the seal carefully, by using emery paper of a plain scraper.

- Dismantle the floating labyrinth seal.

- Apply sealing compound to the guide surfaces of the integrated seal groove in the bottom part
of the housing.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the seal surfaces and to the split line surfaces of
both halves of the seal (33), (34)

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 20

Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.

- Place the bottom part of the seal (33) with the labyrinths onto the shaft.
- The oil return holes at the bearing side must be clear and open.
- Turn the seal in opposite direction from the anti-rotation pin into the groove of the housing until
the split lines of the bottom part of the housing and the bottom part of the seal match each
other.
- Remove the residue of sealing compound.
- Push the spring hook into the integrated groove between the bottom half of the housing and
the seal until both ends jut out from the split line.
- Place the top half of the seal with the cam facing the inside of the bearing on the bottom half of
the seal.
- Stretch the garter spring till both ends can be hooked.

7.3 Installation of the loose oil ring

- Open both split lines of the loose oil ring(25) by untightening and removing the screws (28).
- Place both halves of the loose oil ring into the shell groove (13) around the shaft. Press the
positioning pin(26) of each split into the corresponding hole (27).
- Adjust both halves of the loose oil ring till the split lines match each other.
- Tighten the screws (28) to the following

7.4 Fitting in the top half of the shell

- Apply some lubricant to the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as
indicated for bearing operation .
- Check if the engraved number (15) on the bottom and top parts of the shell correspond.
- both engraved numbers (15) should be on the same side.

Attention!
An incorrectly placed shell could jam the shaft thus leading to the damage of both shaft
and bearing.

Attention!
Place the top part of the shell carefully on the shaft. The thrust parts of the top part of the shell
must not be damaged.

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 21

7.5 Closing of the bearing

- Check the true alignment of the shell (11) (13) and bottom half (20) of the housing

The positioning pin(3) in the top half of the housing fits in the corresponding hole (2).
The shell is thus placed into its right position.

- Check if the engraved number (19) on the top and halves of the housing correspond.
- Clean the split line surfaces of the top and bottom haves (1),(20) of the housing.
- Apply sealing compound to the whole surface of the split line of the bottom half (20) of the
housing.

Please observe the instructions for use of sealing compound.

- Place the top half of the housing carefully into the machine shield, without touching the seals or
the shell.
- Lower the top half of the housing (1) vertically on the bottom part of the housing (20). Lower
the top part of the housing (1) till the split line of the housing is not visible any more.
- Gently hit the bottom part of the housing (20) with a nylon hammer, thus ensuring the
alignment of the spherical seating.
- Insert the screws (12). Tighten them hand-tight.
- Insert the screws (8). Tighten them to the following torque rates.
- Tighten the screws (12) of the housing crosswise to the same torque rate.
- Tighten the screw plug with the welded-on positioning pin into the top half of the housing.

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 22

7.6 Assembly of the seals – out board side

- Assemble the out board side seals.

7.6.1 Floating labyrinth seal

Warning of injury!

!
During assembly hold the garter spring ends(30) securely to avoid them suddenly
releasing and causing possible injury.

Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft in the seal area outside the
Housing.

- Put the garter spring (30) around the shaft and hook both ends into each other.
- Put both halves of the seal (33),(34) in their place on the shaft.
- Put the garter spring (30) into the groove(31).
- turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.

Attention!
The floating labyrinth seal should turn easily on the shaft. A jammed seal could lead to
overheating during operation and even to shaft wear.

If the floating labyrinth seal jams,

- dismantle the seal and
- remove the worn parts of the seal carefully, by using emery paper or a plain scraper.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the seal surfaces and to the aplit line
surfaces of both halves of the seal (33),(34)

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 23

7.6.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle

- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with baffle as in Chapter 7.6.1.

- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the flange surfaces of the top part (47) and
bottom part (49) of the baffle.
- The top part of the baffle (47) to the top part of the seal carrier(29)
- The bottom part of the baffle (49) to the bottom part of the seal carrier(32)
- Tighten the screws (48) to the following torque rates

7.6.4 Rigid labyrinth seal

- Check of the engraved number (45) and (46) on the bottom part (44) and top part (40) of the
rigid labyrinth seal correspond.
- Clean
• the flange surfaces of the top part (40) and bottom part (44) of the rigid labyrinth seal
• the split line surfaces of the top part (40) and bottom part (44) of the rigid labyrinth seal
• the flange surfaces of the housing.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the following parts
• the flange surfaces of the top part (40) and bottom part (44) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
• the split lines of the top part (40) and bottom part (44) of the rigid labyrinth seal.

Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.

- Place the top half (40) of the rigid labyrinth seal on the shaft and press slightly the bottom part
(44)of the rigid labyrinth seal from below against it. Lightly push the rigid labyrinth seal
completely into the housing.
- Tighten the screws(42)
- Place in parallel alignment the split line of the rigid labyrinth seal and the split line of the
housing. Press the rigid labyrinth seal slightly from below against the shaft.
- Tighten the screws(41) to the following torque rates.

7.6.5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger

- Assemble the rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger as indicated in chapter 7.6.4 .
- Place both halves of the dust flinger (52) round the shaft, in front of the rigid labyrinth seal.
Mount the screws (53) loose.
- push the dust flinger (52) into the groove (43) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
- Tighten the screws (53) to the following torque rates.

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 25

7.6.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle

- Assemble the rigid labyrinth seal with baffle as described in chapter 7.6.4
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the flange surfaces of the top half (47) and
bottom half (49) of the baffle.
- The top half of the baffle (47) to the top half (40) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
- The bottom half of the baffle (49) to the bottom half (44) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
- Tighten the screws (48) to the following torque rates

8. Starting Operation after Inspection

- Fit the thermo sensors for:

• temperature measurement of the journal part in the tapped holes(21)
• temperature measurement of the thrust part in the tapped holes (optional)
- Retighten all screw plugs in the tapped holes (21),(23),(27) to the following torque rates.
- Check that the top sight glass is tight
- Retighten the connection holes for oil inlet and oil outlet and the holes for the thrust part oil
supply system (optional). The torque depends on the threaded joints used.
- Carry out a visual check of the assembled bearing.
- Fill up the oil supply system with lubricant. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated on the
type plate.
- Start operating the oil supply system in order to fill up the bearing with lubricant.
- Check
• The way the oil supply system functions (see also the Technical Documentation of the
installation).
• that the temperature monitoring equipment functions.

Attention!
- Not enough lubricant leads to temperature rises and thus to damage to the bearing.
- Too much lubricant leads to leakages.

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 26

- Start operating the cooling water supply system and check its functioning.
- Supervise the bearing during the trial run (5 ~ 10 operating hours).
Pay special attention to:
• the way the oil supply system works (necessary lubricant quantity, lubricant pressure before
entering the bearing)
• bearing temperature
• sliding noises of the shaft seals
• tightness
• occurrence of inadmissible vibrations.

Attention!
If the bearing temperature exceeds the calculated value by 15K stop the installation
Immediately. Carry out an inspection of the bearing and find out the causes.

9. Corrosion Protection for Longer Standstill Periods

If you want to protect the bearing mounted on an installation against corrosion proceed as
Follows:

- Dismantle the bearing ( see chapter 5)

- Clean the bearing (see chapter 6)
- Paint or spray the top half of the shell (11), the bottom half of the shell (13) and the shaft with
TECTYL 511.
- Assemble the bearing (see chapter 7)
- Close all tapped holes with screw plugs.
- Seal the gaps between by using a self – adhesive, permanent tape.
• shaft seal and housing
• shaft seal and shaft
- Remove the top sight glass (5). Spray some anti-corrosive such as TECTYL511 or
VALVOLINE into the bearing.
- Put a bag of silicate gel inside. The dessicant absorbs the humidity and prevents the formation
of condensation water inside the bearing.
- Close the bearing tight with the top sight glass (5)

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 27

Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.

- Press the bottom half of the seal(33) against the shaft.

- Place the top half of the seal(34) on the shaft and align both haves of the seal to each other.
- Place the garter spring (30) into the groove(31) and stretch until both ends can be hooked.
- Place in true alignment the split line of the floating labyrinth seal and the split line of the seal
carrier.
- Check that both engraved number (37) and(39) on top and bottom halves of seal carrier
(29), (32) correspond.
- Clean the following parts
• the seal surfaces of the top (29) and bottom (32) part of the seal carrier
• the split line surfaces of the top (29) and bottom (32) part of the seal carrier
• the flange surfaces of the housing.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to:
• the lateral surfaces of the groove at the top(29) and bottom (32) part of the seal carrier
• the flange surfaces of the top (29) and bottom (32) part of the seal carrier
• the split line surfaces of the bottom part of the seal carrier (32).

Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.

- Place the top part of the seal carrier (29) on the top part of the seal (34). Press the bottom part
(32) of the seal carrier against it. Push the shaft seal completely into the housing.
- Place in true alignment the split lines of the seal carrier and the housing.
- Tighten up the screws (36) to the following torque rates:

7.6.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger

- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger as described in Chapter 7.6.1, Floating
labyrinth seal type 10.
- Place both halves of the dust flinger (52) in front of the shaft seal around the shaft. Loosely
screw in the screws(53).
- Push the dust flinger (52) into the groove (38) of the seal carrier.
- Set the clearance “e” at 1mm around the whole unit.
- Tighten the screws (53) to the following torque rates

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 24

In case the standstill period is longer than ½ year:
- Repeat the preservation procedures.
- Put a new bag of dessicant into the bearing.

In case the standstill period lasts more years:

- Dismantle the shells
- Preserve and store the bearing parts.

10. Transport Protection

In case of a machine equipped with slide bearing of type HSM

- Carry out the corrosion protection as described in Chapter 9 and apply enough lubricant on the
working surfaces of the bearing.
- Secure the shaft against thrust and radial movements during transport.

HANSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD. 28

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

HM BEARING MANUAL

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

Please keep this manual nearby you so that you can reference at any time.

This manual is the standard documentation of HM TYPE. Appearance and additional

components are flexible, depending on your requirements, so please refer to.

Information and specifications of the product are valid only if this manual is approved by
HAN SUNG machinery.
machinery

Safety could be penalized if you use such as modification or variant except this manual.

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

Preliminary remark

Thank you for choosing products of HAN SUNG machinery.

Please read this carefully if you want the best satisfaction in the sleeve bearing of HM
TYPE you will encounter.

Especially, you need to check careful when you see the marks “Attention” and “Danger”
during reading this manual. This is connected with safety and will help you avoiding from
injury.

It’s impossible that we warn you against all risk about operating and assembly of the
sleeve bearing. You need to use correctly and carefully.

HAN SUNG machinery is dedicated to customer’s satisfaction. And will respond

customer’s questions and concerns in good faith.

- HAN SUNG MACHINERY -

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

Contents

1. Considerations for use..........................................................................................................12

2. Safety Instructions.................................................................................................................13

3. Maintenance Schedule..........................................................................................................15

4. Oil Change..............................................................................................................................16

5. Dismantling of the Bearing...................................................................................................17

5.1 Tools and equipment.......................................................................................................17
5.2 Use of the lifting equipment.............................................................................................17
5.3 Preparation for dismantling..............................................................................................20
5.4 Dismantling of the shaft seal –out board side.................................................................21
5.5 Dismantling of the top part of the housing.......................................................................22
5.6 Removal of the top part of the shell.................................................................................23
5.6.1 Dismantling of the loose oil ring..............................................................................24
5 6 2 Dismantling the machine side shaft seal.................................................................24
5.6.2 seal 24
5.7 Removal of the bottom part of the shell...........................................................................25

6. Cleaning and Checking of the Bearing..............................................................................26

7. Assembly of the bearing.......................................................................................................27

7 1 Fitting
7.1 Fitti ini the
th bottom
b tt partt off the
th shell...............................................................................28
h ll 28
7.2 Assembly of the shaft seal – machine-side.....................................................................29
7.3 Installation of the loose oil ring........................................................................................30
7.4 Fitting in the top part of the shell.....................................................................................30
7.5 Closing of the bearing......................................................................................................31
7.6 Assembly of the Seals – Outboard side..........................................................................32

8. Starting Operation after Inspection.....................................................................................36

9. Corrosion Protection Longer Standstill Periods...............................................................37

10. Tightening Instructions for standard screws.....................................................................38

11 . Transport Protection............................................................................................................38
4

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

1
1. T
Top partt off the
th housing
h i
2. Hole for position pin
3. Positioning pin
4 Oil filler bore
5. Top sight glass
6. Eye bolt
9. Tapped hole
10. Sealing cover
11. Top part of the shell
12. Screw
13. Bottom part of the shell
14. Spherical seating
16. Tapped hole
18. Screw
20. Bottom part of the housing
21. Tapped hole for temperature measurement of the journal part
22. Oil inlet connection hole
23
23. Tapped hole for the oil sump temperature measurement
24. Outlet / bottom sight glass

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

25

26

27

28

Oil Ring

25. Division Oil ring

26. Pin
27. Hole
28. Screw

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection
29

30

35

34
31

32

33

36

39

38

37

29. Seal carrier – top part

30
30. Garter spring
31. Groove
Floating Seal 32. Seal carrier – bottom part
33. Bottom part of the seal
34. Top part of the seal
35.
35 Anti – rotation pin
36. Screw
37. Engraved number
38. Groove
39. Engraved number

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

40
41

46

x
x
x
42

43

x
x
x

45

44

Rigid Seal

40. Rigid labyrinth seal – top self

41. Screw
42. Screw
43. Groove
44. Rigid labyrinth seal – bottom part
45. Engraved number
46. Engraved number

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

47

48

50

51

49

Baffle Type Seal

47. Baffle – top part

48. Screw
49. Baffle –bottom part
50
50. Engraved number
51. Engraved number

10

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

52

53

xx

54 xx

55

g
Dust Flinger

52. Dust flinger

53. Screw (split line)
54. Engraved number
55
55. Engraved number

11

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

1. Considerations for use

The instructions maintenance and inspection are addressed to qualified technical personnel.
(fitters, mechanic installers, mechanical engineers)

Read these instructions carefully before starting assembly.

Slide bearing of type HM are almost universally used in the engineering industry.
Therefore it is not possible to provide detailed information on all possible types and range of
applications for these bearing types.
In form, the kind on oil ring and sealing ring, type can be changed by the requirement of the
Customers. Consequently we must work the specification of a bearing housing readiness after
the grasp.
Following indications should be observed when reading these instructions.

Danger

!
Warning of dangers for personnel.
Example: warning of injury.

Attention!
Warning of damage for the bearing or installation.

Useful recommendations and additional information are framed.

This is how chapters, instructions or recommendations are marked when referring to a HM type
bearing.

12

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

2. Safety Instructions

Danger!

! The maintenance and inspection of the slide bearings should be carried out by:
• Persons nominated by safety representative.
• Persons appropriately trained and instructed.
• Persons with knowledge on appropriate standards, regulations and
accident prevention rules.
• Persons with knowledge on first-aid measures and local rescue
centers.

Warning of injury!

!
Before starting work on the bearing:
- Switch off the installation.
- Make sure that do not be installed during operation.
* Never lift or carry machines by the bearing eye bolts.
These are only intended for assembly and dismantling of the bearing.
- Do not grab heavy bearing parts such as the housing during assembly or
dismantling.

13

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

Attention!

All metal parts of a slide bearing

consisting of top and bottom part
such as the Housing, shells, shaft seals
marked by engraved numbers.
Fit together only the part with the same number.

- In case
• The admissible bearing temperature exceeds by 15K.
• Occur inadmissible vibrations.
• Brake alarm is ringing.
Shut down the installation and inform the maintenance personnel in charge.
- Do not operate the bearing below the transition speed values indicated in the bearing
calculation, thus avoiding inadmissible operating conditions, which could lead to damage of
the bearing.

14

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

3. Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance work Deadline

Exterior cleaning of the bearing Every 100~ 1,000 hours

Oil change Bearing

B i iin reversing
i operationti every 5
5,000
000 operating
ti
hours.
Bearing in continuous operation every 20,000
operating hours (please observe also the indications
for the use of the lubricating oil).
Bearing inspection During prevention maintenance work for the
installation
installation.
Immediately if:

• The bearing temperature exceeds 15K over the

indicated value.
• Unusual operating noises occur.

• Unusual changes of the lubricating oil become

visible.

• Oil level is risen.

15

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

4. Oil change

Risk of pollution
- Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricating oil.
- Shut down the installation and secure it against unintended operation.
- Shut down the oil supply system.
- Take all necessary measures to collect the whole quantity of the lubricating oil.
- Drain off the lubricating oil while still in a warm condition. Impurities and residues will thus be
scavenged. Go ahead as follows:
- Drain off and collect the lubricating oil supply system.
g head p
- Unscrew the hexagon plug.
g Drain off the lubricating
g oil and collect it.

Attention!
In case where the lubricating oil contains unusual residues or is visibly changed,
eliminate the causes. If necessary, carry out an inspection.

<Oil level should be always maintained as the picture above.>

- Clean the oil tank.

- Fill up the oil supply system with lubricating oil. Use a lubricant with viscosity
indicated on the bearing type plate.
- Start the oil supply system in order to fill up the with lubricating oil.
- Tighten
g the hexagon
g head p plug
g to the followingg torque
q rates.

16

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

5. Dismantling of the bearing

5.1 Tools and equipment

- Following tools and equipment are necessary.

5.2 Use of lifting equipment.

Risk of injury!

!
Before transport or lifting check if the eye bolts tight!
Insecure eye bolts could result in bearing becoming
loose.

Before moving the bearing by the bolts make sure that

the split line screws are tightened,
otherwise the bottom half of the bearing could
become detached.

Make sure that the eye bolts are exposed to bending stress, then the bolts could be broken.

Follow exactly instructions for the use of the lifting equipment.

※Please use safety hook which is installed a safety device when

use hook in lift equipment especially.

17

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

 USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

- Following step are observed before using the lifting equipment.

Whole bearing unit

- Check
C iff the eye bolts are tight.

- Connect the lifting equipment to the eyebolts.

Top half of the housing

- Check if the eye bolts are tight.

- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts.

18

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

 USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

- Following step are observed before using the lifting equipment

Bottom half of the housing

- Screw two eye bolts with suitable threads tight into the
cross-placed.
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts opposite
tapped holes
holes.

Shells

- Screw two eye bolts or screw hooks with suitable threads

tight into tapped holes.
- Connect
C t th
the lifti
lifting equipment
i t to
t the
th screw hooks.
h k

19

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

5.3 Preparation for dismantling

Attention!
Make sure that work place is clean. Contamination and damage to the bearing, especially to
the working surfaces, have a negative influence on the operating quality and could lead to
premature failure.

Attention!
Do not use any violence or force!

- Shut down the installation and ensure it against unintended operation

operation.
- Shut down the oil supply system.
- Interrupt the cooling water supply.
- Disconnect all thermo sensors from the tapped holes.
- Take all necessary measures to collect the lubricating oil.
- Unscrew the hexagon head plug and collect the lubricating oil.

! Risk of pollution!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricating oil.

- Inform yourself about maintenance and inspection of the oil supply system.

20

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

5.4 Dismantling of the shaft seal - outboard side

- Dismantle the outboard side seals of the bearing.

5.4.1 Floating labyrinth seal

- Loosen all screws and take them out.

- Remove simultaneously in axial direction both top half and bottom half of the seal carrier from
the housing.
housing
- Tilt over carefully until the garter spring unbends after raising the upper seal around 20Cm.

Warning of injury!

!
Hold tight the garter spring during dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal which is
under the tension and could bounce back. This could lead to injury.

- Open the garter spring and remove the bottom half of the seal from the shaft.

21

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

5.4.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger.

- Dismantle the dust flinger(52). Loosen the screws(53) and take out the dust flinger (52) from the
groove (38) of the seal carrier. Remove both halves of the dust flinger.
- go on as indicated for chapter 5.4.1

5.4.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle.

- Disconnect both top (47) and bottom (49) halves of the baffle by untightening the screws(48).
- Go on as indicated for chapter 5.4.1

5.4.4 Rigid labyrinth seal.

- Loosen all screws ((41)) and take them out.
- Take out the screws (42).
- Remove simultaneously in axial direction both top (40) and bottom (44) halves of the rigid
labyrinth seal.

5.4.5
5 4 5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger.
flinger
- Dismantle the dust flinger (52). Loosen the screws (53) and take out the dust flinger (52) from
the groove (43) of the rigid seal.

5.4.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle

- Unscrew the top half (47) and the bottom half (49) of the baffle by untightening the screws(48)
screws(48).

5.5 Dismantling of the top half of the housing.

- Unscrew the screw plug with the welded – on positioning pin.
- Remove the screws(12).
- Lift th
the top
t partt off the
th housing
h i until
til the
th top
t partt off the
th housing
h i can be
b moved
d in
i axial
i l liline over
the shell, without touching it.

22

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

5.6 Removal of the top half of the shell

- Unscrew the screws (18) and lift the top half of the shell(11)

Attention!
Do not damage the thrust and working surfaces.

Attention!
In the case of insulated housings (white plastic insulating foil)
avoid any jamming of the top half of the shell when you lift it up.
Jamming could lead to damage of the insulating foil in the
bottom half of the housing.

23

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

5.6.1
5 6 1 Dismantling of the loose oil ring
- Open both split lines of the loose oil ring (25) by untightening and taking out the screws(28).

To check the geometry of the loose oil ring put it together as follows:
- Press the positioning pin (26) into the holes (27).
- Adjust both halves of the loose oil ring till the split line match each other.
- Tighten the screws(28).

5.6.2 Dismantling the machine side shaft seal.

- Shift a little (about 20mm) the top half (34) of the seal. Tilt it over carefully until the garter spring
(30) unbends.

Warning of injury!

! Hold tight the garter spring during dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal which is
under the tension and could bounce back. This could lead to injury.

- Open the garter spring and turn the bottom half of the seal (33) in opposite direction from the
anti-rotation pin out of the integrated seal groove of the bottom half of the housing.

24

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

5 7 Removal of the bottom half of the shell

5.7

Attention!
The lifting equipment should not come into contact with the seal and working surfaces of the
shaft.

- Lift the shaft up to the point where shaft and bottom half of the shell (13) do not touch each
other any more. protect the shaft against unintended movement.
- Turn the bottom half of the shell (13) out of the bottom half of the housing (20) and remove it
from the shaft.

25

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

6. Cleaning and checking of the bearing

Attention!
Use only non – aggressive detergents such as for instance
• VALVOLINE 150.
• Alkali cleaning compounds (PH- value 6 to 9, short reaction time).

Warning of injury!

! Please observe the instructions for the use of the detergents.

Attention!
Never use cleaning wool or cloth.
Residues of such materials left in the bearing could lead to excessive temperatures.

- Clean the following parts thoroughly

• Top part of the housing (1).
• Bottom part of the housing (20).
• Top part of the shell (11).
• Bottom part of the shell (13).
• Sealing surfaces of the top part (29) and bottom part (32) of the seal carrier or of the rigid
labyrinth seal.
• Oil ring (25).

- Check the insulating layer of the spherical seating of the top part (1) and bottom part(20)
of the hosing.

26

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

7. Assembly of the bearing

Attention!
Remove all impurities or other objects such as screws, nuts, etc. from inside the bearing. If they
remain, they could lead to damage of the bearing. Cover up the opened bearing during break.

Attention!
Carry out all assembly operations without making use of force.

Attention!

Secure all screws at the split line, of the housing

and flange with a liquid screw locking compound.
(LOCTITE 242)

27

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

7.1 Fitting in the bottom half of the shell

Attention!
Mounting the bottom part of the shell correctly will ease the assembly of the top part shell.

- Place the bottom part of the shell (13) on the working surface of the shaft. Turn the bottom part
of the shell into the bottom part of the housing (20) with the split line surfaces of both halves in
true alignment.

In case tthe
e botto
bottom pa
partt o
of tthe
e sshell
e does not
ot tu
turn in eas
easily,
y, ccheck
ec tthe
e pos
position
to o of tthe
e sshaft
ata and
d tthe
e
alignment of the housing.

Attention!
These operations should be carried out most carefully
carefully. The thrust parts of the bottom shell must
not be damaged.

- Lower down the shaft till it sits on the bottom part of the shell.(13)

28

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

7.2 Assembly of the shaft seal –machine- side

The machine – side shaft seal, as standard, a floating labyrinth seal. The integrated seal groove
Is in the top and bottom parts of the housing.

Warning of injury!

! During assembly hold the garter spring ends (30) securely to avoid them suddenly
releasing and causing possible injury!

Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft in the seal area outside the
h
housing:
i

- Put the garter spring(30) around the shaft and hook both ends into each other.
- Put both halves of the seal (33), (34) in their place on the shaft.
- Put the garter spring into the groove.
- Turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.

Attention!
The floating labyrinth seal should turn easily on the shaft. A jammed seal could lead to
overheating during operation and even to shaft wear. If the floating labyrinth seal jams,
- dismantle the seal.
- remove the worm parts of the seal carefully,
carefully by using emery paper of a plain scraper
scraper.

- Dismantle the floating labyrinth seal.

- Apply sealing compound to the guide surfaces of the integrated seal groove in the bottom part
of the housing.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the seal surfaces and to the split line surfaces of
both halves of the seal (33), (34).

29

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.

- Place the bottom part of the seal (33) with the labyrinths onto the shaft.
- The oil return holes at the bearing side must be clear and open.
- Turn the seal in opposite direction from the anti-rotation pin into the groove of the housing until
the split lines of the bottom part of the housing and the bottom part of the seal match each
other.
- Remove the residue of sealing compound.
- Push the spring hook into the integrated groove between the bottom half of the housing and
the seal until both ends jut out from the split line.
- Place the top half of the seal with the cam facing the inside of the bearing on the bottom half of
the seal.
- Stretch the garter spring till both ends can be hooked.

7.3 Installation of the loose oil ring

- Open both split lines of the loose oil ring(25) by untightening and removing the screws (28).
- Place both halves of the loose oil ring into the shell groove (13) around the shaft. Press the
positioning pin(26) of each split into the corresponding hole (27).
- Adjust both halves of the loose oil ring till the split lines match each other
other.
- Tighten the screws (28) to the following.

7.4 Fitting in the top half of the shell

- Apply some lubricant to the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as
indicated for bearing operation .
- Check if the engraved on the bottom and top parts of the shell correspond.
- both engraved should be on the same side. (see picture 7-1)

Attention!
An incorrectly assembled shell could cause the damage of both shaft and bearing.

Attention!
Place the top part of the shell carefully on the shaft. The thrust parts of the top part of the shell
must not be damaged.

30

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

7.5 Closing of the bearing

- Check the true alignment of the shell (11), (13) and bottom half (20) of the housing

The positioning pin(3) in the top half of the housing fits in the corresponding hole (2).
Through this work, the shell is located in correct position.

- Check if the engraved number on the top and halves of the housing correspond.
- Clean the split line surfaces of the top and bottom haves (1),(20) of the housing.
- Apply sealing compound to the whole surface of the split line of the bottom half (20) of the
housing.

Please observe the instructions for use of sealing compound.

- Place the top half of the housing carefully into the machine shield, without touching the seals or
the shell.
- Lower the top half of the housing (1) vertically on the bottom part of the housing (20). Lower
the top part of the housing (1) till the split line of the housing is not visible any more.
- Gently
G tl hit ththe b
bottom
tt partt off th
the h
housing
i (20) with ith a nylon
l h hammer, ththus ensuring the
i th
alignment of the spherical seating.
- Insert the screws (12). Tighten them hand-tight.
- Tighten the screws (12) of the housing crosswise to the same torque rate.
- Tighten the screw plug with the welded-on positioning pin into the top half of the housing.

31

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

7.6 Assembly of the seals – out board side

- Assemble the out board side seals.

7.6.1 Floating labyrinth seal

Warning of injury!

! Hold the end of the garter spring(30) securely during assembly to avoid injuries
caused by a sudden unwinding .

Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft in the seal area outside the
Housing.

- Put the garter spring (30) around the shaft and hook both ends into each other.
- Put both halves of the seal (33),(34) in their place on the shaft.
- Put the garter spring (30) into the groove(31).
- turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.

Attention!
The floating labyrinth seal should turn easily on the shaft. A jammed seal could lead to
overheating during operation and even to shaft wear.

If the floating labyrinth seal jams,

- Dismantle the seal.
- Remove the worn parts of the seal carefully, by using emery paper or a plain scraper.
- Spread adhesive evenly over the surface and split of the sealing for seal.

32

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.

- Press the bottom half of the seal(33) against the shaft.

- Place the top half of the seal(34) on the shaft and align both haves of the seal to each other.
- Place the garter spring (30) into the groove(31) and stretch until both ends can be hooked.
- Place in true alignment the split line of the floating labyrinth seal and the split line of the seal
carrier.
carrier
- Check that both engraved number (37) and(39) on top and bottom halves of seal carrier
(29), (32) correspond.
- Clean the following parts
• The seal surfaces of the top (29) and bottom (32) part of the seal carrier.
• The split line surfaces of the top (29) and bottom (32) part of the seal carrier.
• The flange surfaces of the housing.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to:
• The lateral surfaces of the groove at the top(29) and bottom (32) part of the seal carrier.
• The flange surfaces of the top (29) and bottom (32) part of the seal carrier.
• The split line surfaces of the bottom part of the seal carrier (32).

g compound.
Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing p

- Place the top part of the seal carrier (29) on the top part of the seal (34). Press the bottom part
(32) of the seal carrier against it. Push the shaft seal completely into the housing.
- Place in true alignment the split lines of the seal carrier and the housing.
- Tighten up the screws (36) to the following torque rates:

33

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.

- Place the top part of the seal carrier (29) on the top part of the seal (34). Press the bottom part
(32) of the seal carrier against it. Push the shaft seal completely into the housing.
- Place in true alignment the split lines of the seal carrier and the housing.
- Tighten up the screws (36) to the following torque rates:

7.6.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger

- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger as described in Chapter 7.6.1, Floating
labyrinth seal type 10.
- Place both halves of the dust flinger (52) in front of the shaft seal around the shaft
shaft. Loosely
screw in the screws(53).
- Push the dust flinger (52) into the groove (38) of the seal carrier.
- Set the clearance “e” at 1mm around the whole unit.
- Tighten the screws (53) to the following torque rates

7.6.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle

- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with baffle as in Chapter 7.6.1.

- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the flange surfaces of the top part (47) and
bottom part (49) of the baffle.
- The top part of the baffle (47) to the top part of the seal carrier(29)
- The bottom ppart of the baffle ((49)) to the bottom p
part of the seal carrier(32)
( )
- Tighten the screws (48) to the following torque rates

34

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

7.6.4 Rigid labyrinth seal

- Check of the engraved number (45) and (46) on the bottom part (44) and top part (40) of the
rigid labyrinth seal correspond.
- Clean
• The flange surfaces of the top part (40) and bottom part (44) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
• The split line surfaces of the top part (40) and bottom part (44) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
• The flange surfaces of the housing.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the following parts
• The flange surfaces of the top part (40) and bottom part (44) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
• The split lines of the top part (40) and bottom part (44) of the rigid labyrinth seal.

Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.

- Place the top half (40) of the rigid labyrinth seal on the shaft and press slightly the bottom part
(44)of the rigid labyrinth seal from below against it. Lightly push the rigid labyrinth seal
completely into the housing.
- Tighten the screws(42).
- Place in parallel alignment the split line of the rigid labyrinth seal and the split line of the
housing.
- Press the rigid labyrinth seal slightly from below against the shaft
shaft.
- Tighten the screws(41) to the following torque rates.

7.6.5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger

- Assemble the rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger as indicated in chapter 7.6.4 .
- Place both halves of the dust flinger (52) round the shaft, in front of the rigid labyrinth seal.
Mount the screws (53) loose.
loose
- Push the dust flinger (52) into the groove (43) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
- Tighten the screws (53) to the following torque rates.

35

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

7.6.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle

- Assemble the rigid labyrinth seal with baffle as described in chapter 7.6.4
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the flange surfaces of the top half (47) and
bottom half (49) of the baffle.
- The top half of the baffle (47) to the top half (40) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
- The bottom half of the baffle (49) to the bottom half (44) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
- Tighten
g the screws ((48)) to the following
g torque
q rates

8. Starting Operation after Inspection

- Fit the thermo sensors for:

• Temperature measurement of the journal part in the tapped holes(21)
• Temperature measurement of the thrust part in the tapped holes (optional)

Retighten all screw plugs in the tapped holes

(21),(23),(27) to the following torque rates.
- Check that the top sight glass is tight

- Retighten the connection holes for oil inlet and oil outlet and the holes for the thrust part oil
supply system (optional). The torque depends on the threaded joints used.
- Carry out a visual check of the assembled bearing.
- Fill up the oil supply system with lubricant. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated on the
t
type plate.
l t
- Start operating the oil supply system in order to fill up the bearing with lubricant.
- Check
• The way the oil supply system functions (see also the Technical Documentation of the
installation).
• That the temperature monitoring equipment functions.

Attention!
- Not enough lubricant leads to temperature rises and thus to damage to the bearing.
- Too much lubricant leads to leakages.

36

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

- Start operating the cooling water supply system and check its functioning.
- Supervise
S i ththe b
bearing
i d during
i ththe ttrial
i l run (5 ~ 10 operating
ti h hours).
)
Pay special attention to:
• The way the oil supply system works. (necessary lubricant quantity, lubricant pressure before
entering the bearing.)
• Bearing temperature.
• Sliding noises of the shaft seals.
• Tightness.
• Occurrence of inadmissible vibrations.

Attention!
If the bearing temperature exceeds the calculated value by 15K stop the installation
Immediately Carry out an inspection of the bearing and find out the causes
Immediately. causes.

9. Corrosion Protection for Longer Standstill Periods

If you want to protect the bearing mounted on an installation against corrosion proceed as
follows:

- Dismantle the bearing ( see chapter 5)

- Clean the bearing (see chapter 6)
- Paint or spray the top half of the shell (11), the bottom half of the shell (13) and the shaft with
TECTYL 511.
- Assemble the bearing (see chapter 7)
- Close all tapped holes with screw plugs.
- Seal the gaps between by using a self – adhesive, permanent tape.
• Shaft seal and housing
• Shaft seal and shaft
- Remove the top sight glass (5). Spray some anti-corrosive such as TECTYL511 or VALVOLINE
into the bearing
bearing.
- Put a bag of silicate gel inside. The desiccant absorbs the humidity and prevents the formation
of condensation water inside the bearing.
- Close the bearing tight with the top sight glass (5)

37

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

USER MANUAL
Instructions for maintenance and inspection

In case the standstill period is longer than ½ year:

- Repeat the preservation procedures.
- Put a new desiccant into the bearing.

In case the standstill period lasts more years:

- Dismantle the shells.
- Preserve and store the bearing parts.

10. Tightening Instructions for standard screws

Check if the screws are tight.

Thread diameter Tightening torque (Nm)

M8 20

M10 40

M12 70

M14 110

M16 170

M18 250

M20 350

M22 450

M24 600

M27 900

M30 1200

11 Protection during transport

11.

In case of a machine equipped with slide bearing of type HM

- Carry out the corrosion protection as described in Chapter 9 and apply enough lubricant on the
working surfaces of the bearing.
- Secure the shaft against thrust and radial movements during transport.

38

HUNSUNG MACHINERY CO., LTD.

 Page 1 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

Operating instructions manual for Jack-up & Lube oil unit

Hydraulic - System

for

Jack-up high pressure and Lube oil unit

 Page 2 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

Contents

1. General instructions

1.1 General operating instructions

2. Technical data

2.1 Technical data of the hydraulic system

3. Safety

3.1 Proper utilisation

3.2 Safety instructions for the operator

3.3 Consequences of unauthorised modification

4. Installation

4.1 General instructions

4.2 Installation conditions

4.3 Installation of the pipelines

4.4 Installation of the electrical connections

5. Commissioning

5.1 Description of the commissioning procedure

5.1.1 Filling the hydraulic system

5.1.2 Instructions for switching on the electric motor

5.1.3 Venting of the pump

5.1.4 Venting of the hydraulic system

5.1.5 Purging the hydraulic system

 Page 3 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

6. Maintenance and repairs

6.1 Maintenance and inspection

6.1.1 General instructions

6.1.2 Maintenance after commissioning

6.1.3 Maintenance in mormal operation

6.2 Repairs and dismantling of the hydraulic system

7. Annex

7.1 Genearal assembly (Jack-up unit)

7.2 Genearal assembly (Lube oil unit)

7.3 Piping and Instrument Diagram (Jack-up unit)

7.4 Piping and Instrument Diagram (Lube oil unit)

 Page 4 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

1. General instructions

1.1 General operating instructions

This hydraulic system can entail unavoidable residual hazards for persons and
material objects.
Therefore every person involved in work with this machine and concerned with
transport, installation, operation, maintenance and repair of the hydraulic unit
must be duly instructed and aware of the possible dangers.
For this purpose the operating instructions manual and, in particular, the safety
instructions must be read attentively and understood.

2. Technical data

2.1 Technical data of the hydraulic system

drive side 14.0 [l/min]

Lube unit
Flow rating : non-drive 6.0 [l/min]
Jack-up unit 1.0 [l/min]
Lube unit 1.0~1.8 [bar]
Operating pressure :
Jack-up unit 46.0~60.0 [bar]
drive side 1.5[kW]1720[rpm]440[V]60[Hz]
Lube unit
Electric motor : non-drive 0.75[kW]1695[rpm]440[V]60[Hz]
Jack-up unit 0.75[kW]1695[rpm]440[V]60[Hz]
drive side 4.1[kW] average dT=17.71℃
Cooling power : Lube unit
non-drive 2.16[kW] average dT=18.48℃
Ambient temperature : 10 - 50℃
Control voltage : 24[V] ■ DC □ AC
Operating medium : ISO VG 68
 Page 5 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

□ The hydraulic system was designed and projected for the technical data
specified above.

3. Safety

3.1 Proper utilisation

□ The hydraulic system has been designed and constructed according to the
state of technology and the approved safety and technical regulations.
Nevertheless, utilisation of this hydraulic system can entail dangers for life
and limb of the operator and / or other persons, or damage of the hydraulic
system and other objects, especially if the instructions and regulations in
this operating instructions manual are not obeyed.

□ This hydraulic system is designed exclusively for the application specified by

the contract giver and may be operated only when in technically perfect
condition, for the intended purpose and with due awareness of the safety
requirements and hazards, thereby observing the contents of this operating
instructions manual.

3.2 Safety instructions for the operator

□ All pipeline, hoseline and valve connections as well as screw fittings must be
checked for leakage and externally recognisable damage.

□ Damage must be repaired immediately.

□ Squirting out oil can cause injuries and fire.

□ The warning instructions contained in this manual for maintenance and repair
tasks on the hydraulic system must be observed.

Caution !

The hydraulic fluid can cause skin rash and other health damage. Avoid prolonged skin
contact. After contact, wash thoroughly. Always observe the safety and handling
instructions provided by the hydraulic fluid supplier.
 Page 6 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

Warning

Hydraulic systems are operated under high pressure. If dismantled improperly they
can explode and thereby cause severe accidents. To reduce this risk of explosion,
it is essential to depressurise the systems before dismantling them.

3.3 Consequences of unauthorised modification

□ Unauthorised modifications of or additions to hydraulic systems are

forbidden for safety reasons. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
caused by such unauthorised actions, for which the user alone is responsible.

□ No modifications of the hydraulic system are permitted without the approval

of the manufacturer

4. Installation

4.1 General instructions

□ Commissioning, maintenance and repairs may be carried out only by trained

or duly instructed personnel with special knowledge of and experience with
hydraulic systems.

□ Work on the electrical system and electric connections of the solenoid valves
may be carried out only by trained or duly instructed personnel with special
knowledge of and experience with electrical systems.

4.2 Installation conditions

□ Before installation on site, make sure that the foundation or mounting surface
is flat and firm in order to avoid mechanical distortion and / or vibrations.

□ Use the provided screw threads and mounting bores for attaching the hydraulic
unit to the foundation.
 Page 7 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

4.3 Installation of the pipelines

□ The hydraulic pipelines to the consumer devices must be absolutely free from
rust and dirt particles internally, and without burr at the pipe ends.
No further welding or brazing is permittes after installation.

□ The pipelines and fittings must conform to the pressure classification for
which the hydraulic system is designed.

□ The dimensions must correspond to the specification on the circuit diagram.

Utilisation of pipes with too small internal diameter, unnecessary length of
pipelines and too many angle screw fittings lead to pressure losses impairing
the overall performance of the hydraulic system.

□ Pipelines must be installed with care and without stress. They must be held
in exactly fitting pipe clamps which exert no unnecessary loading pressure.

□ The connentions of the hydraulic pipelines to the units must be made

according to the circuit diagram.

□ Remove the closing plugs which we have fitted on the hydraulic connections
of the unit in factory, and the coverplates, only immediately before connecting
the corresponding pipelines.
This helps to avoid unnecessary contamination.

□ We recommend the installation of measuring screw fittings at the highest

points of pipelines for venting.

4.4 Installation of the electrical connections

□ Before connecting the electric motor and the control lines, check that the
electrical ratings on the type spcification plate of the electric motor and on the
terminal connections plan are identical to the ratings of the local mains power
supply and of the eletrical control system.

□ The electrical cable connections must be established according to the circuit

diagram and the terminal connections plan.
 Page 8 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

5. Commissioning

5.1 Description of the commissioning procedure

5.1.1 Filling the hydraulic system

□ Always use a filter system for filling the hydraulic system, to ensure that the
hydraulic fluid comes into the tank conforming to the specified cleanliness class.
This also applies to filling from new barrels.

5.1.2 Instructions for switching on the electric motor

□ When switching on the electric motor for the first time, let it run for only a
short time to check the rotation direction.
Clockwise rotation of the pump corresponds to anticlockwise rotation of the
electric motor.

5.1.3 Venting of the pump

□ When the electric motor is running in the specified rotation direction, the pump
must be vented according to the instructions of the pump manufacturer.
If any problems are encountered, please get in touch with Dae Dong Entec

5.1.4 Venting of the hydraulic system

□ The hydraulic system must be vented thoroughly before adjusting the operating
pressure. This should be done at a pressure with which the load devices can
just be moved.

□ The venting must be made at the highest point of each hydraulic pipeline and
continued unit foam-free medium is coming out.

5.1.5 Purging the hydraulic system

□ In every new hydraulic system from the factory, however carefully constructed,
there are dirt particles in the pipeline system. Hydraulic systems with
particularly dirt-sensitive devices (proportional and servo control valves) must
therefore be purged thoroughly before running them with full working pressure
and speed.
 Page 9 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

□ For the purging process, bypass the connections directly at the load devices
with hoseline connections and replace particularly sensitive valves with purging
plates. It may be possible to accelerate the purging process by fitting by filters
in the hoseline connections.

□ When purging make sure that cleaning filters are not in the subsidiary stream.
Insert new filter elements after purging.

6. Maintenance and repairs

6.1 Maintenance and inspection

6.1.1 General instructions

□ The personnel deployed for commissioning, maintenance and repair tasks

must have read this operating instructions manual before commencing work.

□ This operating instructions manual must always be available at the operating

location of the machine.

□ Commissioning, maintenance and repair tasks may be carried out only by

trained or duly instructed personnel with special knowledge of and experience
with hydraulic system.

□ Work on the electrical system and elentrical connections of the solenoid valves
may be carried out by trained or duly instructed personnel with special
knowledge of and experience with electrical/ electronic system.

6.1.2 Maintenance after commissioning

□ During the first two months after commissioning the maintenance tasks must
be carried out at shorter intervals. The following points must be checked daily
during the first week, and daily to weekly as from the second week.

● Hydraulic lines and connections, tank lid and any oil troughs or leaks.

● Tank fill level and temperature of the medium.

● Quiet running of pumps and motors.

● Settings of pressure valves and switches.

□ Leaks and fill level deficiencies must be remedied immediately. In the case
of problems which cannot be solved by the maintenance personnel of the
 Page 10 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :
operator, Dae Dong Entec must be informed immediately.

□ Contaminated filter cartridges must be replaced immediately.

□ After the first week and then monthly, check all operationally and safety relevant
screw fittings for firm seating, and retighten them if necessary.

6.1.3 Maintenance in normal operation

□ Hydraulic screw fittings and couplings must be checked weekly for any leaks.
Leaks must be sealed and escaped hydraulic fluid must be cleaned up.

□ Make sure that fill level deficiencies in the hydraulic tank are corrected
immedeately, and that contaminated filter elements are replaced immediately.
Depending on the environmental conditions, the venting filter, too, must be
replaced once or twice each year.

□ Check at montly intervals for any damage to the unit, control blocks of the
pipelines, pipeline fixing elements, valves, pressure operated switches,
solenoids and electrical connections.
Detected damage must be remedied immediately.

□ Get a specialist to check whether the hydraulic hoselines are in proper working
condition. The following criteria must be inspected;

● Externally visible damage, such as cracks, kinks, detachments, worn

locations, brittleness. etc.

● Torsion/deformation of the hoselines in the depressurised and pressurised

state.

● Leaks between the hose and the fitting. Is the hoseline wandering off the fitting?

Damaged hoselines must be replaced immediately.

Caution !

The hydraulic fluid can cause skin rash and other damage to health . Therefore avoid
prolonged skin contact. Wash thoroughly after contact, It is essential to obey the safety
and handling instructions provided by the hydraulic fluid supplier.
 Page 11 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

6.2 Repairs and dismantling of the hydraulic system

□ Depressurise the hydraulic system before commencing repair work or

dismantling it. For this purpose switch off the electric control system at the main
switch and, if possible, remove the key to prevent unintended start up of the
hydraulic system.

□ Before commencing repair work or dismantling, check on the pressure

gauge for the "pump pressure" to make sure that the hydraulic system
is depressurised.

Warning

Hydraulic systems are operated under pressure. They can explode, causing severe
accidents, If dismantled improperly. To reduce this explosion risk, it is essential
to depressurise the systems before dismantling them.

□ Load devices which could drop down or move in uncontrolled manner when
dismantling the hydraulic system must be supported and secured before
commencing the tasks.

□ Clean up small quantities of hydraulic fluid of hydraulic fluid with rags. Scatter
binding agent on larger quantities and fence off to prevent access. Rags
and binding agents soaked with hydraulic fluid must be disposed of separately.
 Page 12 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

7.
7.1 Genearal assembly (Jack-up unit)

No Part List Q'ty Description

1 Motor 1 0.75kw 1695rpm 440V/60Hz
2 Rotex coupling 1 Spidex A19.19H7-N1 Alu
3 Gear pump 1 1LQ3-3DE10R
4 Pressure relief valve 1 RDBA-LAN
5 Flow control valve 1 NDVE-08-1A
6 Pressure transducer 1 UPA51(250bar, 4~20mA)
7 Pressure gauge 1 ￠63, 250bar
8 Double switch filter 1 HDD.30.10VG.30EP-G3-AE40
9 Flow switch 1 BFS30-L-G1/2-MS-WE-ST
 Page 13 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

7.2 Genearal assembly (Lube oil unit)

No Part List Q'ty Description

1 Motor 1 1.5KW / 0.75KW 440V 60Hz
2 Rotex coupling 1 Spidex A19.24.24H7-N1 Alu
3 Gear pump 1 1L16DC23R / 1L9DC23R
4 Check valve 1 CXBA-XCN
5 Flow control valve 1 NDVE-DN08-1A
6 Pressure relief valve 1 RPGE-LEV
7 Pressure switch(low) 1 MBC5100-2431-1CB04.1~10bar
8 Pressure switch(high) 1 MBC5100-2431-1CB04.1~10bar
9 Double switch filter 1 DU63.25VG30.E.P.G.4.S1.AE.40
10 Oil cooler 1 4.1KW / 2.16KW
11 Check valve 1 RV-DIN16-G3/4-1-4.5bar
12 Water control valve 1 AVTA-20-003N3162
13 Thermometer 1 0~100℃
14 Flow switch 1 BFS30-N-G1-MS-WE-ST
 Page 14 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

7.3 Piping and Instrument Diagram (Jack-up unit)

No Part List Q'ty Description

1 Motor 1 0.75kw 1695rpm 440V/60Hz
1.1 Rotex coupling 1 Spidex a19.19H7-N1
1.3 Gear pump 1 1LQ3-3DE10R
4.1 Pressure relief valve 1 RDBA-LAN
4.2 Flow control valve 1 NDVE-08-1A
5.1 Pressure transducer 1 UPA51(250bar, 4~20mA)
5.3 Pressure gauge 1 ￠63, 250bar
6 Double switch filter 1 HDD.30.10VG.30EP-G3-AE40
7 Flow switch 1 BFS30-L-G1/2-MS-WE-ST
 Page 15 of
Operation Instruction No. :
Date :

7.4 Piping and Instrument Diagram (Lube oil unit)

No Part List Q'ty Description

1 Motor 1 1.5KW / 0.75KW 440V 60Hz
2 Rotex coupling 1 Spidex A19.24.24H7-N1 Alu
3 Gear pump 1 1L16DC23R / 1L9DC23R
7.1 Check valve 1 CXBA-XCN
9.1 Flow control valve 1 NDVE-DN08-1A
9.2 Pressure relief valve 1 RPGE-LEV
10.1 Pressure switch(low) 1 MBC5100-2431-1CB04.1~10bar
10.2 Pressure switch(high) 1 MBC5100-2431-1CB04.1~10bar
11.0 Double switch filter 1 DU63.25VG30.E.P.G.4.S1.AE.40
12 Oil cooler 1 4.1KW / 2.16KW
12.1 Check valve 1 RV-DIN16-G3/4-1-4.5bar
13 Water control valve 1 AVTA-20-003N3162
14.1 Thermometer 1 0~100℃
15 Flow switch 1 BFS30-N-G1-MS-WE-ST
 INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
DIGITAL EXCITATION CONTROL SYSTEM
DECS-200
Digital
Excitation
Control
System DECS-200

Null Internal Pre- Limits

Balance Tracking Position Lower Upper

Edit Reset

RS-232

COM 0

P0003-26
06/04/01

Publication: 9360100990
Revision: G 11/07
 INTRODUCTION
This instruction manual provides information about the operation and installation of the DECS-200 Digital
Excitation Control System. To accomplish this, the following information is provided:

• General Information and Specifications

• Controls and Indicators
• Functional Description
• Installation
• Maintenance

WARNING!
To avoid personal injury or equipment damage, only qualified personnel should
perform the procedures in this manual.

NOTE
Be sure that the DECS-200 is hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12
AWG copper wire attached to the ground terminal on the rear of the unit case.
When the DECS-200 is configured in a system with other devices, it is
recommended to use a separate lead to the ground bus from each unit.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Introduction i

 First Printing: January 2002

Printed in USA

© 2002, 2004-2007 Basler Electric, Highland Illinois 62249 USA

All Rights Reserved

November 2007

CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
of Basler Electric, Highland Illinois, USA. It is loaned for confidential use, subject
to return on request, and with the mutual understanding that it will not be used in
any manner detrimental to the interest of Basler Electric.

It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this manual
provide data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability and design
of all features and options are subject to modification without notice. Should further information be
required, contact Basler Electric.

BASLER ELECTRIC
ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, [email protected]
PHONE +1 618.654.2341 FAX +1 618.654.2351
ii DECS-200 Introduction 9360100990 Rev G
 REVISION HISTORY
The following information provides a historical summary of the changes made to the DECS-200
hardware, firmware, and software. The corresponding revisions made to this instruction manual
(9360100990) are also summarized. Revisions are listed in reverse chronological order.

BESTCOMS Software
Version and Date Change
1.05.00, 11/07 • Added Short output indicator to Metering, Alarm/Status screen.
• Added SCL Initial Delay to Settings, SCL screen.
1.04.00, 06/04 • Added takeover-style OEL, SCL, and loss of field settings to interface.
1.03.05, 11/02 • Added the EDM pole ratio calculator. Removed the Number of Poles
parameter.
1.03.04, 06/02 • Improved overall functionality. Allowed V/Hz Slope Setting
adjustments to be made in increments of 0.01. The default value of
the Analysis screen was changed from 10% steps to 2% steps.
1.03.03, 05/02 • Updated BESTCOMS to add oscillography trigger to step response.
1.03.00, 09/01 • Initial release

Application Firmware
Version and Date Change
1.03.00, 10/07 • Added Short output indicator.
• Added SCL Initial Delay.
• Added primary/secondary active DECS indication (for redundant
DECS applications).
1.02.03, 06/05 • Modified firmware for compatibility with new LCD.
1.02.02, 04/05 • Improved Auxiliary input measurement accuracy.
1.02.00, 06/04 • Added takeover-style OEL.
• Added option of specifying on-line/off-line OEL activation via the
52J/K and 52L/M contact inputs.
• Added stator current limiting and loss of field protection.
• Added automatic alarm reset when generator frequency decreases
below 10 Hz.
• Improved crosscurrent compensation.
1.01.03, 11/02 • Added the EDM pole ratio calculator. Removed the Number of Poles
parameter.
1.01.02, 05/02 • Resolved field overcurrent indication problem when field overvoltage
alarm was triggered.
• Improved var to AVR mode (online) tracking.
• Resolved nuisance EDM indication on secondary DECS in dual
DECS applications.
• Resolved field overvoltage and field overcurrent alarm indication of
secondary DECS during startup in dual DECS applications.
1.01.01, 09/01 • Initial release.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Introduction iii

 Hardware
Version and Date Change
R, S, 07/05 • Updated packing material. (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision S,
9360100101, 103 advanced to revision R.)
Q, R, 06/05 • Released firmware version 1.02.03 (9360100100, 102 advanced to
revision R, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision Q.
P, Q, 03/05 • Improved mounting of front panel communication connector.
(9360100100, 102 advanced to revision Q, 9360100101, 103
advanced to revision P.)
N, P, 07/04 • Released firmware version 1.02.01 and BESTCOMS version 1.04.01.
(9360100100, 102 advanced to revision P, 9360100101, 103
advanced to revision N. Revision level O not used.)
M, N, 07/04 • Updated power supply circuit boards. (9360100100, 102 advanced to
revision N, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision M.)
L, M, 06/04 • Released firmware version 1.02.00 (9360100100, 102 advanced to
revision M, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision L.
L, 05/04 • Improved dielectric strength of “C” power supply (P/N 9360100100,
102 only).
K, 01/03 • Began using new front panel LCD (display).
J, 10/02 • Revised terminal numbering overlays.
I • Revision level not used.
H, 08/02 • Improved circuit board component labeling.
G, 06/02 • Implemented BESTCOMS version 1.03.04 and updated production
test.
F, 05/02 • Implemented firmware version 1.01.02.
E, 05/02 • Revised packing material.
D, 03/02 • Revised engineering documents.
C, 01/02 • Released hardware to production.
• Added CSA, UL, and CE logos to the part number labels.
A, B, 11/01 • Pre-production manufacturing improvements and releases.

Manual
Revision and Date Change
G, 11/07 • Added manual part number and revision to footers.
• Corrected terminal numbering in Figure 4-6.
• Added SCL Initial Delay.
• Added Short Output Indicator.
F, 08/06 • Added illustrations showing left-side terminals and typical connections
to Section 4, Installation. (These figures were omitted in revision E of
the manual.)
• Corrected minor errors in Section 2, Human-Machine Interface, Front
Panel Operation.
E, 12/05 • Removed expired patent information from Section 1.
• Added missing setting descriptions to Section 5.
• In Section 4, added caution box regarding the length of screws used
to attach escutcheon plate to DECS-200.
• Made various minor corrections/changes throughout manual.

iv DECS-200 Introduction 9360100990 Rev G

 Manual
Revision and Date Change
D, 06/04 • Section 1: Updated output contact ratings.
• Section 2: Modified tables and menu branch drawings to show added
settings.
• Section 3: Added functional description of takeover OEL and SCL.
Removed reference to A-phase and C-phase as acceptable sensing
current source for crosscurrent compensation applications.
• Section 4: Added Crosscurrent Sensing sub-section with table listing
crosscurrent sensing terminals.
• Section 5: Revised or added all applicable BESTCOMS screens and
setting descriptions to accommodate new settings/features.
• Section 6: Added/changed BESTCOMS screens and DECS-200
settings to accommodate changed BESTCOMS screens and new
DECS-200 settings.
• Section 7: Added/revised Modbus register tables to accommodate
new DECS-200 settings.
C, 11/02 • Changed Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection in Section 1 to
reflect the pole ratio increment. Removed Gen Poles and added Pole
Ratio to Figure 2-2. Made changes to Figures 2-6 and 2-8. Deleted
reference to Generator Poles and Exciter Poles in Section 3, Exciter
Diode Monitor (EDM) Function but added Pole Ratio. Updated the list
of internal variable on page 3-14. Revised the Installation portion in
Section 5 for using a CD-ROM disc. Added the Pole Ratio Calculator
in Section 5 as well as updated the screen shots. Updated screen
shots in Figures 6-1, 6-3, 6-7, and 6-14. Changed increment levels of
register 47747-48, Table 7-17. Updated Table 7-25.
B, 10/02 • Updated Figure 4-3 to correct error in terminal numbers. Updated
terminal assignments in Section 1 to correct the error reflected from
old Figure 4-3. Added Section 8, Troubleshooting. Corrected various
minor errors.
A, 01/02 • Changed introduction section to reflect the January first printing date.
Repaginated the introduction so that the table of contents begins on
an odd page. Edited the table of contents entries for section five and
seven to reflect the appropriate names.
—, 01/02 • Initial release

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Introduction v

 This page intentionally left blank.

vi DECS-200 Introduction 9360100990 Rev G

 CONTENTS
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................................ 1-1

SECTION 2 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 2-1

SECTION 3 • FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 3-1

SECTION 4 • INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................. 4-1

SECTION 5 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE .................................................................................................. 5-1

SECTION 6 • SETUP ................................................................................................................................ 6-1

SECTION 7 • MODBUS™ SOFTWARE.................................................................................................... 7-1

SECTION 8 • MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................. 8-1

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Introduction vii

 This page intentionally left blank.

viii DECS-200 Introduction 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................................ 1-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 1-1
FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 1-1
HMI Interface ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
APPLICATION ....................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Operating Power ................................................................................................................................ 1-2
Control Power..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Sensing............................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Excitation Limiters .............................................................................................................................. 1-3
External Tracking and Transfer Between DECS-200 Units (Optional) .............................................. 1-3
Internal Tracking Between DECS-200 Operating Modes .................................................................. 1-3
Communication With a PC ................................................................................................................. 1-3
MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 1-3
Sample Style Number ........................................................................................................................ 1-4
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Control Power..................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Operating Power ................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Generator Voltage Sensing ................................................................................................................ 1-4
Generator Current Sensing ................................................................................................................ 1-5
Bus Voltage Sensing .......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Accessory Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Communication Ports ......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Contact Inputs .................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Contact Outputs ................................................................................................................................. 1-6
Field Output ........................................................................................................................................ 1-6
Regulation .......................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Parallel Compensation ....................................................................................................................... 1-7
Field Overvoltage Protection .............................................................................................................. 1-7
Field Overcurrent Protection .............................................................................................................. 1-7
Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection ............................................................................................ 1-7
Generator Undervoltage Protection ................................................................................................... 1-7
Generator Overvoltage Protection ..................................................................................................... 1-8
Loss of Sensing Protection................................................................................................................. 1-8
Loss of Field Protection...................................................................................................................... 1-8
Soft Start Function.............................................................................................................................. 1-8
Voltage Matching................................................................................................................................ 1-8
On-Line Overexcitation Limiting ......................................................................................................... 1-8
Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting ......................................................................................................... 1-9
Underexcitation Limiting ..................................................................................................................... 1-9
Manual Excitation Control .................................................................................................................. 1-9
Metering.............................................................................................................................................. 1-9
Sequence of Event Recording (SER)............................................................................................... 1-10
Data Logging (Oscillograpy)............................................................................................................. 1-10
Temperature Range ......................................................................................................................... 1-10
Type Tests........................................................................................................................................ 1-10
Physical ............................................................................................................................................ 1-10
UL Recognition ................................................................................................................................. 1-10
CSA Certification .............................................................................................................................. 1-10
CE Compliance ................................................................................................................................ 1-10

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 General Information i

Figures
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram of Typical DECS-200 Application ................................................................... 1-2
Figure 1-2. Style Number Identification Chart ........................................................................................... 1-3

ii DECS-200 General Information 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The Basler Digital Excitation Control System (DECS-200) is a microprocessor-based control device
intended for generator power management. Programmability of system parameters and regulation
settings enables the DECS-200 to be used in a wide range of applications and provides greater flexibility
in excitation system optimization. The DECS-200 can accommodate generator exciter field requirements
up to 15 Adc continuously in 32, 63 or 125 Vdc applications with one model.

FEATURES
DECS-200 units have the following features and capabilities.

Functions
• Four control modes
o Automatic voltage regulation (AVR)
o Manual or field current regulation (FCR)
o Power factor (PF)
o Reactive power (var)
• Soft start buildup with an adjustable ramp in AVR and FCR control modes
• One adjustment range or pre-position setpoint for each control mode
• Overexcitation limiting (OEL) and underexcitation limiting (UEL) in AVR, var and PF control modes
• Twenty stability selections
• Underfrequency compensation or volts per hertz ratio limiter
• Autotracking between operating modes and between DECS-200 units (optional)
• Automatic transfer to a backup DECS-200 unit (optional)
• Eight generator protection features
o Field overvoltage
o Field overcurrent
o Generator overvoltage
o Generator undervoltage
o Watchdog timer
o Loss of sensing
o Exciter diode monitor (EDM)
o Loss of field
• Generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation and reactive differential compensation
• Data logging and event recording

Inputs and Outputs

• Single-phase rms bus voltage sensing
• Single-phase or three-phase rms generator voltage sensing
• Single-phase generator current sensing (1 or 5 amperes, nominal)
• Analog inputs (±10 Vdc and 4 to 20 mAdc) provide proportional, remote control of the setpoint
• Eleven PLC-compatible contact sensing inputs for system interface
• Separate ac and dc power inputs accommodate redundant operating power sources
• Pulse-width modulated output power stage rated at a maximum of 15 amperes, continuous
• Five output relays for system control or annunciation
o Three programmable output relays
o Two fixed-function output relays

HMI Interface
• Front panel HMI includes pushbutton controls, LED indicators and a backlit, liquid crystal display
(LCD)
• BESTCOMS Windows® based software provides easy, fast and accurate setup and control

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 General Information 1-1

• Three communication ports
o Front RS-232 port for communication with a PC using BESTCOMS software
o Right-side panel RS-232 port for dedicated communication with a redundant DECS-200
o RS-485 communication port for communication with a remote terminal
• Modbus™ protocol for the RS-485 port allows communication at distances of up to 1,200 meters
(3,937 feet)

APPLICATION
Introduction
In the typical application shown in Figure 1-1, the DECS-200 controls the exciter field of a synchronous
generator. Front panel controls, indicators and serial communication ports using PC software make the
system easy to operate locally or from remote locations. DECS-200 operation, settings and safety setup
procedures in this manual should be studied before implementing your application. For detailed
application assistance, contact Basler Electric or your local sales representative.

Figure 1-1. Block Diagram of Typical DECS-200 Application

Operating Power
Operating power for the pulse-width modulated (PWM) excitation output is typically obtained from the
generator output through a power transformer. Alternately, operating power can be supplied from a
permanent magnet generator (PMG).

Control Power
If power supply option C (120/125 Vac/Vdc) is selected, a redundant power source can be used with the
DECS-200. (See Figure 1-1.) In this configuration, if one of the two sources fails, the other source will
continue to supply DECS-200 operating power. If power supply option L (24/48 Vdc) is selected, no
redundant power source is available.

1-2 DECS-200 General Information 9360100990 Rev G

Sensing
The DECS-200 senses generator voltage and current through voltage and current transformers. Field
voltage and field current values are sensed internally.

Excitation Limiters
Integrated overexcitation and underexcitation limiters (OEL and UEL) are available for both on-line and
off-line protection.

External Tracking and Transfer Between DECS-200 Units (Optional)

For critical applications, a second DECS-200 can provide backup excitation control. The DECS-200
allows for excitation system redundancy by providing external tracking and transfer provisions between
DECS-200 units. The secondary DECS-200 operating modes can be programmed to track the primary
DECS-200 operating mode. Proper, redundant excitation system design allows for removal of the failed
system. Periodic testing of the backup system must be performed to ensure that it is operational and can
be put into service without warning.

Internal Tracking Between DECS-200 Operating Modes

In applications using a single DECS-200, the DECS-200 can be programmed so that the inactive
operating modes track the active operating mode. Operating modes include AVR, FCR, PF and var. If the
excitation system is normally operating on-line in Internal mode and a loss of sensing occurs, the DECS-
200 could be transferred to manual (FCR) mode where the loss of sensing has no impact on the exciter's
ability to maintain proper excitation levels. While performing routine testing of the DECS-200 in backup
mode, the internal tracking feature allows a transfer to an inactive mode that will result in no disturbance
to the system.

Communication With a PC
Communication between the DECS-200 (front panel RS-232 port) and a PC is possible through
BESTCOMS software. BESTCOMS enables fast and easy programming of setpoints and ranges and
allows for step changes to facilitate proper stability settings. BESTCOMS also provides easy start and
stop control and operator adjustment of the excitation system with real-time metering. The software
catalog number is BESTCOMS-DECS200. BESTCOMS is provided with the DECS-200 as part of the
software/manual package.

MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION

DECS-200 operating characteristics are defined by letters and numbers that make up the style number.
The model number and style number describe the options included in the DECS-200 and appear on a
label attached to the side of the case. Upon receipt of a DECS-200 unit, be sure to check the style
number against the requisition and packing list to ensure that they agree.

Figure 1-2. Style Number Identification Chart

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 General Information 1-3

Sample Style Number
The style number identification chart (Figure 1-2) defines the electrical characteristics and operational
features included in the DECS-200. For example, if the style number were DECS-200-1L, the device
would have the following characteristics and features.
DECS-200 -- Digital Excitation Control System
1 --- Internal autotracking/transfer
L --- 24/48 Vdc control power supply

SPECIFICATIONS
DECS-200 electrical and physical characteristics are listed in the following paragraphs.

Control Power
Input Voltage
DC Input: 16 to 60 Vdc (style XL) or 90 to 150 Vdc (style XC)
AC Input: 85 to 132 Vac, 50/60 Hz (style XC only)
Note: Isolation transformer for ac input is required when dual control
power sources are used.
Burden
DC Input: 30 W
AC Input: 50 VA
Terminals
DC Input: B7 (+), B8 (–)
AC Input: B9 (L), B10 (N) (style XC only)

Operating Power
To achieve the proper DECS-200 output voltage, the appropriate operating power input voltage must be
provided.
32 Vdc PWM Output
Nominal: 60 Vac
Operating Range: 56 to 70 Vac, ±10%
Frequency Range: 50 to 500 Hz
Configuration: 1-phase or 3-phase
Burden: 780 VA
63 Vdc PWM Output
Nominal: 120 Vac
Operating Range: 100 to 139 Vac, ±10%
Frequency Range: 50 to 500 Hz
Configuration: 1-phase or 3-phase
Burden: 1,570 VA
125 Vdc PWM Output
Nominal: 240 Vac
Operating Range: 190 to 277 Vac, ±10%
Frequency Range: 50 to 500 Hz
Configuration: 1-phase or 3-phase
Burden: 3,070 VA
Voltage Buildup
From a minimum of 3 Vac
Terminals
C2 (A-phase), C3 (B-phase), C4 (C-phase)

Generator Voltage Sensing

Type: 1-phase/3-phase, 4 ranges
1-4 DECS-200 General Information 9360100990 Rev G
Burden: <1 VA per phase
Terminals: A1, A2, A3
50 Hertz Sensing
Range 1: 100 Vac (85 to 127 Vac)
Range 2: 200 Vac (170 to 254 Vac)
Range 3: 400 Vac (340 to 508 Vac)
Range 4: 500 Vac (425 to 625 Vac)
60 Hertz Sensing
Range 1: 120 Vac (94 to 153 Vac)
Range 2: 240 Vac (187 to 305 Vac)
Range 3: 400 Vac (374 to 600 Vac)
Range 4: 600 Vac (510 to 660 Vac)

Generator Current Sensing

Type: Two ranges, two channels
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Ranges: 1 A or 5 A nominal, continuous
Burden: <1 VA per phase
Terminals
1 A Sensing: B1, B3 (phase B, metering, var/PF, UEL)
B4, B6 (phase B, crosscurrent compensation)
5 A Sensing: B2, B3 (phase B, metering, var/PF, UEL)
B5, B6 (phase B, crosscurrent compensation)

Bus Voltage Sensing

Type: 1-phase, 4 ranges,
Burden: <1 VA
Sensing Ranges: Identical to generator voltage sensing
Terminals: A4, A5

Accessory Inputs
Current Input
Range: 4 to 20 mAdc
Terminals: A6 (+), A7 (–)
Voltage Input
Range: –10 to +10 Vdc
Terminals: A9 (+), A10 (–)

Communication Ports
Interface
RS-232: Full duplex
RS-485: Half duplex
Connections
Com 0: Front panel DB-9 connector
Com 1: Right-side panel DB-9 connector
Com 2: Left-side panel screw terminals (A40, A41, A42)
Parameters
Baud: 1200 to 19200
Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop Bits: 1 (Com 0, Com 1) or 2 (Com 2)

Contact Inputs
Type: Dry contact, accept PLC open-collector outputs
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 General Information 1-5
Interrogation Voltage: 12 Vdc
Terminal Assignments
Start: A21, A22
Stop: A23, A24
Auto (AVR): A25, A26
Manual (FCR): A27, A28
Raise: A29, A30
Lower: A31, A32
Pre-Position: A33, A34
Unit/Parallel (52L/M): A35, A36
Var/PF (52J/K): A37, A38
Secondary Enable: A39, A40
Alarm Reset: A41, A42

Contact Outputs
Make and Break Ratings
24 Vdc: 8.0 A
48 Vdc: 0.7 A
125 Vdc: 0.2 A
120/240 Vac: 10.0 A
Carry Ratings
24/48/125 Vdc: 8.0 A
120/240 Vac: 10.0 A
Terminal Assignments
Start/Stop (ON, OF): A11, A12
Watchdog (WTCHD): A13, A14
Relay 1 (RLY1): A15, A16
Relay 2 (RLY2): A17, A18
Relay 3 (RLY3): A19, A20

Field Output
Continuous Output Rating
60 Vac Input: 32 Vdc, 15 Adc
120 Vac Input: 63 Vdc, 15 Adc
240 Vac Input: 125 Vdc, 15 Adc
10 Second Forcing Output Rating
60 Vac Input: 50 Vdc, 30 Adc
120 Vac Input: 100 Vdc, 30 Adc
240 Vac Input: 200 Vdc, 30 Adc
Minimum Field Resistance
32 Vdc Application: 2.13 Ω
63 Vdc Application: 4.2 Ω
125 Vdc Application: 8.3 Ω

Regulation
AVR Operating Mode
Accuracy: ±0.25% over load range at rated PF and constant generator frequency
Steady State Stability: ±0.1% at constant load and generator frequency
Temperature Drift: ±0.5% for a 0 to 50°C change
V/Hz Characteristic: Slope from 0 to 3 PU is adjust-able in 0.1 PU increments. Voltage
regulation error is within ±2.0% of the nominal voltage.
Response Time: <1 cycle

1-6 DECS-200 General Information 9360100990 Rev G

Accuracy
FCR Mode: ±1.0% of the nominal value for 10% of the bridge input voltage change or
20% of the field resistance change. Otherwise, ±5.0%.
Var Mode: ±2.0% of the nominal VA rating at the rated frequency
Power Factor Mode: ±0.02 PF of the PF setpoint for the real power between 10 and 100% at
the rated frequency.
Internal Tracking: 0.5%

Parallel Compensation
Modes: Reactive Droop and Reactive Differential (cross-current) ∗
Burden: ∗ Can exceed 1 VA if external resistors are added to the CT circuit for
crosscurrent compensation.
Adjustment Range
Reactive Droop: 0 to 30%
Reactive Differential: –30 to 0%

Field Overvoltage Protection

Pickup
Range: 1.0 to 325 Vdc
Increment: 1.0 Vdc
Time Delay
Range: 0.2 to 30 s
Increment: 0.1 s

Field Overcurrent Protection

Pickup
Range: 0 to 16 Adc
Increment: 0.1 Adc
Time Delay
Characteristic: Inverse per ANSI C50.13

Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection

Pole Ratio
Range: 1 to 10 (0 if unknown)
Increment: 0.01
Ripple Threshold
Open and Shorted Diode: 0 to 100%
Time Delay
Open Diode Protection: 10 to 60 s
Shorted Diode Protection: 5 to 30 s
Open and Shorted Diode Inhibit Levels
Range: 0 to 100% or <1 Adc field current
<45 Hz and >70 Hz generator frequency

Generator Undervoltage Protection

Pickup
Range: 0 to 30 kVac
Increment: 1.0 Vac
Time Delay
Range: 0.5 to 60 s
Increment: 0.1 s

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 General Information 1-7

Generator Overvoltage Protection
Pickup
Range: 0 to 30 kVac
Increment: 1.0 Vac
Time Delay
Range: 0.1 to 60 s
Increment: 0.1 s

Loss of Sensing Protection

Unbalance Generator Volts: 0 to 100%
Balanced Generator Volts: 0 to 100%
Time Delay
Range: 0 to 30 s
Increment: 0.1 s

Loss of Field Protection

Pickup
Range: 0 to 3,000,000 kvar
Increment: 1 kvar
Time Delay
Range: 0.0 to 9.9 s
Increment: 0.1 s

Soft Start Function

Setting Range
Soft Start Bias Level: 0 to 90% in 1% increments
Soft Start Bias Time Delay: 1 to 7,200 seconds in 1 second increments

Voltage Matching
Accuracy: Generator rms voltage is matched with the bus rms voltage to within
±0.5% of the generator voltage

On-Line Overexcitation Limiting

Response time: <3 cycles
High Current Level
Pickup Range: 0 to 30.0 Adc
Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc
Time Range: 0 to 10 s
Time Increment: 1s
Medium Current Level
Pickup Range: 0 to 20.0 Adc
Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc
Time Range: 0 to 120 s
Time Increment: 1s
Low Current Level
Pickup Range: 0 to 15 Adc
Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc
Time Range: continuous

1-8 DECS-200 General Information 9360100990 Rev G

Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting
High Current Level
Pickup Range: 0 to 30.0 Adc
Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc
Time Range: 0 to 10 s
Time Increment: 1s
Low Current Level
Pickup Range: 0 to 30.0 Adc
Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc
Time Range: 0 to 10 s
Time Increment: 1s

Underexcitation Limiting
Adjustment Range: 0 to 100% of the generator rated apparent power (kvar) at 0 kW real
power. Or customizable to generator curve capability.

Manual Excitation Control

Range: 0 to 15.0 Adc
Increment: 0.1 Adc

Metering
Generator Voltage
Range: 0 to 160% of nominal
Accuracy: <1% (50/60 Hz)
Generator Current
Range: 0 to 200% of nominal
Accuracy: <1% (50/60 Hz)
Generator Frequency
Range: 10 to 90 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.1 Hz
Bus Voltage
Range: 0 to 160% of nominal
Accuracy: <1% (50/60 Hz)
Bus Frequency
Range: 10 to 90 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.1 Hz
Phase Angle
Range: –90 to +90
Accuracy: ±1.0
Field Voltage
Range: 0 to 375 Vdc
Accuracy: ±1.25 V or ±1.0% (whichever is greater)
Field Current
Range: 0 to 31 Adc
Accuracy: ±0.15 A or ±1.0% (whichever is greater)
Power Factor
Range: –0.5 to +0.5 PF
Accuracy: <0.02 PF
Real Power and Reactive Power
Range: 0 to 200% of nominal
Accuracy: <1.0% of nominal

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 General Information 1-9

Sequence of Event Recording (SER)
127 event report, stored in volatile memory (retrievable via BESTCOMS) SER triggered by: Input/Output
status changes, system operating status changes or alarm annunciations

Data Logging (Oscillograpy)

Stores 8 records in volatile memory. Up to 6 variables can be logged in a record. Sampling rate is 600
data points per log, up to 599 pre-trigger, 4 ms to 10 second intervals, (2.4 sec to 6,000 sec. total log
duration).

Temperature Range
Operating: –40 to +60°C (–40 to +140°F)
Storage: –40 to +85°C (–40 to +185°F)
CD-ROM: 0 to +50°C (32 to +122°F)

Type Tests
Shock
15 G in 3 perpendicular planes
Vibration
5 to 26 Hz: 1.2 G
27 to 52 Hz: 0.914 mm (0.036") double amplitude
53 to 500 Hz: 5G
Surge Withstand Capability and Fast Transient
Tested per IEEE C37.90.1-1989
Dielectric Strength
Tested per IEEE 421.3
Salt Fog
Tested per MIL-STD-810E, Method 509.3

Physical
Weight: 6.35 kg (14 lb)
Dimensions: Refer to Section 4, Installation

UL Recognition
UL recognized per standard 508, UL file number E90735.

CSA Certification
Certified per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2 Number 14, CSA File Number LR23131.

CE Compliance
The DECS-200 meets the criteria set forth by the following standards:
EN 50081-2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) emissions standard: EN 55011, Level A.
EN 50082-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Immunity
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-2, Level B/IEC 1000-4-2
Radiated Susceptibility
EN 61000-4-3, Level A/IEC 1000-4-3
Electrical Fast Transient
EN 61000-4-4, Level B/IEC 1000-4-4

1-10 DECS-200 General Information 9360100990 Rev G

Radio Frequency Conducted
EN 61000-4-6, Level A/IEC 1000-4-6
Power Frequency Magnetics
EN 61000-4-8, Level A/IEC 1000-4-8

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 General Information 1-11

 This page intentionally left blank.

1-12 DECS-200 General Information 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 2 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 2 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 2-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 2-1
FRONT PANEL controls and indicators................................................................................................. 2-1
Menu Navigation ................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Navigation Aids .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Edit Sessions...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Changing Settings .............................................................................................................................. 2-3
PASSWORD PROTECTION ................................................................................................................. 2-8
METERING SCREEN ............................................................................................................................ 2-9
Metering Fields ................................................................................................................................... 2-9
Setpoint Field.................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Percent-of-Range Field .................................................................................................................... 2-10
Mode Message Field ........................................................................................................................ 2-10
Alarm Annunciation Field ................................................................................................................. 2-10
Alarm Message Screen .................................................................................................................... 2-10
Screens with Special Editing Modes ................................................................................................ 2-11
Menu Tree ........................................................................................................................................ 2-11
FRONT PANEL OPERATION.............................................................................................................. 2-22
Operating Modes.............................................................................................................................. 2-22
Setpoints........................................................................................................................................... 2-22
Loop Gains ....................................................................................................................................... 2-23
Controller Gains ............................................................................................................................... 2-24
Metering............................................................................................................................................ 2-24
Protection ......................................................................................................................................... 2-24
Limiters ............................................................................................................................................. 2-25
System Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 2-26
General Settings............................................................................................................................... 2-29

Figures
Figure 2-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators ....................................................................................... 2-1
Figure 2-2.Operating Menu Branch ......................................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-3. Setpoint Menu Branch........................................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-4. Loop Gains Menu Branch ..................................................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-5. Metering Menu Branch.......................................................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-6. Protection Menu Branch........................................................................................................ 2-16
Figure 2-7. Limiters Menu Branch ........................................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-8. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 1 of 3).................................................................... 2-18
Figure 2-9. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 2 of 3).................................................................... 2-19
Figure 2-10. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 3 of 3).................................................................. 2-20
Figure 2-11. General Settings Menu Branch........................................................................................... 2-21

Tables
Table 2-1. DECS-200 HMI Component Descriptions ................................................................................ 2-2
Table 2-2. Front Panel Setting Parameters............................................................................................... 2-4
Table 2-3. Settings Accessible with Setpoint Access Level ...................................................................... 2-8
Table 2-4. User-Selectable Metering Quantities ....................................................................................... 2-9
Table 2-5. Setpoint Field as a Function of Operating Mode.................................................................... 2-10
Table 2-6. Annunciation Messages ......................................................................................................... 2-10
Table 2-7. Automatic Stability Range Gain Settings Index ..................................................................... 2-23

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface i

 This page intentionally left blank.

ii DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 2 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the DECS-200 human-machine interface (HMI), illustrates how to navigate through
the menu screens, and explains how to use the front panel interface to view and change settings.

FRONT PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

The front panel HMI consists of a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD), six pushbutton switches, six LED
indicators, and an RS-232 communication connector. The LCD displays DECS-200 settings and
excitation system information through the use of a structured menu. Menu screens are viewed and
settings are changed by operating the front panel pushbuttons. Active conditions are annunciated by the
front panel LEDs. The RS-232 connector (Com 0) enables communication between the DECS-200 and a
PC operating BESTCOMS software.
Front panel HMI components are shown in Figure 2-1 and described in Table 2-1.

Figure 2-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-1

 Table 2-1. DECS-200 HMI Component Descriptions
Locator description
A LCD. Backlit liquid crystal display is 64 by 128 pixels in size and serves as the primary source
of information from the DECS-200. Displays operations, setpoints, loop gains, metering,
protection functions, system parameters, and general settings.
B Pre-Position LED. Lights at the predefined, pre-position setpoint of the active mode.
C Lower Limit LED. Lights at the minimum setpoint value of the active mode.
D Upper Limit LED. Lights at the maximum setpoint value of the active mode.
E Scrolling Pushbuttons. Pushbutton switches are used to scroll up, down, left, and right through
the menu structure. When operating in Edit mode, the Left and Right pushbuttons select the
variable to change and the Up and Down pushbuttons change the variable value.
F Reset Pushbutton. Cancels editing sessions, resets alarm annunciations and latched alarm
relays, and can be used for quick access to the metering screen.
G Serial Port (Com 0). This port is dedicated to RS-232 communication with a computer terminal
or PC running a terminal emulation program such as BESTCOMS. See Section 1 and Section
3 for more information about the DECS-200 serial ports.
H Edit Pushbutton. Enables settings changes. When the Edit pushbutton is first pushed, an LED
within the pushbutton lights to indicate that Edit mode is active. When settings changes are
complete (using the scrolling pushbuttons) and the Edit pushbutton is pressed again, the LED
turns off to indicate that the changes are saved.
I Null Balance LED. Lights when the inactive modes (AVR, FCR, var, or PF) match the active
mode.
J Internal Tracking LED. Lights when any inactive mode (AVR, FCR, var, or PF) is tracking the
active mode to accomplish a bumpless transfer when changing active modes.

Menu Navigation
The front panel scrolling pushbuttons are used to move through the menu structure displayed by the LCD.
Pressing the Reset pushbutton (when an edit session is not in progress) gives quick access to the
Metering screen. Metering values cannot be viewed during an edit session.

Navigation Aids
On-screen navigation assists the user in moving from screen to screen. These navigation aids are
contained in the top and bottom lines of the LCD.
The top line contains a menu path that is similar to the DOS prompt on a personal computer. When the
menu path exceeds the width of the LCD, the first part of the menu path is replaced with two dots (..) so
that the last part will be seen. Regardless of the menu path length, the current screen name is always
shown.
The bottom line displays the menu screens that can be accessed from the current screen with the Left,
Down and Right pushbuttons on the front panel. The Left pushbutton listing consists of a “<”, followed by
an abbreviated menu name. The Down pushbutton listing consists of the letter v, followed by an
abbreviated menu name. The right-pushbutton listing consists of a “>”, followed by an abbreviated menu
name.
If the Left and Right pushbutton listings are blank, then the current screen is the only one on this level. If
the Down pushbutton listing is blank, then there are no screens below the current screen.

Edit Sessions
Password access is required before entering an edit session. To initiate an edit session, press the Edit
pushbutton. The Edit pushbutton lights to indicate that the front panel is in edit mode. If the appropriate
access level is not active, then a prompt to enter a password appears. (Paragraphs titled Password
Defaults and Password Protection in this section have more information about using passwords.)

2-2 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

Editing Settings
Once the password is entered and security access is obtained, the first editable field of the current screen
is underlined. The setting in this field can be modified by pressing the Up pushbutton to increase the
setting or the Down pushbutton to decrease the setting. To edit another setting on the current screen, use
the Left pushbutton to advance the underline upward or the Right pushbutton to advance the underline
downward to the other editable fields.

NOTE
On most screen, setting changes are used immediately by the DECS-200.
However, these changes are not saved in nonvolatile memory until the Edit
pushbutton is pressed to terminate the edit session.

After all desired editing on the current screen is complete, the changes can be saved or the values that
were in use prior to the edit session can be restored. Changes are saved by pressing the Edit pushbutton
which terminates the edit session and saves the changes in nonvolatile memory. Changes are aborted by
pressing the Reset pushbutton which terminates the edit session without saving the changes. The
previous values are then restored by reading them from nonvolatile memory. In both cases, the Edit
pushbutton LED turns off to indicate that the edit session is terminated.
Security (password) access is not immediately lost when an edit session is terminated. Security access
terminates after 10 minutes of pushbutton inactivity at the front panel. (Security access timeout is different
from edit session timeout;. see Edit Session Timeout.) If this period of inactivity occurs during an edit
session, any changes made are saved in nonvolatile memory and will be used or continue to be used by
the DECS-200. At this time, both edit access and security access are terminated.

CAUTION
Pressing the Reset pushbutton after changing the active mode setpoint will
cause a step change in the operating setpoint that may have the potential to
adversely affect the system.

In order to modify settings on another screen with the same access level, the user merely navigates to
that screen and presses the Edit pushbutton to start a new edit session on the new screen.
Edit Session Timeout
If the front panel is left in the Edit mode after any setting changes are made, the changes will be saved
and the edit session terminated after 10 minutes of pushbutton inactivity.

Changing Settings
All settings that are viewable at the front panel are password protected and require security access to
change.
Global access grants the right to change any viewable setting at the front panel.
Setpoint access grants the right to change only a few settings. These include basic operating settings like
Start/Stop, AVR/FCR, PF/var, control setpoints and pre-positions.
See Table 2-2 for a complete setting list that shows the range, increments and default values. In Table 2-
2, note that the Ref. column refers to numbers associated with the menu screens shown later in this
section. These numbers should help you find the specific screen that contains the setpoint or parameter
that you want to change. For a list of settings that are accessible with the Setpoint access level, see
Table 2-3. All editable settings on a single menu screen are at the same access level.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-3

 Table 2-2. Front Panel Setting Parameters
Ref. Parameter Minimum Maximum Increment Default
1.1 Start/Stop Selection Stop, Start N/A Stop
AVR/FCR Selection AVR, FCR N/A AVR
PF/Var Control Enable Off, PF Control, Var Control N/A Off
Load Comp. Selection Off, Droop N/A Droop
Pre-Position Enable Off, On N/A On
1.2 Voltage Matching Off, On N/A Off
Internal Tracking Enable Off, On N/A Off
External Tracking Enable Off, On N/A Off
Underfrequency UF, V/Hz N/A UF
2.1 AVR Setpoint AVR min. setpoint AVR max. setpoint 0.1 V 120 V
FCR Setpoint FCR min. setpoint FCR max setpoint 0.01 A 0.1 A
Droop Compensation –30% nom. 30% nom. 0.1% nom. 5% nom.
Var Setpoint var min. setpoint var max. setpoint 1 var 0 var
PF Setpoint PF min. setpoint PF max. setpoint 0.005 1.00
2.1.1 Fine Voltage Band 0% (nom.) 30% (nom.) 0.01% (nom.) 20% (nom.)
AVR Min. Setpoint 70% (nom.) 100% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 70% (nom.)
AVR Max. Setpoint 100% (nom.) 110% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 110% (nom.)
FCR Min. Setpoint 0.0% (nom.) 100% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 0% (nom.)
FCR Max. Setpoint 0.0% (nom.) 120% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 120% (nom.)
2.1.2 Var Min. Setpoint –100% (of rated VA) 100% (of rated VA) 1% (of rated VA) 0%
Var Max. Setpoint –100% (of rated VA) 100% (of rated VA) 1% (of rated VA) 0%
Max Lag PF 0.5 1.0 0.005 0.8
Max Lead PF 1.0 –0.5 0.005 –0.8
Voltage Matching Band 0% (nom.) 20% (nom.) 0.01% (nom.) 10% (nom.)
Volt. Matching Ref. 90.0% 120.0% 0.1% 100%
2.2 AVR Prep. Setpoint AVR min. setpoint AVR max. setpoint 0.1 VA 120.0 V
FCR Prep. Setpoint FCR min. setpoint FCR max. setpoint 0.01 A 0.1 A
Var Prep. Setpoint var min. setpoint var max. setpoint 1 var 0 var
PF Prep. Setpoint PF min. setpoint PF max. setpoint 0.005 1.000
3.1 Gain Table Index 1 21 1 21
AVR/FCR Kp 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 30.0
AVR/FCR Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 150.0
AVR/FCR Kd 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 2.0
AVR/FCR Td 0.0 1.0 0.01 0.08
3.2 AVR Kg 0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
FCR Kg 0 1,000.0 0.1 25.0
3.3 OEL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0
OEL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
UEL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0
UEL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 2.0
SCL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0
SCL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
3.4 PF Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 120.0
PF Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
Var Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.01 120.0
Var Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.01 1.00
Voltage Matching Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0

2-4 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

 Ref. Parameter Minimum Maximum Increment Default
st
4.1 1 Metering Field V Avg
Va-b, Vb-c, Vc-a, V Avg, Line I, VA, watts, var, PF Gen Hz,
2nd Metering Field Bus Hz, Bus V, Fld V, Fld I, V Aux, EDM OC, EDM SC Vc-a
3rd Metering Field Fld I
5.1 Corner Frequency 15.0 Hz 90.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 57.0 Hz
Underfrequency Slope 0.00 x V/Hz 3.00 x V/Hz 0.01 V/Hz 1.00 x V/Hz
5.2 Field OV Enable Off, On N/A Off
Field OC Enable Of, On N/A Off
Stator OV Enable Off, On N/A Off
Stator UV Enable Off, On N/A Off
Loss of Sensing Enable Off, On N/A Off
Loss of Sensing Xfr to Off, On N/A Off
FCR Enable
5.3 Exciter Open Diode Off, On N/A Off
Enable
Exciter Shorted Diode Off, On N/A Off
Enable
Loss of Field Enable Off, On N/A Off
5.4 Field OV Threshold 1V 325 V 1V 20 V
Field OC Base Value 0.1 A 16 A 0.1 A 0.1 A
Stator OV Threshold 0V 30,000 V 1V 150 V
Stator UV Threshold 0V 30,000 V 1V 90 V
EDM OD Ripple 0% 100% 0.1% 5.0%
EDM SD Ripple 0% 100% 0.1% 5.0%
5.5 EDM Inhibit Level 0% 100% 0.1% 10%
LOS Balanced Voltage 0% 100% 0.1% 50%
LOS Unbalanced Voltage 0% 100% 0.1% 20%
Loss of Field Level 0 3,000,000 kvar 1 kvar 50.00 kvar
5.6 Field OV Delay 0.2 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Exc OC Time Dial Mult. 0.1 20.0 0.1 1.0
Stator OV Delay 0.1 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Stator UV Delay 0.5 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Loss of Voltage Sensing 0.0 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s
Open Exciter Diode 10.0 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s
Delay
5.7 Shorted Exciter Diode 5.0 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Delay
Loss of Field TD 0.0 9.9 0.1 9.9 s
6.1 OEL Style Summing Point/Takeover N/A Summing Pnt
OEL Option Option 1/Option 2/Option 3 N/A Option 1
6.2 On-Line OEL Inst. Limit 0.0A 30.0 A 0.1 A 3.0 A
On-Line OEL Inst Time 0s 10 s 1s 10 s
On-Line OEL Med. Limit 0.0 A 20.0 A 0.1 A 2.0 A
On-Line OEL Med. Time 0s 120 s 1s 120 s
On-Line OEL Cont. Limit 0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A
6.3 Off-Line OEL Hi Limit 0.0 A 30 A 0.1 A 3.0 A
Off-Line OEL Hi Time 0s 10 s 1s 10 s
Off-Line OEL Low Limit 0.0 A 15 A 0.1 A 1.0 A
6.4 Off-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
Max. Current
Off-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 30.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
High Current

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-5

 Ref. Parameter Minimum Maximum Increment Default
Off-Line Takeover OEL 0.1 s 20.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Time Delay
6.5 On-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 30.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
Max Current
On-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
Min Current
On-Line Takeover TD 0.1 s 20.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
6.6 UEL Curve, Pnt 1 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW
UEL Curve, Pnt 2 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW
UEL Curve, Pnt 3 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW
UEL Curve, Pnt 4 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW
UEL Curve, Pnt 5 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW
6.7 UEL Curve, Pnt 1 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar
UEL Curve, Pnt 2 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar
UEL Curve, Pnt 3 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar
UEL Curve, Pnt 4 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar
UEL Curve, Pnt 5 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar
6.8 SCL High Limit 0.0 A 66,000.0 A 1.0 A 0.0 A
SCL High Limit Time 0.0 s 60.0 s 1.0 s 0s
SCL Low Limit 0.0 A 66,000.0 A 1.0 A 0A
7.1.1 Gen. Rated Output V 85 V 30,000 V 1V 120 V
Gen. Rated Output I 10.0 A 60,000 A 0.1 A 200.0 A
Gen. Rated Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 10 Hz 60 Hz
7.2.1 Rated Field Voltage 1.0 V 180.0 V 0.1 V 32.0 V
Rated Field Current 0.1 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A
Pole Ratio 0 10 0.01 0
7.3.1 Gen. Sensing PT Pri. 1V 30,000 V 1V 120 V
Gen. Sensing PT Sec. 1V 600 V 1V 120 V
Bus Sensing PT Pri. 1V 500,000 V 1V 120 V
Bus Sensing PT Sec. 1V 600 V 1V 120 V
Gen. CT Pri. 1A 60,000 A 1A 200 A
Gen. CT Sec. 1A 5A 4A 5A
7.4.1 Sensing Configuration 1-phase A-C, 3-phase N/A 1-ph A-C
Auxiliary Input Type Voltage, Current N/A voltage
Cross Current Gain –30.00 30 0.01 0
7.4.2 AVR Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
FCR Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
Var Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
PF Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
Inner or Outer Loop Inner, Outer N/A Inner
7.5.1 Relay 1 Contact Sense NC, NO N/A NO
Relay 1 Annunc. Type Momentary, Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained
Relay 1 Moment Time 0.10 s 5.00 s 50 ms 0.10 s
Field Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off
Field Overcurrent On, Off N/A Off
Stator Undervoltage On, Off N/A Off
7.5.2 Stator Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off
Underfrequency On, Off N/A Off
Overexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
Underexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
FCR Mode On, Off N/A Off

2-6 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

 Ref. Parameter Minimum Maximum Increment Default
No Voltage Sensing On, Off N/A Off
7.5.3 Setpoint at Low Limit On, Off N/A Off
Setpoint at High Limit On, Off N/A Off
System Below 10 Hz On, Off N/A Off
Open Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off
Shorted Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off
7.5.4 Relay 2 Contact Sense NC, NO N/A NO
Relay 2 Annunc. Type Momentary Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained
Relay 2 Moment Time 0.10 s 5.00 s 50 ms 0.10 s
Field Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off
Stator Undervoltage On, Off N/A Off
7.5.5 Stator Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off
Underfrequency On, Off N/A Off
Overexcitation On, Off N/A Off
Underexcitation On, Off N/A Off
FCR Mode On, Off N/A Off
No Voltage Sensing On, Off N/A Off
7.5.6 Setpoint at Low Limit On, Off N/A Off
Setpoint at High Limit On, Off N/A Off
System Below 10 Hz On, Off N/A Off
Open Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off
Shorted Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off
7.5.7 Relay 3 Contact Sense NC, NO N/A NO
Relay 3 Annunc. Type Momentary, Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained
Relay 3 Moment Time 0.10 s 5.00 s 50 ms 0.10 s
Field Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off
Field Overcurrent On, Off N/A Off
Stator Undervoltage On, Off N/A Off
7.5.8 Stator Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off
Underfrequency On, Off N/A Off
Overexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
Underexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
FCR Mode On, Off N/A Off
No Voltage Sensing On, Off N/A Off
7.5.9 Setpoint at Low Limit On, Off N/A Off
Setpoint at High Limit On, Off N/A Off
System Below 10 Hz On, Off N/A Off
Open Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off
Shorted Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off
7.6.1 AVR Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
FCR Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
Var Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
PF Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
7.7.1 AVR Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
FCR Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
Var Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
PF Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
7.8.1 Soft Start Level 0% 90% 1% 5%
Soft Start Time 1s 7,200 s 1s 5s
7.9.1 Internal Track rate 1.0 s 80 s 0.1 s 20.0 s

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-7

 Ref. Parameter Minimum Maximum Increment Default
Internal Track Delay 0.0 s 8s 0.1 s 0.1 s
External Track Rate 1.0 s 80 s 0.1 s 20.0 s
External Track Delay 0.0 s 8s 01. s 0.1 s
8.1.1 Com0 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps
Com1 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps
Com2 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps
8.1.2 Com2 Address 0 247 1 247
Com2 Delay 0 ms 200 ms 10 ms 10 ms
Parity None, Odd, Even N/A None
Stop Bits 1 2 1 2
8.2 LCD Contrast 40 80 1 60
8.3 Real-Time Clock Setting N/A 1 N/A
Real-Time Clock Date N/A 1 01-01-01
Setting
8.3.1 Time Format 12 hr, 24 hr N/A 12 hr
Daylight Saving Time DS ON, DS OFF N/A DS Off
Date Format d-m-y, m/d/y N/A d-m-y

PASSWORD PROTECTION
All editable settings on the front panel are password protected. Passwords can be a maximum of six
characters in length and may contain all letters, all numbers, or a mixture of both. Passwords are not case
sensitive; the DECS-200 will accept a correct password consisting of uppercase or lowercase letters.
There are two levels of access: global and setpoint. Global access grants the user the right to change any
editable setting through the front panel. Setpoint access grants the user the right to change a limited
number of settings. These settings include the basic operational settings like Start, Stop, AVR/FCR,
PF/var, control setpoints and pre-position. For a complete list, refer to Table 2-3. All editable settings on a
single menu screen are at the same access level.

Table 2-3. Settings Accessible with Setpoint Access Level

Screen Setting
OPERATE_1 (1.1) Start/Stop Control
OPERATE_1 (1.1) AVR/FCR Mode
OPERATE_1 (1.1) PF/Var Mode
OPERATE_1 (1.1) Load Compensation Type
OPERATE_1 (1.1) Pre-Position Enable
OPERATE_2 (1.2) Voltage Matching Enable
OPERATE_2 (1.2) Autotracking Enable
OPERATE_2 (1.2) Autotransfer Enable
MODE_SET (2.1) AVR Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) FCR Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) Var Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) PF Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) Droop Setting
PREP_SET (2.2) AVR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position
PREP_SET (2.2) FCR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position
MODE_SET (2.2) Var Mode Setpoint Pre-Position
ADJUST (4.1) 1ST Metering Field Display Quantity
ADJUST (4.1) 2nd Metering Field Display Quantity
ADJUST (4.1) 3rd Metering Field Display Quantity
ADJUST (4.1) Active Setpoint
CONTRAST (8.2) LCD Contrast

2-8 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

DECS-200 units are delivered with the global and setpoint passwords set at decs2. When a password is
entered, software first checks for a match between the entered password and the global password.
Because the two passwords are the same, global access is always granted. This means that in order to
allow setpoint access only, the global and setpoint passwords must be changed so that they are not the
same. Passwords may be changed using BESTCOMS software. It is suggested that the user change the
passwords in order to provide security against unauthorized parameter changes. Once changed, the
passwords should be stored in a secure location.

CAUTION
Pressing the Edit and Reset pushbuttons during DECS-200 power-up will cause
all user-programmed settings to be replaced with the default settings.

If the user-defined passwords are lost or forgotten, the default passwords may be restored by
simultaneously pressing the Edit and Reset pushbuttons during power-up of the DECS-200. Restoring the
passwords to the default values will also change all previously programmed settings to the default values.
Before restoring the default passwords (and settings), all DECS-200 settings should be downloaded to a
file by using BESTCOMS software. After the default settings are loaded, the user-programmed settings
can be uploaded to the DECS-200 from the saved settings file. The user may also reprogram the
passwords.
A password is required the first time any DECS-200 setting is changed or when the password access
expires (after 10 minutes with no additional entries). If a user with settings access attempts to begin an
edit session on a screen requiring global access, the settings access is revoked and the user is prompted
to enter a password to gain global access.

METERING SCREEN
Information displayed by the metering screen is grouped into five field types: metering, setpoint, percent
of range, mode message, and alarm annunciation.

Metering Fields
Three user-programmable fields display up to three different metering quantities at a given time. Table 2-
4 lists the metering quantities that may be selected.

Table 2-4. User-Selectable Metering Quantities

Metering Labels Metering Quantities
Va-b Generator A-B (L-L) rms voltage
Vb-c Generator B-C (L-L) rms voltage
Vc-a Generator C-A (L-L) rms voltage
Vavg Average of three generator L-L voltages
Line I Generator line current
VA Generator load VA
Watts Generator load watts
Var Generator load var
PF Generator load power factor
Gen Hz Generator frequency
Bus Hz Bus frequency
Bus V Bus rms L-L voltage
Fld V Field voltage
Fld I Field current
V Aux Voltage proportional to auxiliary input
EDM OD Open exciter diode ripple
EDM SD Shorted exciter diode ripple

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-9

The values in all three metering fields are automatically scaled by an autoranging function to display up to
four digits of resolution, a decimal point, and if needed, a multiplier such as k for 1,000 or M for
1,000,000. For negative values with magnitudes greater than 999.9, only three digits of resolution are
displayed.

Setpoint Field
The setpoint field displays the setpoint for the present mode of operation. Table 2-5 lists the relationship
between the operating mode and the setpoint field quantity.

Table 2-5. Setpoint Field as a Function of Operating Mode

Operating Mode Setpoint Field Quantity Mode Message
Off Setpoint from last mode UNIT IS OFF
Voltage Matching AVR setpoint VOLTAGE MATCHING
FCR (Manual) FCR setpoint FCR (MANUAL)
AVR (Auto) AVR setpoint AVR (AUTO)
Droop AVR setpoint DROOP
Var Control Var setpoint VAR CONTROL
PF Control PF setpoint POWER FACTOR
CONTROL

Percent-of-Range Field
The percent-of-range field displays the setpoint expressed as a percentage of the available adjustment
range. This relationship is linear. For example, a setpoint that is midway between minimum and maximum
would be displayed as 50.0%. A setpoint that is at the maximum limit would be displayed as 100%.

Mode Message Field

The bottom of the metering screen contains the mode message field which displays a message indicating
the DECS-200’s current mode of operation.

Alarm Annunciation Field

The alarm annunciation field, located directly below the metering fields, remains blank during normal
operating conditions. When an alarm condition occurs, the message “ALARMS (PRESS < OR >) appears
in the alarm annunciation field. The message appears as an inverse display—light colored characters
appear on a dark background. See Alarm Message Screen for information about how to identify which
alarm condition was annunciated.

Alarm Message Screen

From the metering screen, pressing either the Left or Right scrolling pushbutton will cause the alarm
message screen to appear. This screen displays up to six messages identifying the conditions that led to
the most recent annunciations. Table 2-6 lists the messages that may appear as annunciations on the
alarm message screen. When more than one message is listed, the newest annunciations are appended
to the bottom of the list. Once the list contains six messages, any further annunciations will cause the
oldest messages to be deleted from the top of the list.

Table 2-6. Annunciation Messages

Annunciation Message Duration of Message
FIELD OVERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset
FIELD OVERCURRENT Maintained until reset
GEN. UNDERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset
GEN. OVERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset
UNDERFREQUENCY Clears 2 s after end of event
OVEREXCITATION LIMIT Clears 2 s after end of event

2-10 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

 Annunciation Message Duration of Message
UNDEREXCITATION LIMIT Clears 2 s after end of event
LOST VOLTAGE SENSING Maintained until reset
FAILED TO BUILD UP Clears 2 s after end of event
SYSTEM BELOW 10 HZ Maintained until reset
EXCITER DIODE OPEN Maintained until reset
EXCITER DIODE SHORT Maintained until reset

Once the list of annunciation messages has been viewed, it may be cleared by pressing the Reset
pushbutton. If a condition that LED to an annunciation is still present when the alarm message screen is
cleared, then a new annunciation message will be generated.
Pressing the Reset pushbutton will also send the display back to the Metering screen. Furthermore, the
alarms message on the Metering screen will also be cleared. However, if the user leaves the alarm
message screen by pressing the Left, Right or Up scrolling pushbuttons, then the annunciation
messages list remains intact. This allows the user to maintain a short history of annunciations. In addition,
the alarms message on the Metering screen will also remain. The disadvantage of this is that the
metering screen would no longer indicate that a new annunciation occurred because the alarms message
would always be present.

Screens with Special Editing Modes

There are several screens that operate differently while in the edit mode. OPERATE_1 (1.1),
BAUD_RATE (8.1.1), and MODBUS (8.1.2) are examples of such screens. In each case, any changes
made to a setting are not used by the system (nor saved in nonvolatile memory) until the Edit pushbutton
is pressed again. The programmable inputs for output relays 1 through 4 work in the same manner.
These are on screens RELAY_1 (7.5.1) through RELAY_3B (7.5.9).
The REG_GAIN (3.1) screen also operates in a different manner when in the Edit mode. The first four
parameters on this screen represent a table containing twenty sets of predefined PID values and one set
of user-definable values. The first of these, STAB SET #, which means stability settings number, is the
index to the table. The second, third, and fourth parameters (AVR/FCR Kp, Ki, and Kd), are the actual
entries in the table. Stability setting numbers 1 to 20 are the predefined values, and 21 is the set of user-
definable values.
Editing these parameters works as follows: As long as STAB SET # is set to 21, then AVR/FCR Kp, Ki,
and Kd may be individually edited and customized. The values displayed are not used by the system until
they are saved by pressing the Edit pushbutton. This means that if a change is aborted by pressing the
Reset pushbutton, the PID numbers currently being used by the system remain unchanged.
If STAB SET # is 1 to 20, then AVR/FCR Kp, Ki and Kd may not be edited from the display (although the
cursor can be moved to their display fields). If the STAB SET # is changed, the values shown in the
display fields will not change until the selected STAB SET # is saved. When the STAB SET # is saved,
the table entries are saved, used by the system and displayed on the LCD.
If the DECS-200 is using the user-defined values previously set at STAB SET # 21 and a STAB SET # of
1 to 20 is saved, the user-defined values are lost. The next time that user-defined values for STAB SET #
21 are required, they must be manually entered and then saved. It is assumed that the table entries for
STAB SET # 1 to 20 will be used as starting points from which users will arrive at their own customized
values after the selected starting point has been saved (and thus copied into STAB SET # 21).

Menu Tree
The menu tree has eight branches:
1. OPERATING. Displays mode status and on or off status (AVR, FCR, var, PF, etc.)
2. SETPOINTS. Display and setting of mode values (AVR, FCR, var, PF, etc.)
3. LOOP GAINS. Loop gains for each element are set here (Kp, Ki, Kd, Kg)
4. METERING. Real-time metering of user-selected values and alarm messages.
5. PROTECTION. Display and setting of protective function parameters such as pickups.
6. LIMITERS. Display and setting of system limiters (OEL, UEL, etc.)
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-11
7. SYSTEM PARAMETERS. Display and setting of system parameters. This menu item consists of nine
sub-branches:
• Generator Data
• Field Data
• Transformers
• Configuration
• Output Contacts
• Traverse Rates
• Pre-position Modes
• Startup
• Tracking
8. GENERAL SETTINGS. Display and setting of communication setting parameters and LCD contrast.
Figures 2-2 through 2-11 illustrate all branches in the menu tree. In Figures 2-2 through 2-11, the upper
left corner of each screen displays a one, two or three digit number with decimal points between each
digit. These numbers are reference numbers to the screens in the menu tree. A letter at the upper right
corner (G, S, and N) indicates the security access level (global, setpoint and not applicable) required to
edit that screen.

Figure 2-2.Operating Menu Branch

2-12 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 2-3. Setpoint Menu Branch

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-13

 Figure 2-4. Loop Gains Menu Branch

2-14 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 2-5. Metering Menu Branch

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-15

 Figure 2-6. Protection Menu Branch

2-16 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 2-7. Limiters Menu Branch

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-17

 Figure 2-8. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 1 of 3)

2-18 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 2-9. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 2 of 3)

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-19

 Figure 2-10. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 3 of 3)

2-20 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 2-11. General Settings Menu Branch

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-21

FRONT PANEL OPERATION
The following paragraphs describe the settings and adjustments that are available via the DECS-200 front
panel. They are grouped into eight main categories which include: operating modes, setpoints, loop
gains, metering, protection, limiters, system parameters, and general settings.
Front panel settings and adjustments are listed and described in the following paragraphs. Settings are
organized by category and by screen.

Operating Modes
Screen: \OPER\OPERATE_1 (1.1)
START/STOP - starts and stops the regulator
AVR OR FCR - selects the regulator mode: AVR for automatic voltage regulator, FCR for field current
regulator (also known as MANUAL mode)
PF OR var - selects the controller mode: OFF for none, var for var control, PF for power factor control
LOAD COMP - selects the load compensation type: OFF for none, DROOP for voltage droop.
PRE-POSITION - enables/disables the pre-position function: OFF to disable, ON to enable
Screen: \OPER\OPERATE_2 (1.2)
VOLT MATCH - turns the voltage matching function on and off (Internal tracking between modes)
INT TRACK - turns the internal tracking function on and off
EXT TRACK - turns the external tracking function on and off
UF OR V/HZ - selects either underfrequency or volts-per-hertz limiting

Setpoints
Screen: \SETPT\MODE_SET (2.1)
AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulation setpoint in actual generator voltage
FCR MODE - the field current regulation setpoint in Amps
DROOP - the amount of voltage droop as a % of rated generator voltage when the kvar load numerically
equals the rated kW
Var MODE - the var controller regulation setpoint in var
PF MODE - the power factor controller regulation setpoint
Screen: \SETPT\MODES\RANGE_1 (2.1.1)
FINE V BD - the adjustable voltage band (var volt band) around the generator's output voltage as a % of
rated generator voltage when var/PF mode is active
AVR MIN - the minimum automatic voltage regulator setpoint as a % of rated generator voltage
AVR MAX - the maximum automatic voltage regulator setpoint as a % of rated generator voltage
FCR MIN - the minimum field current regulator setpoint as a % of rated field current
FCR MAX - the maximum field current regulator setpoint as a % of rated field current
Screen: \SETPT\MODES\RANGE_2 (2.1.2)
MIN var OUT - the minimum generated var setpoint as a numerical % of rated generator kW (negative for
absorbing)
MAX var OUT - the maximum generated var setpoint as a numerical % of rated generator kW (negative
for absorbing)
MAX LAG PF - maximum lagging power factor setpoint
MAX LEAD PF - maximum leading power factor setpoint
V MATCH BD - the adjustable voltage band allows the voltage matching function to activate if the bus
voltage is within this band. This setting is a numerical % of rated generator voltage.
V MATCH REF - (Gen to Bus PT Match Level) the bus voltage setpoint for the voltage matching function
as a numerical % of bus voltage

2-22 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

Screen: \SETPT\PREP_SET (2.2)
The present control mode operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value when the unit receives a
pre-position command.
AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulator setpoint pre-position value
FCR MODE - the field current regulator setpoint pre-position value
Var MODE - the var controller setpoint pre-position value
PF MODE - the power factor setpoint pre-position value

Loop Gains
Screen: \GAIN\REG_GAIN1 (3.1)
STAB RANGE - the index into the internally defined PID table. Table 2-7 lists the automatic pre-defined
stability gain settings for the exciter field and the 20 stability settings.
AVR/FCR Kp - proportional gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop
AVR/FCR Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop
AVR/FCR Kd - derivative gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop
AVR/FCR Td - derivative time constant used in AVR/FCR loop

Table 2-7. Automatic Stability Range Gain Settings Index

Generator
Generator Open Exciter Time
Excitation Circuit Time Constant
Mode Setting Constant (T’do) (Texc) Kp Ki Kd
1 1.0 0.17 42.20 115.20 4.433
2 1.5 0.25 66.50 150.00 8.750
3 2.0 0.33 87.16 167.90 13.670
4 2.5 0.42 104.50 175.80 18.960
5 3.0 0.50 119.00 177.80 24.500
6 3.5 0.58 131.30 176.40 30.220
7 4.0 0.67 141.80 173.10 36.060
8 4.5 0.75 150.90 168.80 42.000
9 5.0 0.83 158.80 163.90 48.010
Exciter Field

10 5.5 0.92 165.70 158.70 54.080

11 6.0 1.00 171.80 153.60 60.200
12 6.5 1.08 177.20 148.50 66.350
13 7.0 1.17 182.10 143.60 72.540
14 7.5 1.25 186.50 138.90 78.750
15 8.0 1.33 190.50 134.40 84.980
16 8.5 1.42 194.10 130.10 91.230
17 9.0 1.50 197.40 125.90 97.500
18 9.5 1.58 200.40 122.10 103.800
19 10.0 1.67 203.20 118.40 110.100
20 10.5 1.75 205.70 114.80 116.400

Screen: \GAIN\REG GAIN2 (3.2)

AVR Kg - loop gain used in AVR mode
FCR Kg - loop gain used in FCR mode

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-23

Screen: \GAIN\LIM_GAINS (3.3)
OEL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the overexcitation limiter loop
OEL Kg - loop gain used in the overexcitation limiter
UEL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the underexcitation limiter loop
UEL Kg - loop gain used in the underexcitation limiter
SCL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the stator current limiter
SCL Kg - loop gain used in the stator current limiter

Controller Gains
Screen: \GAIN\CTL_GAINS (3.4)
PF Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the power factor controller
PF Kg - loop gain used for the power factor controller
Var Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the var controller
Var Kg - loop gain used for the var controller
V MATCH Kg - loop gain used for the voltage matching function

Metering
Screen: \METER\ADJUST (4.1)
1st metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities
2nd metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities
3rd metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities
SETPT - the present control mode operating setpoint
Screen: \METER\ALARM_MSG (4.2)
Reset Button - clears any displayed alarm messages (and returns to the ADJUST metering screen).

Protection
Screen: \PROT\UNDERFREQ (5.1)
CORNR FREQ - the corner frequency for the underfrequency curve
UF SLOPE - the slope of the underfrequency curve
Screen: \PROT\PROT_ENABL1 (5.2)
FIELD OV - field overvoltage detection enable
FIELD OC - field overcurrent detection enable
STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage detection enable
STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage detection enable
NO SENSING – loss of voltage sensing detection enable
NO SNS→FCR – transfer to FCR mode enable (when a loss of voltage sensing is detected). Loss of
voltage sensing detection must also be enabled for this feature to work.
Screen: \PROT\PROT_ENAB2 (5.3)
EX DIOD OD - exciter open diode detection enable
EX DIOD SD - exciter shorted diode detection enable
LOSS FIELD - enables and disables loss of field protection
Screen: \PROT\PROT_LEVL (5.4)
FIELD OV - field overvoltage threshold
FIELD OC - field overcurrent base value (100%)
STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage threshold
STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage threshold

2-24 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

EDM OD RIPL - open exciter diode ripple threshold
EDM SD RIPL - shorted exciter diode ripple threshold
Screen: \PROT\PROT_LEVL2 (5.5)
EDM INH LVL - exciter diode detection inhibit level
LOS BAL V - loss of balanced sensing voltage threshold
LOS IMBAL V - loss of unbalanced sensing voltage threshold
LOSS FIELD - loss of field time delay
Screen: \PROT\PROT_TIMER (5.6)
FIELD OV - field overvoltage time delay
FIELD OC TD - field overcurrent time dial multiplier
STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage time delay
STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage time delay
NO SENSING - lost sensing voltage time delay
EX DIOD OD - exciter open diode time delay
Screen: \PROT\PROT_TIMR2 (5.7)
EX DIOD SD - exciter shorted diode time delay
LOSS FIELD - loss of field time delay

Limiters
Screen: LIMITERS (6.0)
ENABLED - selects which limiters are enabled: NONE, UEL, OEL, OEL/UEL, SCL, SCL/UEL, SCL/OEL,
or SCL/OEL/UEL
Screen: \LIMIT\OPTION (6.1)
On-line overexcitation limiter style and options.
OEL STYLE - selects Summing Point or Takeover style overexcitation limiter
OEL OPTION - selects on-line and off-line overexcitation limiter control options:
Option 1: On-line OEL settings are active when either the 52 J/K or 52 L/M contacts are open. Off-line
OEL settings are active when either the 52 J/K or 52 L/M contacts are closed.
Option 2: On-line OEL settings are active when the 52 J/K contact is open. Off-line OEL settings are
active when the 52 J/K contact is closed.
Option 3: On-line OEL settings are active at all times.
Screen: \LIMIT\ONLINE (6.2)
On-line overexcitation limiter (summing point) settings.
INST LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter instantaneous limit threshold
INST TIME - on-line overexcitation limiter instantaneous limit time delay
MED LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter medium current threshold
MED TIME - on-line overexcitation limiter medium current time delay
CONT LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter continuous (low) current threshold
Screen \LIMIT\OFFLINE (6.3)
Off-line overexcitation limiter (summing point) settings.
OEL HI LIM - off-line overexcitation limiter high current threshold
HI LIM TIME - off-line overexcitation limiter high current time delay
OEL LO LIM - off-line overexcitation limiter low current threshold

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-25

Screen \LIMIT\OFFTAKOVR (6.4)
Off-line overexcitation limiter (takeover) settings.
OEL MAX CUR - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter maximum current threshold
OEL MIN CUR - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter minimum current threshold
OEL TD - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter time delay
Screen \LIMIT\ONTAKOVR (6.5)
On-line overexcitation limiter (takeover) settings.
OEL MAX CUR - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter maximum current threshold
OEL MIN CUR - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter minimum current threshold
OEL TD - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter time delay
Screen \LIMIT\UEL_CRV_X (6.6)
Underexcitation limiter real-power curve points.
PNT 1 WATTS - underexcitation limiter real-power curve point 1
PNT 2 WATTS - underexcitation limiter real-power curve point 2
PNT 3 WATTS - underexcitation limiter real-power curve point 3
PNT 4 WATTS - underexcitation limiter real-power curve point 4
PNT 5 WATTS - underexcitation limiter real-power curve point 5
Screen \LIMIT\UEL_CRV_Y (6.7)
Underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve points.
PNT 1 vars - underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve point 1
PNT 2 vars - underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve point 2
PNT 3 vars - underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve point 3
PNT 4 vars - underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve point 4
PNT 5 vars - underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve point 5
Screen \LIMIT\SCLIM (6.8)
Stator current limiter settings.
SCL HI LIM - stator current limiter high current setpoint
HI LIM TIME - stator current limiter time delay
SCL LO LIM - stator current limiter low current setpoint

System Parameters
Screen: \GEN\GEN_DATA (7.1.1)
RATED VOLT - generator rated output voltage
RATED CURR - generator rated output current
FREQUENCY - generator rated frequency
Screen: \EXCTR\EXCTR_DATA (7.2.1)
FIELD VOLT - rated field voltage
FIELD CURR - rated field current
POLE RATIO - ratio between exciter poles to the number of generator poles
Screen: \XFMRS\XFMR_DATA (7.3.1)
GEN PT PRI - generator sensing transformer primary voltage rating
GEN PT SEC - generator sensing transformer secondary voltage rating
BUS PT PRI - bus sensing transformer primary voltage rating
BUS PT SEC - bus sensing transformer secondary voltage rating

2-26 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

GEN CT PRI - generator sensing transformer primary current rating
GEN CT SEC - generator sensing transformer secondary current rating
Screen: \CONFG\CNFG_DATA (7.4.1)
SENSING - sensing configuration: single-phase or three-phase
AUX IN TYPE - selects the auxiliary input type as voltage or current
CRSS I GAIN - cross current compensation input gain
Screen: \CNFG AUX Gains (7.4.2)
The auxiliary input allows an analog signal to be externally applied to the DECS-200 to modify the
operating setpoint. The amount of change that may be induced is proportional to the magnitude of the
signal and the input gain.
AVR MODE – auxiliary input gain in AVR mode
FCR MODE – auxiliary input gain in FCR mode
Var MODE – auxiliary input gain in var mode
PR MODE – auxiliary input gain in PF mode
INNER/OUTER – control loop summing point location where the auxiliary input signal is to be injected.
For AVR or FCR mode, select INNER. For var or PF mode, select outer. Once selected, the injection
point remains fixed across all modes of operation.
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1 (7.5.1)
There are three types of relay annunciation: momentary, maintained and latched. A relay that is
programmed for momentary annunciation will do so for a (programmable) time interval and then cease.
The momentary annunciation for an existing condition will not repeat. A relay that is programmed for
maintained annunciation will do so for the duration of the condition that is being annunciated. A relay
programmed for a latched annunciation will continue to annunciate the condition until an alarm reset
command is given through the front panel, BESTCOMS software (via the front RS-232 port) or Modbus™
(via the rear RS-485 port).
OUTPUT SENSE - relay 1 contact normal state: NO for normally open, NC for normally closed
OUTPUT TYPE - type of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained,
LATCHED for latched
MOMENT TIME - the duration of a momentary annunciation
FIELD O/V - assignment of field overvoltage annunciation to output relay 1
FIELD O/C - assignment of field overcurrent annunciation to output relay 1
STATOR U/V - assignment of stator undervoltage annunciation to output relay 1
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1A (7.5.2)
STATOR O/V - assignment of stator overvoltage annunciation to output relay 1
UNDER FREQ - assignment of underfrequency annunciation to output relay 1
IN OEL - assignment of overexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 1
IN UEL - assignment of underexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 1
IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (Manual) annunciation to output relay 1
NO V SENSE - assignment of lost voltage sensing annunciation to output relay 1
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1B (7.5.3)
AT LO LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at low limit annunciation to output relay 1
AT HI LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at high limit annunciation to output relay 1
BELOW 10 HZ - assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 1
EXC DIOD OD - assignment of open exciter diode to output relay 1
EXC DIOD SD - assignment of shorted exciter diode to output relay 1
LOSS FIELD - enables and disables annunciation of loss of field protection

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-27

Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1C (7.5.4)
IN SCL - enables and disables stator current limiting annunciation
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_2 (7.5.5)
OUTPUT SENSE - relay 2 contact normal state: NO for normally open, NC for normally closed
OUTPUT TYPE - duration of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained,
LATCHED for latched
MOMENT TIME - the duration of a momentary annunciation
FIELD O/V - assignment of field overvoltage annunciation to output relay 2
FIELD O/C - assignment of field overcurrent annunciation to output relay 2
STATOR U/V - assignment of stator undervoltage annunciation to output relay 2
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_2A (7.5.6)
STATOR O/V - assignment of stator overvoltage annunciation to output relay 2
UNDER FREQ - assignment of underfrequency annunciation to output relay 2
IN OEL - assignment of overexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 2
IN UEL - assignment of underexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 2
IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (manual) annunciation to output relay 2
NO V SENSE - assignment of lost voltage sensing annunciation to output relay 2
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_2B (7.5.7)
AT LO LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at low limit annunciation to output relay 2
AT HI LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at high limit annunciation to output relay 2
BELOW 10 HZ – assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 2
EXC DIOD OD - assignment of open exciter diode to output relay 2
EXC DIOD SD - assignment of shorted exciter diode to output relay 2
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_2C (7.5.8)
IN SCL - enables and disables stator current limiting annunciation
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_3 (7.5.9)
OUTPUT SENSE - relay 3 contact normal state: NO for normally open, NC for normally closed
OUTPUT TYPE - duration of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained,
LATCHED for latched
MOMENT TIME - the duration of a momentary annunciation
FIELD O/V - assignment of field overvoltage annunciation to output relay 3
FIELD O/C - assignment of field overcurrent annunciation to output relay 3
STATOR U/V - assignment of stator undervoltage annunciation to output relay 3
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_3A (7.5.10)
STATOR O/V - assignment of stator overvoltage annunciation to output relay 3
UNDER FREQ - assignment of underfrequency annunciation to output relay 3
IN OEL - assignment of overexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 3
IN UEL - assignment of underexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 3
IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (Manual) annunciation to output relay 3
NO V SENSE - assignment of lost voltage sensing annunciation to output relay 3
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_3B (7.5.11)
AT LO LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at low limit annunciation to output relay 3
AT HI LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at high limit annunciation to output relay 3
BELOW 10 HZ – assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 3

2-28 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

EXC DIOD OD - assignment of open exciter diode to output relay 3
EXC DIOD SD - assignment of shorted exciter diode to output relay 3
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_3C (7.5.12)
IN SCL - enables and disables stator current limiting annunciation
Screen: \TRVRS\TRVRS_RATE (7.6.1)
The traverse rate is the time required to adjust the present control mode setpoint from one extreme of the
programmed adjustment range to the other extreme.
AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulator mode traverse rate
FCR MODE - the field current regulator mode traverse rate
Var MODE - the var control mode traverse rate
PF MODE - the power factor control mode traverse rate
Screen: \PMODE\PREP_MODE (7.7.1)
The pre-position mode for the present control mode determines whether or not the unit will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If the
pre-position mode is set for MAINTAIN, then further setpoint change commands are ignored. If the pre-
position mode is set for RELEASE, then subsequent setpoint change commands are followed.
AVR MODE - automatic voltage regulator pre-position mode
FCR MODE - field current regulator pre-position mode
Var MODE - var controller pre-position mode
PF MODE - power factor controller pre-position mode
Screen: \START\START_UP (7.8.1)
SS LEVEL - soft start level
SS TIME - soft start time
Screen: \TRACK\TRACK_DATA (7.9.1)
Internal tracking (autotracking) and external tracking (auto-transfer)
INT RATE - the traverse rate of internal tracking from minimum setpoints to maximum setpoints
INT DELAY - the time delay before internal tracking begins after it is turned on
EXT RATE - the traverse rate of external tracking from minimum setpoints to maximum setpoints
EXT DELAY - the time delay before external tracking begins after it is turned on

General Settings
Screen: \COMMS\BAUD_RATE (8.1.1)
COM0 RS232 - the front panel RS232 communications port baud rate
COM1 RS232 - the rear panel RS232 autotracking communications port baud rate
COM2 RS485 - the rear panel RS485 Modbus™ communications port baud rate
Screen: \COMMS\MODBUS (8.1.2)
Settings for the rear panel RS485 Modbus™ communications port
COM2 ADDR - device address
COM2 DELAY - response delay time
PARITY - parity: NONE, ODD, or EVEN
STOP BITS - number of stop bits: 1 or 2
Screen: \SETUP\CONTRAST (8.2)
Front panel LCD contrast setting

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-29

Screen: \D200\SETUP\CLOCK (8.3)
TIME - displays and sets the current time
DATE - displays and sets the current date
Screen: \RTC\CLK_FORMAT (8.3.1)
TIME FORMAT - selects the format for displaying time on Screen 8.3
DST FORMAT - selects the DECS-200 RTC for day light savings time
DATE FORMAT - selects the format for displaying the date on Screen 8.3

2-30 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 3 • FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 3 • FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 3-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 3-1
FUNCTION BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................................... 3-1
Contact Input Circuits ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Analog Inputs...................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Operating Power ................................................................................................................................ 3-4
Control Power..................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) ..................................................................................................... 3-5
Microprocessor ................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) .......................................................................................................... 3-5
Operational Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-5
Watchdog Timer ................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Real-Time Clock ................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) Output .............................................................................................. 3-5
Relay Output Circuits ......................................................................................................................... 3-5
Communication................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Memory Circuits.................................................................................................................................. 3-7
Protection Functions........................................................................................................................... 3-7
SOFT START......................................................................................................................................... 3-9
LIMITER FUNCTIONS......................................................................................................................... 3-10
Underfrequency Limiter .................................................................................................................... 3-10
Volts per Hertz Ratio Limiter ............................................................................................................ 3-11
Overexcitation Limiter (OEL) ............................................................................................................ 3-11
Underexcitation Limiter..................................................................................................................... 3-13
Stator Current Limiting ..................................................................................................................... 3-13
DROOP AND LINE-DROP COMPENSATION .................................................................................... 3-14
DATA LOGGING AND REPORTING .................................................................................................. 3-14
Sequence of Events Reporting......................................................................................................... 3-14
Oscillography.................................................................................................................................... 3-15

Figures
Figure 3-1. Simplified Block Diagram ........................................................................................................ 3-1
Figure 3-2. Field Overcurrent Timing Curves ............................................................................................ 3-7
Figure 3-3. Soft Start Voltage Reference ................................................................................................ 3-10
Figure 3-4. Typical Underfrequency Compensation Curve ..................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-5. Typical 1.10 PU V/Hz Limiter Curve ..................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-6. Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting............................................................................................ 3-11
Figure 3-7. On-Line Overexcitation Limiting............................................................................................ 3-11
Figure 3-8. Inverse Time Characteristic for Takeover-Style OEL ........................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-9. Custom Five-Point Curve...................................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3-10. Stator Current Limiting ........................................................................................................ 3-13
Figure 3-11. Data Record Example ......................................................................................................... 3-16

Tables
Table 3-1. 52L/M and 52J/K Truth Table (Option 1, Default Settings) ...................................................... 3-3

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Functional Description i

 This page intentionally left blank.

ii DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 3 • FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
This section illustrates and describes the functional capabilities of the DECS-200.

FUNCTION BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS

The function blocks of the DECS-200 are illustrated in Figure 3-1 and described in the following
paragraphs.

FLASH
RAM EEPROM
START MEMORY
STOP
WTCHD
SECEN

52L/M
FRONT COM0 ON/OF
AUTO
CONTACT PANEL RS-232 RELAY
FCR INPUT KEYPAD PORT OUTPUT RLY3
PRE-P CIRCUITS CONTACTS
RAISE RLY2

LOWER

52J/K RLY1

ALRST

ZCD
FRONT
ZCD PANEL
LEDS
BUS VCA MICRO
PROCESSOR
GEN VCA FRONT
GEN VAB
ANALOG PANEL
INPUT LCD
LINE IB CIRCUITS
ADC
LINE IA/C

ACC V/I
COM1
RS-232
PORT

COM2
RS-485
+5
VAC WATCH-DOG PORT
+12
POWER TIMER
-12
SUPPLY
VDC
+24 F+
CHOPPER
DIGITAL
(PWM)
SIGNAL F-

P0003-19.vsd PROCESSOR
03-09-01

POWER
INPUT

Figure 3-1. Simplified Block Diagram

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Functional Description 3-1

Contact Input Circuits
Eleven contact input circuits, powered by isolated 12 Vdc, provide operational input control for the DECS-
200. If the start and stop inputs should become active at the same time, the stop input has priority. If the
AVR and FCR inputs should become active at the same time, the FCR input has priority. Each of the
eleven inputs, their functions, and types of input required are defined in the following paragraphs.
Start
This input accepts a momentary contact closure and enables the DECS-200. Once the DECS-200 is
enabled, this input has no effect.
Stop
This input accepts a momentary contact closure and disables the DECS-200. Once the DECS-200 is
disabled, this input has no effect. The Stop input also takes precedence over the Start input.
AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulation)
This input accepts a momentary contact closure that places the DECS-200 in AVR mode. Once the
DECS-200 is in AVR mode, this input has no effect.
FCR (Field Current Regulation)
This input accepts a momentary contact closure that places the DECS-200 in FCR mode. Once the unit is
in FCR mode, this input has no effect. The FCR input takes precedence over the AVR input.
Raise
This input increases the active operating setpoint. This function is active as long as the contact is closed.
The raise increment is a function of the setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate.
The increments are directly proportional to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the
traverse rate. This input has no effect when the active pre-position mode is Maintain.
Lower
This input decreases the active operating setpoint. This function is active as long as the contact is closed.
The lower increment is a function of the setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate.
The increments are directly proportional to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the
traverse rate. This input has no effect when the active pre-position mode is Maintain.
PRE-P (Pre-Position)
This input accepts a continuous contact closure that causes all setpoints to be changed to the pre-
position (predefined) value. If the active pre-position mode is Maintain, then the pre-position input will
override the raise and lower inputs to maintain the setpoint at the pre-position value while the contact is
closed. If the active pre-position mode is Release, then the pre-position input will change the setpoint to
the pre-position value and respond to raise and lower inputs.
If the non-active pre-position mode is Maintain and internal tracking is enabled, the non-active mode will
maintain the non-active setpoint at the pre-position value and override the tracking function. If the non-
active pre-position is Release and internal tracking is enabled, then the pre-position input will change the
setpoint to the pre-position value and respond to the tracking function.
Typically, this input is connected to a 52b auxiliary contact on the generator breaker. When the generator
breaker opens, all setpoints are forced to the pre-position settings. This is especially helpful if FCR mode
is active and the generator is under a load. Utilizing a 52b contact will force the FCR setpoint to its pre-
position setting which could be preset to the generator’s no-load, nominal voltage.
52L/M (Unit/Parallel)
This input informs the DECS-200 that the system is operating in single-unit operation or paralleled to
another generator or power grid in droop mode. It also switches between which overexcitation limiter (off-
line limiter or on-line limiter) is activated when excitation levels exceed the OEL settings. This input is
typically connected to a 52b auxiliary contact of the generator breaker and requires a continuous contact
closure to switch modes. Refer to the 52J/K (Var/PF Enable) paragraph for more information.
If both the 52L/M and 52J/K contact inputs are closed, AVR mode is active while the off-line
overexcitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for
stand-alone (single unit) generator operation. SCL and UEL are disabled when both 52L/M and 52J/K
contact inputs are closed.

3-2 DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev G

If the 52L/M contact input is open and 52J/K contact input is closed, droop mode is active while the on-
line overexcitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for
two or more generators paralleled together on an isolated bus (islanded) or paralleled directly to the utility
grid. Cross-current compensation (CCC) can also be utilized in this contact configuration. However, this
mode (CCC) is not intended for paralleling to the utility grid.
If both 52L/M is open and 52J/K are open, var/power factor mode is active while the on-line overexcitation
limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for applications
requiring var or power factor regulation when paralleled to the utility grid.
Table 3-1 describes 52 L/M and 52 J/K contact functionality for default OEL option 1. OEL options 2 and 3
are discussed in Overexcitation Limiter, On-Line/Off-Line OEL Options.
Table 3-1. 52L/M and 52J/K Truth Table (Option 1, Default Settings)
DECS-200 Operating Mode 52L/M 52J/K Generator Operating Mode
AVR mode active, off-line OEL Closed Closed Single unit/stand-alone
enabled, no droop, no var/PF, SCL
and UEL disabled
Droop mode active, on-line OEL Open Closed Paralleled to the utility grid (droop) or
enabled, no var/PF two or more generators islanded
(droop or cross-current comp.)
Var/PF mode active, on-line OEL Open Open Paralleled to utility grid
enabled

52J/K (Var/Power Factor Enable)

This input accepts a continuous contact closure that disables var/power factor operation. An open contact
enables the DECS-200 to control the generator reactive power in either the var or power factor modes.
These functions must be enabled via HMI, BESTCOMS, or Modbus™ before use. For more information,
refer to the 52L/M (Unit/Parallel) paragraphs. If neither var nor power factor mode is desired, it is
recommended that a jumper wire be placed across the 52J/K and common terminals, and switch the
52L/M input with the generator breaker auxiliary contact (52b).
SECEN (Secondary Enable)
This input accepts a continuous contact closure and enables the DECS-200 unit as the secondary unit to
another excitation control system.
ALRST (Alarm Reset)
This input accepts a momentary contact closure to clear all latched relay annunciations and front panel
alarm messages.

Analog Inputs
The following analog inputs are used to sense the following quantities:
• Generator voltage (three-phase/single-phase)
• Bus voltage (single-phase)
• Phase B (line) current
• Cross current loop input
• Accessory input (remote setpoint control)
• Field voltage (internal)
• Field current (internal)
Generator Voltage Sensing Ranges
The ac voltage sensing range of the DECS-200 is split into four operating ranges: 120 volts nominal, 240
volts nominal, 480 volts nominal, and 600 volts nominal. The range selection is the same for generator
and bus voltages and is based on the secondary VT voltage for the generator voltage sensing. The 120-
volt range is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 85 and 153 Vac. The 240 volts
range is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 170 and 300 Vac. The 480-volt range
is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 340 and 528 Vac. The 600-volt range is
selected if the generator VT voltage is between 540 and 690 Vac.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Functional Description 3-3

Generator Voltage (VCA)
The GEN VCA input senses the generator voltage across phases A and C and is used to estimate the
generator rms voltage and frequency. This input is not internally isolated.
Generator Voltage (VAB)
The GEN VAB input senses the generator voltage across phases A and B and is used to estimate the
generator rms voltage and frequency. This input is not internally isolated.
Generator Voltage (VBC)
The GEN VBC input senses the generator voltage across phases B and C and is used to estimate the
generator rms voltage and frequency. This input is not internally isolated.
Bus Voltage (BUS VCA)
The BUS VCA input senses the bus voltage across phases A and C. This voltage is used to estimate the
bus rms voltage and frequency. The BUS VCA input is not internally isolated.
Phase B Line Current
This internally isolated input is developed from a current transformer (CT) and used to calculate the B-
phase generator line current.
Cross-Current Loop Input
This input is developed from a current transformer (CT) connected to phase B of a generator and used
when generators are operating in cross-current compensation mode.
Accessory Input (Remote Setpoint Control)
This internally isolated input may be either an analog voltage (–10 to +10 Vdc) or current (4 to 20
milliamperes). Separate terminals provide convenient terminations but only one input may be used in any
application. This input is typically supplied by a power system stabilizer or similar device.
The accessory voltage input signal changes the setpoint of the selected operating mode. This input may
be in the range of –10 to +10 Vdc or 4 to 20 milliamperes. The input signal is named a voltage signal
even though one input mode may be 4 to 20 milliamperes. When the current input mode is selected, the
input current (4 to 20 milliamperes) is converted by the DECS-200 to –5 to +5 Vdc voltage signal. The
following equation is used when converting current signals to voltage signals.

V AUX = 0.625(I − 12 )
Where: VAUX is the voltage signal
I is the current in milliamperes
The accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the accessory gain setting. The gain setting is in the
range of –99 to +99. If the gain is set to zero, the accessory voltage input signal is made inactive. The
accessory voltage input can be active in all four operating modes.
In AVR mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the voltage gain setting which defines
the setpoint change as a percentage of the rated generator voltage.
In FCR mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the current gain setting which defines
the setpoint change as a percentage of the rated field current.
In var mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the var gain setting which defines the
setpoint change as a percentage of the rated apparent power of the generator.
In power factor mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the power factor gain setting and
divided by 100, which defines the power factor setpoint change.
Field Current and Field Voltage
These signals are sensed internally. The field voltage signal is used for field overvoltage protection. The
field current signal is used for: off-line and on-line overexcitation limiting, auto-tracking, and field over-
current protection.

Operating Power
The DECS-200 operating power input accepts three-phase or single-phase voltage over the range of 50
to 277 Vac (depending on the nominal field voltage) at 50 to 500 hertz. The input is rectified and filtered
by the input’s low-pass filter, which feeds the chopper stage. Depending on the operating power applied,
three nominal output voltages are possible: 32, 63, or 125 Vdc.
3-4 DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev G
Control Power
Control power may be either of two types: nominal 24/48 Vdc or nominal 120 Vac/125 Vdc. For the 120
Vac/125 Vdc control power type, both ac and dc input power voltage might be applied for redundant
power supply operation. Refer to Section 1, General Information, Specifications, for voltage ranges. The
power supply provides +5 Vdc, ±12 Vdc, and +24 Vdc for the DECS-200 internal circuitry. When dual
power sources are used, an isolation transformer is required for the ac input.

Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)

All analog input signals are brought to the input of the 12-bit ADC. Each input signal is sampled at a rate
that is controlled by the digital signal processor (DSP).

Microprocessor
The microprocessor is the heart of the DECS-200 and performs control, computation, self-testing, and
communication functions. The main processor (labeled microprocessor in Figure 3-1) generally performs
low speed tasks such as protective functions, frequency measurements, communication, watchdog alarm,
and other system functions. The microprocessor generates the PWM (pulse width modulated) control
signal needed for chopper control and monitors its status.

Digital Signal Processor (DSP)

The DSP supports measurement, control (output and converters), metering functions, and filtering. It
controls both the ADC and the digital-to-analog converter (DAC). All eight analog input signals from the
ADC are filtered by the finite impulse response (FIR) filters. AC signals are also filtered by the infinite
impulse response (IIR) filters and dc signals (field voltage and current) are filtered by averaging filters.
The DSP provides the microprocessor with the signal defining the chopper duty cycle/PWM control.

Operational Settings
Operational settings that affect the system are stored in nonvolatile memory. These settings may be
changed through BESTCOMS or the front panel interface. Password access is required to change
settings. Settings may be viewed without obtaining password access.

Watchdog Timer
If the microprocessor fails for any reason, output pulses to the watchdog timer stop and, after a brief
interval, the watchdog timer takes the system off line and closes the watchdog output contacts.

Real-Time Clock
The real-time clock is used by the event and data logging functions to timestamp events. Time can be
displayed in either 12- or 24-hour formats and can be selected to allow for daylight saving time. Two date
formats are available: d-m-y or m/d/y. All formats may be selected either through the front panel HMI or
BESTCOMS. Any cycling of power to the DECS-200 will reset the clock.

Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) Output

The pulse-width modulated signal provided by the microprocessor controls the field voltage by modulating
the duty cycle of the chopper (power module).

Relay Output Circuits

There are five output relays. These relay outputs are controlled by the microprocessor and sustain seven
amperes at 240 Vac. Each output relay has 300-volt surge protectors across the contacts to protect
against arcing from inductive loads. Relay outputs one through three are fully programmable via all
interfaces. Two output relays (one form A and one form B) have predetermined functions. All output
relays are described in the following paragraphs.
Programmable Outputs
Output relays RLY1, RLY2, and RLY3 may be programmed using the front panel HMI, BESTCOMS
software (using the front RS-232 port (COM0)) or through the Modbus™ protocol (using the left RS-485
port (COM2)).
The three output relays labeled RLY1, RLY2, and RLY3 have the following programmable features.
• Selection of contact functionality (normally open or normally closed)
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Functional Description 3-5
• Selection of output type (momentary, maintained for as long as the condition is present, or latched
until reset)
• Program duration of momentary annunciation (from 0.1 to 5 seconds in 50 millisecond steps)
• Selection of conditions to be annunciated, including:
o Field overvoltage
o Field overcurrent
o Generator undervoltage
o Generator overvoltage
o Volts per hertz or underfrequency limit
o Overexcitation limit
o Underexcitation limit
o FCR mode
o Loss of sensing (LOS) voltage
o Active setpoint at low limit
o Active setpoint at high limit
o Generator frequency below 10 hertz
o Open exciter diode
o Shorted exciter diode
o Loss of field
o Stator current limit

NOTE
If the contacts of a programmable output relay are configured as normally closed,
the normally closed contact state is maintained only while the DECS-200 has
control power applied. When power is removed from the DECS-200, these
contacts will open.

Watchdog Output
The Watchdog (WTCHD) output indicates a software execution problem within the DECS-200. The
contact closes under the following circumstances:
• No control power is applied to the DECS-200
• After application of power for approximately eight seconds
• Software in the DECS-200 stops executing normally
On/Off Output
The On/Off (ON/OF) output indicates the enabled/disabled status of the DECS-200. The On/Off output
closes when the DECS-200 is enabled and opens when the DECS-200 is disabled.

Communication
The RS-232 port (Com 0), located on the front panel, is dedicated for communication with a PC running
BESTCOMS software.
The RS-232 port (Com 1), located on the right side of the unit, is dedicated for communication with a
second DECS-200. This port provides tracking between units in a redundant DECS-200 system.
The RS-485 Port (Com 2), located on the left side of the unit, is dedicated for communication in remote
terminal unit (RTU) mode using the Modbus™ protocol.

NOTE
Changing the baud rate or data format while that interface is in use will result in a
loss of data and probably a complete loss of communication.

All three ports have a default baud rate of 9600. However, the baud rate for each port can be set
independently. Available baud rates are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. Ports Com ) and Com 1 use
a data format of 8N1 which stands for 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit. Port Com 2 has a default data
format of 8N2 but the parity and number of stop bits are programmable. The choices for parity include
none, Odd, and Even. The number of stop bits may be either 1 or 2.

3-6 DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev G

Memory Circuits
There are three types of memory circuits: flash memory, random access memory (RAM) and electrically
erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM). Flash memory is nonvolatile and stores the
operating software. RAM is volatile and serves as temporary storage for data. EEPROM is nonvolatile
and stores the settings and configuration.

Protection Functions
Eight protection functions are available in the DECS-200:
• Field overvoltage • Loss of sensing
• Field overcurrent • Generator frequency below 10 hertz
• Generator undervoltage • Loss of field
• Generator overvoltage • Exciter diode monitor
Each protection function can be indicated locally on the front panel display, remotely through
communication port Com 0 or Com 2, and any of the three programmable output relays.
Field Overvoltage
When the field voltage increases above the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting for the duration of the
Field Overvoltage Delay setting, a field overvoltage condition is annunciated. A field overvoltage condition
is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay
for external annunciation. The Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting is adjustable from 1 to 325 Vdc in 1
Vdc increments. The Exciter Field Overvoltage Delay setting is adjustable from 0.2 to 30.0 seconds in 0.1
second increments. If the field overvoltage timer is timing down and the field voltage drops below the
Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting, the field overvoltage timer is reset. The field overvoltage function
may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.
Field Overcurrent
When the field current increases above the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting for the duration of the
Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting, a field overcurrent condition is annunciated. Field overcurrent is
annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for
external annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Level and Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay settings
are related by an inverse function. This means that the higher the field current goes above the threshold,
the shorter the time to an annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting is a linear multiplier
for the time to an annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting is adjustable from 0.1 to 20
Adc in 0.1 Adc increments. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting is adjustable from 0.1 to 20.0 in
increments of 0.1. The field overcurrent protection function may be disabled without changing the level or
time delay settings. Figure 3-2 shows a set of typical field overcurrent timing curves. Notice that field
current levels below 103% of the field overcurrent setpoint value are unpredictable and may not cause an
annunciation. Also, field current levels greater than 250% (field current multiple of 2.5 in Figure 3-2) of the
setpoint value cause an annunciation in the same amount of time as the 250% level.

Figure 3-2. Field Overcurrent Timing Curves

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Functional Description 3-7

Generator Overvoltage
When the generator voltage increases above the Generator Overvoltage Level setting for the duration of
the Generator Overvoltage Delay setting, a generator overvoltage condition is annunciated. A generator
overvoltage condition is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a
programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Generator Overvoltage Level setting is
adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1 Vac increments. The Generator Overvoltage Delay setting is
adjustable from 0.1 to 60.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments. If the generator voltage drops below the
Generator Overvoltage Level setting while the delay timer is timing down, the delay timer is reset.
Generator overvoltage protection may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.
Generator Undervoltage
When the generator voltage decreases above the Generator Undervoltage Level setting for the duration
of the Generator Undervoltage Delay setting, a generator undervoltage condition is annunciated. A
generator undervoltage condition is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned
to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Generator Undervoltage Level setting is
adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1 Vac increments. The Generator Undervoltage Delay setting is
adjustable from 0.5 to 60.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments. If the generator voltage increases above
the Generator Undervoltage Level setting while the delay timer is timing down, the delay timer is reset.
Generator undervoltage protection may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.
Loss of Sensing
A loss of sensing voltage is annunciated when either of two conditions exist:
• All three phases of generator voltage decrease below the Loss of Sensing Voltage–Balanced Level
setting for the duration of the Loss of Sensing Voltage Time Delay setting.
• Any individual phase of generator sensing voltage differs by more than the Loss of Sensing Voltage–
Unbalanced Level setting for the duration of the Loss of Sensing Voltage Time Delay setting.
A loss of sensing voltage is annunciated on the front panel Metering screen and may be assigned to a
programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Balanced and Unbalanced Level settings are
adjustable from 0 to 100% in 0.1% increments. The Time Delay setting is adjustable from 0 to 30.0
seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Below 10 Hertz
When the generator frequency decreases below 10 hertz, the condition is annunciated on the front panel
display as SYSTEM BELOW 10 Hz. The programmable output relays may be configured to initiate
additional annunciations or actions. A system below 10-hertz annunciation is reset automatically when the
generator frequency increases above 10 hertz.
Loss of Field
When the reactive power absorbed by the generator exceeds the Loss of Field Level setting for the
duration of the Loss of Field Delay setting, a loss of field condition is annunciated. A loss of field is
annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for
external annunciation. The Loss of Field Level setting is adjustable from 0 to 3,000 Mvar in 1 kvar
increments. The Loss of Field Delay setting is adjustable from 0 to 9.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
If the absorbed reactive power decreases below the Loss of Field Level setting while the delay timer is
timing down, the delay timer is reset. Loss of field protection can be disabled without changing the level or
time delay settings.
Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM)
The DECS-200 monitors the output of the brushless exciter power semiconductors through the exciter
field current and protects against both open and shorted diodes in the exciter bridge. When implementing
the EDM, it is imperative that the user know and specify the number of poles for the exciter armature and
the number of poles for the generator rotor.

NOTE
If the number of poles for the exciter armature and the generator rotor is
unknown, the EDM function will still operate. However, only a shorted diode can
be detected. If the number of poles is not known, it is best to select all
parameters for the exciter open diode to off. In this situation, the generator and
exciter pole parameters must be set at zero to prevent false tripping.

3-8 DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev G

The EDM function estimates the fundamental harmonic of the exciter field current using discrete Fourier
transforms (DFTs). The harmonic, expressed as a percentage of the field current, is then compared to the
trip levels for open diode detection (OD ripple) and shorted diode detection (SD ripple). If the percentage
of field current exceeds the OD Level or SD Level setting, then the appropriate delay will begin. After the
programmable delay for the OD or SD event expires, and if the percentage of field current still exceeds
the OD Level or SD Level setting, the event is annunciated. An exciter diode failure is annunciated on the
front panel HMI and can be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. EDM
inhibit parameters prevent nuisance annunciations due to low excitation current or out-of-range generator
frequency. The following parameters are required for complete operation of the EDM function.
• Pole ratio • Open exciter diode delay
• Trip level of EDM OD ripple • Shorted exciter diode delay
• Trip level of EDM SD ripple • EDM inhibit level
Exciter Diode Monitor Settings
It is especially difficult to detect open diode conditions when the number of generator and exciter poles is
unknown. For this reason, the ratio of the number of poles for the brushless exciter armature to the
generator rotor is entered to ensure proper operation for both open and shorted diode protection.
Setting the Trip Level
To set the trip level of the EDM OD (open diode) ripple and EDM SD (shorted diode) ripple parameters,
the maximum ripple current on the field must be known. This can be accomplished by running the
generator unloaded and at rated speed. Vary the generator voltage from minimum to maximum voltage
while monitoring the EDM OD and EDM SD % ripple on the DECS-200 HMI metering screen. Record the
highest value for each. See Section 2, Human-Machine Interface for more details on displaying metering
quantities.
With Number of Generator Poles Known
Multiply the highest EDM OD value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level , by 3. The result is the Exciter
Open Diode % Ripple Level (EDM OD % Ripple). The multiplier can be varied between 2 and 5 to
increase or decrease the trip margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance EDM OD
indications. A time delay is also adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds.
Multiply the highest EDM SD value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level by 50. The result is the Exciter
Shorted Diode % Ripple Level (EDM SD % Ripple). The multiplier can be varied between 40 and 70 to
increase or decrease the trip margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance EDM SD
indications. A time delay is also adjustable from 5 to 30 seconds.
The DECS-200 has fixed EDM inhibit levels to prevent nuisance EDM indications while the generator
sensing voltage is less than 45 Hz, greater than 70 Hz, or when the field current is less than 1 Adc.
Although the user can adjust the field current inhibit level from 0 to 100%, the fixed EDM inhibit levels
take priority. Pole ratios must be in the range of 1 to 10 with 0 used if the ratio is unknown.
With Number of Generator Poles Unknown
The DECS-200 can detect shorted diode conditions when the number of generator poles is not known. To
provide this protection, disable EDM OD protection and set the pole ratio to zero. Enable EDM SD
protection. Multiply the maximum EDM SD % ripple value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level, by 30.
The multiplier can be varied between 20 and 40 to increase or decrease the trip margin. Reducing the
multiplier could result in nuisance EDM SD indication.
Test the EDM Settings
Start the generator from a dead stop condition and increase its speed and voltage to the rated value.
Load the machine to its rating and confirm no EDM alarm indications occur. All of the EDM setup
guidelines presented here assume the exciter diodes were not opened or shorted at the time of setup and
testing.

SOFT START
DECS-200 soft start capability provides for an orderly buildup of terminal voltage from residual to the
voltage setpoint in the desired time with minimal overshoot. When the system is in startup, the voltage
reference is adjusted by the amount calculated based on two parameters. These parameters are level
and time. Soft start bias level is adjustable from 0 to 90 percent of the active mode setpoint in increments
of 1 percent with a default setting of 5 percent. Soft start time is adjustable from 1 to 7,200 seconds in
increments of 1 second with a default setting of 5 seconds. Figure 3-3 illustrates a plot of the voltage
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Functional Description 3-9
reference showing soft-start bias at 30%, soft-start time at 8 seconds and a voltage setpoint of 100%. Soft
start level is the same parameter as soft-start bias when accessed on the Startup tab of the BESTCOMS
System Settings screen.

Figure 3-3. Soft Start Voltage Reference

LIMITER FUNCTIONS
DECS-200 limiter functions include an underfrequency limiter, V/Hz ratio limiter, overexcitation limiter,
underexcitation limiter, and a stator current limiter.

Underfrequency Limiter
When the generator frequency drops below the Corner Frequency
corner frequency for the underfrequency slope
(Figure 3-4), the voltage setpoint is automatically 100 %
adjusted by the DECS-200 so that generator P0004-34.vsd
voltage will follow the underfrequency slope and 12-03-01

an underfrequency annunciation occurs. The

GENERATOR VOLTS

underfrequency slope can be tuned to have zero

to three times the volts/hertz slope in 0.01
increments. The corner frequency can be set
across a range of 45 to 65 hertz in 0.1 hertz
increments. This adjustability enables the DECS-
200 to precisely match the operating
characteristics of the prime mover and the loads
being applied to the generator. The generator
underfrequency function may be effectively
disabled by setting the slope to zero. However, if
the system frequency is below the corner 0%
frequency, underfrequency will be annunciated 10 Hz Nominal
even if the slope is set at zero. GENERATOR FREQUENCY
Figure 3-4. Typical Underfrequency
Compensation Curve

3-10 DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev G

When the underfrequency function is active, an
underfrequency annunciation occurs. Underfre-
110 %
quency is annunciated on the front panel Metering
screen and may be assigned to a programmable
output relay for external annunciation. 100 %
P0004-33.vsd
12-03-01

GENERATOR VOLTS
Volts per Hertz Ratio Limiter
The volts per hertz ratio limiter prevents the

tio
regulation setpoint from exceeding the volts per

Ra
hertz ratio that is prescribed by the slope setting

tz
er
of the DECS-200 as stated in the previous

/H
lts
paragraphs. This feature is also useful for other

Vo
potentially damaging system conditions such as a
change in system voltage and reduced frequency
situations that could exceed the systems volts per
hertz ratio limit. Figure 3-5 illustrates a typical 1.10 0%
PU volts per hertz limiter curve. 0 Hz Nominal
GENERATOR FREQUENCY
Overexcitation Limiter (OEL)
Figure 3-5. Typical 1.10 PU V/Hz Limiter Curve
Overexcitation limiting operates in all modes
except FCR mode. The DECS-200 senses the
field current output and limits the field current to

FIELD CURRENT
prevent field overheating. In FCR mode, the
DECS-200 announces that all conditions for OEL High
are fulfilled. The DECS-200 provides two types of Current
overexcitation limiting: Summing Point and High
CONTINUOUS
Low Level
Current Current 0-30Adc
Takeover. Time Level
0-10sec 0-15Adc
Summing Point OEL
D2851-18.vsd
Two OEL current levels are defined for off-line 04-03-01
TIME IN SECONDS
operation: high and low (see Figure 3-6). The
generator can operate continuously at the low Figure 3-6. Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting
OEL current level and for a programmed time at
the high OEL current level.
Three OEL current levels are defined for on-line operation: high, medium, and low (see Figure 3-7). The
high and medium current levels can be maintained only for a user-defined amount of time. The generator
can operate continuously at the low OEL current level.
FIELD CURRENT

High
Current
Medium Level
High Current 0.0 - 30Adc
Medium Level
Current Current Low
Time CONTINUOUS 0.0 - 20 Adc
Time Current
0-10sec 0-120sec Level
0.0 - 15 Adc

D2851-17.vsd
TIME IN SECONDS 04-03-01

Figure 3-7. On-Line Overexcitation Limiting

The 52L/M (unit/parallel) contact input status determines which limiter is active (on-line or off-line). When
the 52L/M input is closed, the off-line limiter is active. When the 52L/M input is open, the on-Line limiter
setting is active.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Functional Description 3-11

In addition to the three current levels, the DECS-200 also uses embedded timers to prevent excessive
heating of the exciter field that may be a result of repetitive overexcitation conditions. A duration timer
monitors the accumulated time actually spent in an overexcitation condition and a reset timer is used to
count backward from either the High OEL Current Time setting or the sum of the high plus the Medium
OEL Current Time setting depending on the duration timer value. The reset timer countdown begins when
the excitation current falls below the low OEL current limit level. In the event a subsequent overexcitation
condition occurs before the reset timer reaches zero, the OEL limiter will resume from its state prior to the
excitation current falling below the low OEL current limit level. A full OEL cycle cannot occur until the reset
timer has counted down to zero after a previous OEL condition.
When the system is limiting overexcitation, an OEL condition is annunciated on the front panel Metering
screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation.
Takeover OEL
When takeover-style overexcitation limiting is used, the level of field current at which limiting occurs is
determined by an inverse time characteristic. This inverse time characteristic is similar to that shown in
Figure 3-8. Two current levels and a time dial setting are defined for the takeover OEL. Separate curves
may be selected for on-line operation. If the system enters an overexcitation condition, the field current is
limited and forced to follow the selected curve.

Figure 3-8. Inverse Time Characteristic for Takeover-Style OEL

On-Line/Off-Line OEL Options

Selection of on-line or off-line OEL levels/curves is determined by an OEL option selection. The following
options are available.
Option 1 (default). When option 1 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiter settings are active when either
the 52J/K contact input or 52L/M contact input are open. Off-line OEL settings are active when both the
52J/K contact input and 52L/M contact input are closed. The 52J/K contact input can be used to switch
between on-line OEL and off-line OEL when the 52L/M contact input is jumpered. If var/power factor
correction is disabled, Droop mode will be active when the 52J/K contact input is opened and AVR mode
will be active when the 52J/K contact input is closed.
Option 2. Option 2 allows the 52J/K contact input to define when the off-line and on-line limiters are
active. When option 2 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiter settings are active when the 52J/K contact
input is open. Off-line OEL settings are active when the 52J/K contact input is closed. Option 2 is
intended for cross-compound generator applications where both machines are paralleled at low rpm.
Therefore, Droop mode needs to be active (52L/M contact input opened) as the speed of the machines
are increased. However, off-line OEL settings for both machines need to be active.
Option 3. When option 3 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiting settings are active at all times. Option
3 allows the DECS-200 to operate in AVR mode (stand-alone application) without restriction from the off-
line OEL settings. In this case, the on-line OEL settings are active to limit excessive excitation current.
This option also eliminates the need for the DECS-200 to operate in Droop mode when applied in a single
unit application. Therefore, voltage should not droop as reactive load increases.

3-12 DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev G

Underexcitation Limiter
Underexcitation limiting (UEL) operates in all modes except FCR mode. UEL senses the leading var
output of the generator and limits any further decrease in excitation to prevent loss of synchronization and
end-iron heating during parallel operation. In FCR mode, the DECS-200 announces that all conditions for
UEL are fulfilled. The reactive power level is selected at zero active power and the UEL limiting curve is
calculated based on this value and the generator voltage and current rating. Typical leading kvar curves
and a user-selected, five-point curve are shown in 3-9.
Real Power Generate (W) x 1000
0.0 7.5k 15.0k 22.5k 30.0k 37.5k 45.0k
0.0
Reactive Power Absorb (var) x 1000
7.5k

15.0k

22.5k

30.0k

37.5k
D2851-25
06-28-05

45.0k
Figure 3-9. Custom Five-Point Curve
When the system is limiting underexcitation, a UEL annunciation occurs. Underexcitation is annunciated
on the front panel Metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external
annunciation.

Stator Current Limiting

The stator current limiter (SCL) senses the level of stator current and limits it to prevent stator
overheating. The SCL operates in all modes except FCR. In FCR mode, the DECS-200 only announces
that a stator overcurrent condition exists; it does not provide current limiting.
Two SCL current levels are provided: high and low (see Figure 3-10). The generator can operate
continuously at the low SCL level and for a programmed time at the high SCL level.
The SCL will not respond until the SCL Initial Delay setting has expired.
STATOR CURRENT

High
Current
High Low Level
Continuous Current 0-66,000 Aac
Current
Time Level
0-60 s 0-66,000 Aac

P0013-19
TIME IN SECONDS 11-10-04

Figure 3-10. Stator Current Limiting

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Functional Description 3-13

DROOP AND LINE-DROP COMPENSATION
Droop and line-drop compensation are accomplished through the load compensation equation:

VC1 = VT + (RC + jX C )I T

Where: VC1 is the compensated output voltage

VT is the measured terminal-voltage vector
(Rc + jX C ) are the compensation impedance values
I T is the measured terminal-current vector
When the droop percentage is a positive quantity, reactive droop compensation is performed. Droop is
the product of the output voltage and the kvar that the generator is exporting. This is equivalent to the
above compensation equation with RC equal to zero and neglecting the real part of the vector, I T .
When the droop percentage is a negative quantity, line-drop compensation (LDC) is preformed. LDC
takes into account the real part of the vector, I T . Since LDC is typically used to compensate for reactive
impedance losses in transformers, RC is assumed zero. For LDC, the above equation becomes:
VC1 = VT + ( jX C )I T

DATA LOGGING AND REPORTING

DECS-200 data logging and reporting features include a sequence of events recorder that records up to
eight oscillography records.

Sequence of Events Reporting

A sequence of events recorder monitors the internal and external status of the DECS-200. Events are
scanned at 50 millisecond intervals with 127 events stored per record. All changes of state that occur
during each scan are time tagged. Sequence of events reports are available through BESTCOMS. All
monitored events are listed below.
System Contact Input State Changes
• Alarm reset • Start
• AVR mode enable • Stop
• FCR mode enable • Unit/Parallel (52 L/M)∗
• Pre-Position • VAR/PF enable (52 J/K)∗
• Secondary enable
∗ The 52 contacts are reported as disabled when the input is jumpered to common and reported as
enabled when the input is not jumpered. All other contacts are reported as enabled when the inputs
are jumpered to common.
System Output State Changes
• On/Off relay output • Relay 3 output
• Relay 1 output • Watchdog relay output
• Relay 2 output
System Alarm State Changes
• Exciter diode open • Loss of field
• Exciter diode shorted • Lost voltage sensing
• Field overcurrent • Overexcitation limit
• Field overvoltage • Stator current limit
• Generator overvoltage • Underexcitation limit
• Generator undervoltage • Underfrequency
Changes in State of System Status
• Auto tracking mode • Soft-start mode
• Control mode • Stop/Start
• Limiter mode • Underfrequency mode
• Load compensation mode • Voltage matching mode
• Operating mode
3-14 DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev G
Oscillography
The data recording function of the DECS-200 can record up to eight oscillography records. Oscillography
records recorded by the DECS-200 use the IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data
Exchange (COMTRADE). Each record is time and date stamped. After eight records have been recorded,
the DECS-200 begins recording the next record over the oldest record. Because all oscillography records
are stored in volatile memory, the records will be lost if power is lost.
A record consists of six user selectable variables with 600 data points recorded for each variable. The
sample rate or time between data point samples is user selectable from 4 milliseconds to 10 seconds.
Therefore, the recording duration for a variable can range from 2.4 seconds to 6,000 seconds.
Data points may be selected for pre-trigger operation in order to capture events prior to a fault. Up to 599
pre-trigger data points may be selected. Data points that are not designated for pre-trigger recording are
assigned to the post-trigger portion of the fault record. This feature combined with the adjustable sample
rate allows for flexible data sampling around the fault.
The DECS-200 monitors six user-selectable internal variables. The following internal variables may be
selected:
Internal Variables
• Auto tracking output (for future use)
• Auxiliary input voltage∗
• AVR Error Signal
• Bus frequency
• Bus voltage
• Control output
• Crosscurrent input∗
• Exciter field current Ifd
• Exciter field voltage Vfd
• Generator average L-L voltage
• Generator frequency
• Generator Ib in amps
• Generator kVA
• Generator kvar
• Generator kW
• Generator power factor
• Generator Vab
• Generator Vbc
• Generator Vca
• Generator V-I phase angle∗
• Internal PID Integrator State
∗ Typically, these are used when commissioning or troubleshooting.
Data recording may be triggered manually using BESTCOMS, logic triggers, or level triggers.
Logic triggers allow data recording to occur because of an internal or external status change of the
DECS-200.
Level triggering allows the user to select triggering of a data record based on the value of one of the
internal variables. The value can be a minimum or maximum value and can be specified to trigger a
record when the monitored variable crosses a minimum threshold from above or a maximum threshold
from below. A minimum and maximum threshold may also be selected for the monitored variable causing
the monitored value to trigger a record when it goes above its maximum or falls below its minimum.
Figure 3-11 shows an example of a data record as it would look when viewed with BESTwave software.
The example illustrates a voltage step change while monitoring average voltage, field voltage, and field
current over a time of 2.75 seconds.
For more information about selecting triggering types or levels, selecting internal variables for monitoring
or viewing oscillography records, see Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Functional Description 3-15

 Figure 3-11. Data Record Example

3-16 DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 4 • INSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4 • INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................. 4-1
GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1
PRODUCT REGISTRATION ................................................................................................................. 4-1
MOUNTING............................................................................................................................................ 4-1
CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Right-Hand Panel Connections .......................................................................................................... 4-6
Front Panel Connections.................................................................................................................... 4-7
Left-Hand Panel Connections ............................................................................................................ 4-7
Typical Connections ......................................................................................................................... 4-13

Figures
Figure 4-1. Overall Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 4-2
Figure 4-2. Panel Drilling Diagram, Projection Mount ............................................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-3. Escutcheon Plate Dimensions ................................................................................................ 4-4
Figure 4-4. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions, Panel Mount ............................................................. 4-5
Figure 4-5. DECS-200 to DECS-200 Communication Connections ......................................................... 4-6
Figure 4-6. DECS-200 Left-Side Terminals............................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-7. Typical Cross-Current Compensation Connections.............................................................. 4-10
Figure 4-8. RS-485 DB-37 to DECS-200 ................................................................................................ 4-12
Figure 4-9. Typical Connections.............................................................................................................. 4-13

Tables
Table 4-1. Com 1 Pin Functions ................................................................................................................ 4-6
Table 4-2. Left-Hand Panel Terminal Specifications ................................................................................. 4-8
Table 4-3. Control Power Terminals.......................................................................................................... 4-8
Table 4-4. Operating Power Terminals ..................................................................................................... 4-8
Table 4-5. Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing Terminals....................................................................... 4-9
Table 4-6. Generator Current Sensing Terminals ..................................................................................... 4-9
Table 4-7. Accessory Input Terminals ..................................................................................................... 4-10
Table 4-8. Contact Input Terminals ......................................................................................................... 4-10
Table 4-9. Output Contact Terminals ...................................................................................................... 4-11
Table 4-10. Field Output Terminals ......................................................................................................... 4-11
Table 4-11. Com 2 Terminals .................................................................................................................. 4-11

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Installation i

 This page intentionally left blank.

ii DECS-200 Installation 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 4 • INSTALLATION
GENERAL
DECS-200 Digital Excitation Control Systems are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damage.
Upon receipt of a system, check the part number against the requisition and packaging list for agreement.
Inspect for damage, and if there is evidence of such immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the
Basler Electric Regional Sales Office, your sales representative or a sales representative at Basler
Electric, Highland, Illinois.
If the unit is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture- and dust-free
environment.

PRODUCT REGISTRATION
Registering with Basler Electric enables you to receive important information updates on your product
plus new product announcements. Register your product by directing your web browser to
http://www.basler.com/Register.

MOUNTING
The orientation of the DECS-200 heat sink requires vertical mounting for maximum cooling. Any other
mounting angle will reduce the DECS-200’s heat dissipation capability and possibly lead to premature
failure of critical components. The DECS-200 may be mounted anywhere that the ambient temperature
does not exceed the environmental conditions listed in Section 1, General Information, Specifications.
Overall DECS-200 dimensions are shown in Figure 4-1.
Two DECS-200 mounting configurations are possible: projection mounting and panel mounting. The
panel drilling diagram for projection mounting of a DECS-200 is shown in Figure 4-2. Panel mounting of a
DECS-200 is possible with the optional escutcheon plate (part number 9360107100). Escutcheon plate
dimensions are shown in Figure 4-3. The panel cutting and drilling diagram for the escutcheon plate is
illustrated in Figure 4-4.

CAUTION
The hardware provided with the escutcheon plate should be used to attach the
plate to the DECS-200. If other screws are used, ensure that the screw length is
no greater than ¼” (0.25”) and no less than 7/32” (0.219”).

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Installation 4-1

 Figure 4-1. Overall Dimensions

4-2 DECS-200 Installation 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 4-2. Panel Drilling Diagram, Projection Mount

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Installation 4-3

 Figure 4-3. Escutcheon Plate Dimensions

4-4 DECS-200 Installation 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 4-4. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions, Panel Mount
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Installation 4-5
CONNECTIONS
DECS-200 connections are dependent on the application and excitation scheme used. Observe the
following guidelines when making DECS-200 connections:
• A given application may not require the use of all DECS-200 inputs and outputs.
• Incorrect wiring may result in damage to the unit.
• Applying incorrect control power, operating power, or sensing values may damage the unit. Compare
the unit style number with the style chart (Figure 1-2) before applying control power.

NOTE
The DECS-200 must be hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12 AWG
copper wire attached to ground terminal C1. When the DECS-200 is configured
in a system with other devices, a separate lead should be used to connect each
device to the ground bus.

Terminations for DECS-200 connections are located on the right-hand panel, the front panel, and the left-
hand panel.

Right-Hand Panel Connections

Right-hand panel terminations consist of a nine-pin, female, D-type connector (Com 1) that is used for
communication with a second DECS-200 unit when operating in a redundant system. A communication
cable, part number 9310300032, is available for interconnecting two DECS-200 units. Table 4-1 lists the
Com 1 pin numbers and functions. Figure 4-5 illustrates the communication connections between DECS-
200 units.
Table 4-1. Com 1 Pin Functions
Pin Name Description Function
1 Not used N/A
2 XMIT Transmit Sends serial data from DECS-200
3 RCV Receive Receives serial data from DECS-200
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready Receives signal indicating that the
sending unit is operational
5 GND Ground Provides the signal ground
6 DSR Data Set Ready Sends a signal indicating that the
DECS-200N is operational
7, 8, Not used N/A
9

TO DECS-200 TO DECS-200
DB-9 FEMALE DB-9 FEMALE
DB-9 MALE DB-9 MALE
1 NO CONNECTION 1
XMIT 2 2 XMIT
RCV 3 3 RCV
DTR 4 4 DTR
GND 5 5 GND
DSR 6 6 DSR
7 NO CONNECTION 7
8 8 P0007-07
NO CONNECTION 03-13-01
9 NO CONNECTION 9

Figure 4-5. DECS-200 to DECS-200 Communication Connections

4-6 DECS-200 Installation 9360100990 Rev G

Front Panel Connections
Front panel terminations consist of a nine-pin, female, D-type connector (Com 0) that is intended for
short-term, RS-232 serial communication with a PC operating BESTCOMS software. Refer to Section 5,
BESTCOMS Software for information about using BESTCOMS to communicate with the DECS-200.

Left-Hand Panel Connections

Left-hand panel terminations consist of screw compression terminals. These terminals are illustrated in
Figure 4-6. Table 4-2 lists the wire size capacity and maximum screw torque for each terminal on the left-
hand panel.

Figure 4-6. DECS-200 Left-Side Terminals

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Installation 4-7

 Table 4-2. Left-Hand Panel Terminal Specifications
Terminals Wire Size Capacity Maximum Screw Torque
A1 – A45 14 AWG 0.4 N•m (3.5 in-lb)
B7 – B10
B1 – B6 10 AWG 0.5 N•m (4.4 in-lb)
C1 – C6

In the following paragraphs, DECS-200 terminal functions are described and the terminal assignments for
each function are listed.
Control Power
DECS-200 units have two sets of power terminals. One set receives dc control power and the other set
receives ac control power.
A DECS-200 with a style number of XL accepts nominal dc control power of 24 or 48 Vdc. The ac control
power input of a style XL DECS-200 is not used.
A DECS-200 with a style number of XC accepts nominal dc control power of 125 Vdc and nominal ac
control power of 120 Vac. One source (either dc or ac) is sufficient for operation, but two sources can be
used to provide redundancy. The dc input has internal protection against reversed polarity connections.
When dual control power sources are used, an isolation transformer (part number BE31449001) is
required for the ac input. Control power terminal functions are listed in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3. Control Power Terminals
Terminal Description
B7 (BAT+) Positive side of dc input
B8 (BAT–) Negative side of dc input
B9 (L) Line side of ac input
B10 (N) Return or neutral side of ac input
Operating Power
Operating power for the pulse-width modulated (PWM) excitation output is usually derived from the
generator output. This input can also be developed by any suitable source that delivers voltage within the
limits specified in Section 1, General Information, Specifications.
Operating power may be either three-phase or single-phase. For single phase connections, any terminal
combination can be used.
The operating power applied must be of sufficient magnitude to support the required level of excitation
voltage. For 32 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of 56 to 70 Vac (60
Vac nominal). For 63 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of 100 to 139
Vac (120 Vac nominal). For 125 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of
190 to 277 Vac (240 Vac nominal). The operating power frequency can be within the range of 50 to 500
hertz.
Table 4-4. Operating Power Terminals
Terminal Description
C2 (A) A-phase operating power input
C3 (B) B-phase operating power input
C4 (C) C-phase operating power input

Chassis Ground
Terminal C1 (GND) serves as the DECS-200 chassis ground connection.
Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing
The DECS-200 accommodates either three-phase or single-phase generator sensing voltage with four
automatically selected ranges: 120, 240, 400, or 600 Vac for 60 hertz systems or 100, 200, 400, or 500
Vac for 50 hertz systems. When single-phase generator sensing voltage is used, use terminals A1 and
A3 for the sensing connections.

4-8 DECS-200 Installation 9360100990 Rev G

A single bus sensing voltage input connects from phase A to phase C. The bus voltage sensing input has
four automatically selected ranges which are identical to the generator sensing voltage ranges.
Generator and bus voltage sensing terminals are listed in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5. Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing Terminals
Terminal Description
A1 (E1) A-phase generator sensing voltage input
A2 (E2) B-phase generator sensing voltage input
A3 (E3) C-phase generator sensing voltage input
A4 (B1) A-phase bus sensing voltage input
A5 (B3) C-phase bus sensing voltage input

Generator Current Sensing

A single current sensing input connects to a CT monitoring generator current on phase B. Two terminals
are provided to accommodate 1 Aac or 5 Aac CTs.
An input is also provided for sensing the current in a cross-current (reactive differential) compensation
loop. Two or more paralleled generators can operate in cross-current compensation mode. Figure 4-7
illustrates a typical connection diagram for two paralleled generators using the 5 Aac sensing range on
the DECS-200 cross-current input. The 1 Ω resistor is a typical value that can be used to set the burden.
(Ensure that the resistor power rating is adequate for the installation.) Like the generator current sensing
input, the cross-current input has two terminals to accommodate 1 Aac or 5 Aac CTs.
Generator current sensing terminals are listed in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6. Generator Current Sensing Terminals
Terminal Description
B1 B-phase generator current input for 1 Aac sensing
(CTB 1 AMP)
B2 B-phase generator current input for 1 Aac sensing
(CTB 5 AMP)
B3 B-phase generator sensing current common terminal
(CTB COM)
B4 Cross-current input for 1 Aac sensing
(CT CC 1A)
B5 Cross-current input for 5 Aac sensing
(CT CC 5A)
B6 Cross-current common terminal
(CT CC COM)

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Installation 4-9

 CT
Phase B
GEN 1

1.0
CT CC 5A

CT CC COM

DECS-200
CCC LOAD
DECS-200 ENABLE
1.0 CONTACT
CT CC 5A

CT CC COM

P0005-02
05-28-04
GEN 2 Phase B
CT

Figure 4-7. Typical Cross-Current Compensation Connections

Accessory Input
DECS-200 units accept analog accessory signals from other controllers (e.g., power system stabilizers)
for remote control of the setpoint. Two types of accessory inputs are provided: voltage and current. Only
one accessory input (voltage or current) may be used at one time. The voltage input accepts a signal over
the range of –10 Vdc to +10 Vdc. The current input accepts a signal over the range of 4 mAdc to 20
mAdc. Shielded cable is recommended for the accessory signal. Terminal A8 is provided for the shield
connection. Accessory input terminal assignments are listed in Table 4-7.
Table 4-7. Accessory Input Terminals
Terminal Description
A6 (I+) Positive side of current accessory input
A7 (I–) Negative side of current accessory input
A8 (GND) Shield connection for accessory input
A9 (V+) Positive side of voltage accessory input
A10 (V–) Negative side of voltage accessory input

Contact Inputs
The DECS-200 has 11 fixed-function contact inputs. Each contact input supplies an interrogation voltage
of 12 Vdc and accepts dry switch/relay contacts or open-collector PLC outputs. Open-collector devices
connected to the contact inputs must be compatible with the 12 Vdc interrogation voltage, be capable of
conducting a minimum of 5 mAdc, and have off-state leakage current no greater than 100 μAdc. Table 4-
8 lists the contact input terminals.
Table 4-8. Contact Input Terminals
Function Terminal Common Terminal Input Type
Start A21 (START) A22 (COM) Momentary
Stop A23 (STOP) A24 (COM Momentary
AVR Mode Enable A25 (AUTO) A26 (COM) Momentary

4-10 DECS-200 Installation 9360100990 Rev G

 Function Terminal Common Terminal Input Type
FCR Mode Enable A27 (FCR) A28 (COM) Momentary
Raise Command A29 (RAISE) A30 (COM) Momentary
Lower Command A31 (LOWER) A32 (COM) Momentary
Pre-Position A33 (PRE-P) A34 (COM) Continuous
Unit/Parallel A35 (52L/M) A36 (COM) Continuous
Var/PF Enable A37 (52J/K) A38 (COM) Continuous
Secondary Enable A39 (SECEN) A40 (COM) Continuous
Alarm Reset A41 (ALRST) A42 (COM) Momentary

Output Contacts
The DECS-200 has two fixed-function contact outputs and three user-programmable contact outputs. All
output contacts are normally open (NO) except for the Watchdog output which is normally closed (NC).
Output contact terminal assignments are listed in Table 4-9. For additional information about relay output
specifications, refer to Section 1, General Information. For information about configuring the user-
programmable outputs, refer to Section 3, Functional Description.
Table 4-9. Output Contact Terminals
Terminal Description
A11 (ON/OF) On/Off contact terminals
A12 (ON/OF)
A13 (WTCHD) Watchdog contact terminals (normally closed)
A14 (WTCHD)
A15 (RLY1) Programmable relay #1 terminals
A16 (RLY1)
A17 (RLY2) Programmable relay #2 terminals
A18 (RLY2)
A19 (RLY3) Programmable relay #3 terminals
A20 (RLY3)

Field Output
The DECS-200 output is capable of supplying 15 Adc of continuous excitation current to a field with no
less than 2.13 ohms of resistance (at 32 Vdc), 4.2 ohms of resistance (at 63 Vdc), or 8.3 ohms of
resistance (at 125 Vdc). Field output terminals are listed in Table 4-10.
Table 4-10. Field Output Terminals
Terminal Description
C5 (F+) Field output positive terminal
C6 (F–) Field output negative terminal

Com 2 Connections
Communication port Com 2 is intended for Table 4-11. Com 2 Terminals
polled communication over a Modbus network. Terminal Description
Twisted-pair cable is recommended for Com 2
A43 (A) RS-485 send/receive A terminal
connections. Com 2 terminals are listed in Table
4-11. Figure 4-8 illustrates the Com 2 A44 (B) RS-485 send/receive B terminal
connections used for multiple DECS-200 units A45 (C) RS-485 signal ground terminal
communicating over a Modbus network.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Installation 4-11

 T0 RS-422/RS-485 To DECS-200
DB-37 Female Terminal Block
4
6
22 Rt A A43
DECS-200
24 B A44
Com 2
19 C A45

A A43
DECS-200
B A44
Com 2
C A45

4000'
MAX.
P0007-08
11-21-05

Rt A A43
DECS-200
B A44
Com 2
C A45

Rt = Optional terminating resistor (120 O typical)

Figure 4-8. RS-485 DB-37 to DECS-200

4-12 DECS-200 Installation 9360100990 Rev G

Typical Connections
Connections for a typical DECS-200 application are illustrated in Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9. Typical Connections

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Installation 4-13

 This page intentionally left blank.

4-14 DECS-200 Installation 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 5 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE .................................................................................................. 5-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 5-1
INSTALLATION...................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Operating Requirements .................................................................................................................... 5-1
Installing BESTCOMS ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
Connecting the DECS-200 and PC.................................................................................................... 5-1
STARTING BESTCOMS........................................................................................................................ 5-1
Establishing Communication .............................................................................................................. 5-1
Configuring the Communication Ports ............................................................................................... 5-2
Configuring the Real-Time Clock ....................................................................................................... 5-2
Assigning Identification Labels ........................................................................................................... 5-3
Creating a Password .......................................................................................................................... 5-3
CHANGING SETTINGS......................................................................................................................... 5-3
Sending Settings to the DECS-200.................................................................................................... 5-3
Retrieving DECS-200 Settings ........................................................................................................... 5-3
Saving Settings in DECS-200 Memory .............................................................................................. 5-3
SYSTEM SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................. 5-4
System Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Setting Adjustments ........................................................................................................................... 5-8
Control Gain ..................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Analysis ............................................................................................................................................ 5-17
Protection/Relay ............................................................................................................................... 5-21
Data Log ........................................................................................................................................... 5-25
Metering............................................................................................................................................ 5-30
SAVING, PRINTING, AND OPENING FILES...................................................................................... 5-32
Saving Files ...................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Printing Files..................................................................................................................................... 5-33
Opening/Uploading Files .................................................................................................................. 5-33
PID WINDOW ...................................................................................................................................... 5-33
PID Calculations Based On Input Values......................................................................................... 5-34
Adding To PID List ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
Removing A PID List Record............................................................................................................ 5-35
Retrieving Existing Data From PID List............................................................................................ 5-35
TERMINATING COMMUNICATION .................................................................................................... 5-35

Figures
Figure 5-1. Wait Dialog Box
Figure 5-2. Communication Port Settings ................................................................................................. 5-2
Figure 5-3. Password Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 5-2
Figure 5-4. Set Real Time Clock Screen................................................................................................... 5-2
Figure 5-5. Device ID Screen .................................................................................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-6. Change DECS Password Screen ........................................................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-7. System Configuration Screen, System Options Tab .............................................................. 5-4
Figure 5-8. System Configuration Screen, System Data Tab ................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-9. System Configuration Screen, Rated Data Tab...................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5-10. Pole Ratio Calculator ............................................................................................................ 5-7

Tables
Table 5-1. Predefined Stability Setting Groups ....................................................................................... 5-16
Table 5-2. Data Log Report Parameter Triggers..................................................................................... 5-30
Table 5-3. 52J/K and 52L/M Logic........................................................................................................... 5-31

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software i

 This page intentionally left blank.

ii DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 5 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE
INTRODUCTION
BESTCOMS is a Windows®-based application that provides a user-friendly environment for programming
and customizing the DECS-200. In addition to screens for configuring DECS-200 settings, BESTCOMS
has metering screens for viewing machine and system parameters and control screens for remote control
of the excitation system. An integrated PID calculator simplifies the selection of stability settings.

INSTALLATION
BESTCOMS-DECS200 software contains a setup utility that installs the program on your PC. When it
installs the program, an uninstall icon is created that you may use to uninstall (remove) the program from
your PC. The minimum recommended operating requirements are listed in the following paragraph.
Operating Requirements
• IBM compatible PC, 486 DX2 or faster (100 MHz or higher speed microprocessor recommended),
with a minimum 20 megabytes of RAM
• Microsoft Windows® Vista, XP, or 2000
• CD-ROM drive
• One available serial port
Installing BESTCOMS
1. Insert the DECS-200 CD-ROM into the PC CD-ROM drive.
2. When the DECS-200 Setup and Documentation CD Menu appears, click the Install button for
BESTCOMS-DECS200. The BESTCOMS setup utility automatically installs BESTCOMS.
When BESTCOMS is installed, a Basler Electric folder is added to the Windows program menu. This
folder is accessed by clicking the Start button and pointing to Programs. The Basler Electric folder
contains an icon for BESTCOMS-DECS200.

Connecting the DECS-200 and PC

Connect a communication cable between the DECS-200 front panel RS-232 connector (Com 0) and the
appropriate communication port of the PC.

STARTING BESTCOMS
BESTCOMS is started by clicking the Windows Start button, pointing to Programs, the Basler Electric
folder, and then clicking the BESTCOMS-DECS200 icon. At startup, a dialog box with the program title
and version number is displayed briefly. After this dialog box is displayed, the System Configuration
Screen is displayed (Figure 5-7).

Establishing Communication
Communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200 must be established before viewing metering
values or reading or changing settings. BESTCOMS screen settings are updated only after
communication is opened or the communication settings have been changed.
Open the DECS-200 communication port by clicking Communications on the menu bar, hovering the
mouse pointer over Open Comm Port and clicking Front Port - RS-232 (Figure 5-2). When the Comm
Port dialog box appears, select the appropriate PC communication port and click the Initialize button.
BESTCOMS initiates communication by retrieving the configuration settings from the DECS-200.

NOTE
BESTCOMS may display the dialog box of Figure 5-1 when initiating
DECS-200 communication, obtaining DECS-200 configuration settings
or performing other tasks. It's important to wait until the box disappears
before trying to execute communication commands. Issuing commands Figure 5-1. Wait Dialog Box
while the Reading from DECS-200 dialog box is present may disrupt
communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-1

Configuring the Communication Ports
DECS-200 communication settings are changed
through the Communication Port Settings screen.
To access this screen, click Communications on
the menu bar and click Port Configuration.
Communication port settings are illustrated in
Figure 5-2 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Serial Port. To modify the settings of a
communication port, the serial port must first be
selected. Each port has a corresponding setting
selection. Front-panel communication port settings
are adjusted by selecting COM0 RS-232. Right-
hand panel communication port settings are
adjusted by selecting COM1 RS-232. Left-hand
panel communication port settings are adjusted by
selecting COM2 RS-485.
Baud Rate. A baud rate of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
or 19200 may be selected for each serial port.
Parity. This setting can be adjusted only for port
Com 2. A setting of N (no parity) O (odd parity), or
E (even parity) may be selected. Figure 5-2. Communication Port Settings

Data Bits. The number of data bits is not adjustable

and fixed at 8.
Stop Bits. This setting can be adjusted only for port
Com 2. One (1) stop bit or two (2) stop bits may be
selected.
Modbus Settings, Address. This setting is enabled
only for port Com 2. A device address of 1 through
247 may be selected.
Modbus Settings, Response Time Delay. This Figure 5-3. Password Dialog Box
setting is enabled only for port Com 2. A response
time delay of 10 to 200 milliseconds may be
entered in 10 millisecond increments.
Once changes are made to the communication
settings and the OK button is clicked, the Password
dialog box of Figure 5-3 appears and prompts you
to enter a password. Each DECS-200 is delivered
with "decs2" as the default password. See Creating
a Password for information about changing the
password. After the correct password is entered,
the communication setting changes are made
active.

Configuring the Real-Time Clock

DECS-200 timekeeping is set and configured
through the Set Real Time Clock screen (Figure 5-
4). To access the Set Real Time Clock screen, click
Configure on the menu bar and click Real Time
Clock. The DECS-200 date and time are set by
altering the date and time fields or by retrieving the
PC date and time and then sending the values to
the DECS-200. The date format can be selected as
Figure 5-4. Set Real Time Clock Screen
MM/DD/YY or DD-MM-YY. Timekeeping can use
the 12-hour or 24-hour format. Daylight saving time
compensation can be enabled or disabled.

5-2 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

Assigning Identification Labels
Identification labels can be assigned to the DECS-
200 through the Device ID screen (Figure 5-5). The
information entered on the Device ID screen
identifies the DECS-200 unit and associates it with
a location and one or two operators. The Device ID
screen is accessed by clicking Configure on the
menu bar and clicking Device ID Information.
Information entered on the Device ID screen is
used in sequence-of-events reporting and settings
printouts. Each field of the Device ID screen
accepts a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.
Figure 5-5. Device ID Screen
Creating a Password
Password protection guards against unauthorized
changing or viewing of DECS-200 settings. A single
password protects all DECS-200 settings. The
DECS-200 is delivered with a default password of
decs2. The password can be changed only after
communication between BESTCOMS and the
DECS-200 is established. Once the password is
changed, it should be stored in a secure location. If
the user-defined password is lost or forgotten,
BESTCOMS must be reloaded to restore the
default password. A user password is entered on
the Change DECS Password screen. This screen,
illustrated in Figure 5-6, is accessed by clicking
Communications on the menu bar and clicking Figure 5-6. Change DECS Password Screen
Password Change. A password containing up to
six alphanumeric characters may be entered.

CHANGING SETTINGS
A setting is changed by clicking within the setting field and typing the new setting value. When the cursor
is placed within a setting field, the range limits and increments for the setting are displayed on the status
bar. If a value outside the range limits is entered, an Input Error dialog box will appear and display the
acceptable range limits for the setting.

Sending Settings to the DECS-200

Once all desired setting changes have been made on a setting group screen, the settings must be sent to
the DECS-200 before viewing other screens. Otherwise, the setting changes will be lost. Setting changes
can be sent to the DECS-200 by clicking the SendToDECS button or by clicking Communications on
the menu bar and then clicking Send To DECS. A single setting change can be sent to the DECS-200 by
pressing the keyboard Enter key. Functions controlled by option buttons or checkboxes are immediately
sent to the DECS-200 when the option button or checkbox is selected.

Retrieving DECS-200 Settings

Settings are retrieved from the DECS-200 by clicking the GetFromDECS button. This causes the current
DECS-200 settings to be displayed on the BESTCOMS setting screens. DECS-200 settings can also be
retrieved by clicking Communications on the menu bar and clicking Get From DECS.

Saving Settings in DECS-200 Memory

DECS-200 settings are saved in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). In the event of a control power loss,
these are the settings that are active at power-up. When setting changes are made and sent to the
DECS-200, they are automatically saved to EEPROM (if the correct password is entered). When you
close communication or exit BESTCOMS, you may be asked for a password. Enter the correct password
to ensure that all setting changes are saved.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-3

SYSTEM SETTINGS
DECS-200 settings, metering values, and data records are arranged into seven groups within
BESTCOMS:
• System Configuration • Protection/Relay
• Setting Adjustments • Data Log
• Control Gain • Metering/Operation
• Analysis
Each group is contained on a BESTCOMS screen. A screen’s settings and parameters are further
organized by labeled tabs within the screen. In the following paragraphs, settings, metering values, and
data records are arranged and defined according to the organization of the BESTCOMS screen and tabs.

System Configuration
The System Configuration screen consists of four tabs labeled System Options, System Data, Rated
Data, and Auxiliary Input. To view the System Configuration screen, click the Configure button on the
toolbar or click Screens on the menu bar and click System Configuration.
System Options
System Options tab functions are shown in Figure 5-7 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-7. System Configuration Screen, System Options Tab

Limiter Mode. This setting disables all limiters or enables the underexcitation limiter (UEL), overexcitation
limiter (OEL), or stator current limiter (SCL). Selection of the following limiter combinations is also
possible: OEL/UEL, SCL/UEL, SCL/OEL, and SCL/OEL/UEL.
Sensing Configuration. Configures the generator sensing voltage as either single-phase or three-phase.
Underfrequency Mode. Configures underfrequency limiting for V/Hz or underfrequency operation.
Generator Frequency. Selects either 50 hertz or 60 hertz as the nominal system frequency.
Voltage Matching. Enables or disables voltage matching. For voltage matching to be enabled, the DECS-
200 must be operating in AVR mode, var/power factor correction must be disabled, and the system must
be off line.
Version Numbers. These two read-only fields display the version of BESTCOMS software and the
firmware version of the DECS-200 connected to the PC operating BESTCOMS. In order for the DECS-
200 firmware version to be displayed, communication must be established between BESTCOMS and the
DECS-200.

5-4 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

System Data
System Data tab functions are shown in Figure 5-8 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-8. System Configuration Screen, System Data Tab

Generator PT Ratings, Primary Voltage. Sets the rated primary voltage of the generator potential
transformer (PT). Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of
1 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator PT Ratings, Secondary Voltage. Sets the rated secondary voltage of the generator potential
transformer. Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to
600 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator CT Ratings, Primary Current. Sets the rated primary current of the generator current
transformer (CT). A setting of 1 to 60,000 Aac may be entered in 1 Aac increments.
Generator CT Ratings, Secondary Current. Sets the rated secondary current of the generator current
transformer (CT). A setting of 1 Aac or 5 Aac may be entered.
Bus PT Ratings, Primary Voltage. Sets the rated primary voltage of the bus potential transformer (PT).
Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to 500,000 Vac
may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Bus PT Ratings, Secondary Voltage. Rated secondary voltage of the bus potential transformer (PT).
(Read only.)
Internal Tracking, Enabled/Disabled. Enables or disables tracking of the active control mode setpoint by
the inactive control modes.
Internal Tracking, Delay. Determines the time delay between a control mode change and setpoint
tracking. A setting of 0 to 8 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Internal Tracking, Traverse Rate. Determines the amount of time required for the inactive control mode to
traverse (cross) the full setting range of the active control mode setpoint. A setting of 1 to 80 seconds
may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
External Tracking, Enable/Disable. Enables or disables tracking of a second DECS-200’s setpoint.
External Tracking, Delay. Determines the time delay between a transfer to a second DECS-200 and start
of tracking of the second DECS-200 setpoint. A setting of 0 to 8 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second
increments.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-5

External Tracking, Traverse Rate. Determines the amount of time required for the DECS-200 to traverse
(cross) the full setting range of a second, active DECS-200. A setting of 1 to 80 seconds may be entered
in 0.1 second increments.

Rated Data
Rated Data tab functions are shown in Figure 5-9 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-9. System Configuration Screen, Rated Data Tab

Generator Rated Data, Voltage. Sets the rated line-to-neutral generator voltage. A setting of 85 to 30,000
Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator Rated Data, Current. sets the rated generator line current. A setting of 10 to 60,000 Aac may
be entered in 0.1 Aac increments.
Generator Rated Data, Power Factor. Sets the rated generator power factor which is used to calculate
generator real power. A setting of 0.5 (leading) to –0.5 (lagging) may be entered in 0.01 increments.
Generator Rated Data, Real Power. This read-only field is the calculated product of the voltage field,
current field, power factor field, and the square root of 3.
Generator Rated Data, Rating. This read-only field is the calculated product of the voltage field, current
field, and the square root of 3.
Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Voltage. Sets the rated exciter field voltage. A setting of 1 to 180 Vdc may
be entered in 0.1 Vdc increments.
Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Current. Sets the rated exciter field current. A setting of 0.1 to 15 Adc may
be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Resistance. This read-only field is the calculated result of the field voltage
field being divided by the field current field.
Pole Ratio, Calculate Pole Ratio. Clicking this button displays the Pole Ratio Calculator screen (Figure 5-
10). Enter the number of exciter poles and generator poles and press the Enter key to view the calculated
result. The “Number of EXCITER Poles” field accepts even numbers between 0 and 1,000. The “Number
of GENERATOR Poles” field accepts even numbers between 0 and 100. Clicking the Accept button
closes the Pole Ratio Calculator screen and enters the ratio in the Pole Ratio field.

5-6 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 5-10. Pole Ratio Calculator
Pole Ratio, Pole Ratio. Sets the ratio of the number of exciter poles to the number of generator poles. A
setting of 0 to 10 may be entered in 0.01 increments. This value can be calculated automatically using the
pole ratio calculator , accessed by clicking the Calculate Pole Ratio button.
Auxiliary Input
The auxiliary voltage input signal changes the setpoint of the selected operating mode. For more
information on the auxiliary voltage input, refer to Section 3, Functional Description. Auxiliary Input tab
functions are shown in Figure 5-11 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-11. System Configuration Screen, Auxiliary Input Tab

Auxiliary Input, Input Type. Selects the accessory input type as voltage or current for remote control of the
setpoint.
Auxiliary Input, Summing Type. Selects either Inner Loop or Outer Loop as the summing type. When
Inner Loop is selected, the operating mode is either AVR of FCR. When Outer Loop is selected, the
operating mode is either var or power factor.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-7

Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Gain Settings. The four auxiliary gain setting fields, AVR, FCR, var, and PF,
select the gain which affects the setpoint of the selected operating mode. The signal applied to the
accessory input is multiplied by the auxiliary gain setting. Each gain setting can be adjusted from –99 to
+99 in increments of 0.01. For more information on the accessory gain settings, refer to Section 3,
Functional Description.
Droop Settings, Reactive Droop Compensation. Sets the level of droop compensation for paralleled
generators or line-drop compensations. Droop compensation is adjustable from 0 to +30% of the
generator nominal, terminal voltage in 0.1% increments. Line-drop compensation is adjustable from –30
to 0% of the generator nominal terminal voltage in 0.1% increments.
Droop Settings, Cross Current Compensation Gain. Sets the level of cross-current compensation
(reactive differential) gain for paralleled generators. Cross-current compensation gain is adjustable from –
30 to +30% of the rated CTs in 0.01% steps. Refer to Section 4, Installation, for more information on
cross-current compensation gain.

Setting Adjustments
The Setting Adjustments screen consists of eight tabs labeled AVR/FCR, var/PF, Startup, OEL Type,
OEL (Summing), OEL (Takeover), UEL, and SCL. To view the setting adjustment screen, click the
Settings button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Setting Adjustments.
AVR/FCR
AVR/FCR tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-12 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, AVR/FCR Tab

Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Setpoint. Sets the desired generator output voltage when operating in
AVR mode. The range of this setting is based on the generator voltage setting entered on the Rated Data
tab of the System Configuration screen. This setting is also limited by the settings of the AVR Min and
AVR Max fields. If sensing step-down transformers are used, primary voltage should be entered.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Min. Sets the minimum generator output voltage, expressed as a
percentage of the rated generator voltage. A setting of 70 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Max. Sets the maximum generator output voltage, expressed as a
percentage of the rated generator voltage. A setting of 70 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, Traverse Rate (sec). Determines the time required to adjust the AVR
setpoint from the minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200
seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.

5-8 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

Automatic Voltage Regulator, Pre-position Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for AVR mode. This
value replaces the AVR setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the AVR Pre-Position mode is
Maintain. The setting range is identical to the AVR Setpoint setting range. If sensing step-down
transformers are being used, primary voltage should be entered.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond
to further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If
Maintain mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent
setpoint changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.
Field Current Regulator, FCR Setpoint. Sets the field current setpoint when operating in FCR mode. The
range of this setting is based on the field current rating entered on the Rated Data tab of the System
Configuration screen. This setting is also controlled by the settings of the FCR Min and FCR Max fields.
Field Current Regulator, FCR Min. Sets the minimum field current setpoint, expressed as a percentage of
the rated field current. A setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Field Current Regulator, FCR Max. Sets the maximum field current setpoint, expressed as a percentage
of the rated field current. A setting of 1 to 120% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Field Current Regulator, Traverse Rate. Determines the time required to adjust the FCR setpoint from the
minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200 seconds may be
entered in 1 second increments.
Field Current Regulator, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for FCR mode. This value
replaces the FCR setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the FCR Pre-Position mode is Maintain.
The setting range is identical to the FCR Setpoint setting range.
Field Current Regulator, Pre-position Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If
Maintain mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent
setpoint changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.
Var/PF
Var/PF tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-13 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-13. Setting Adjustments Screen, var/PF Tab

Reactive Power Control, var Setpoint. Sets the reactive power setpoint when operating in var mode. The
range of this setting depends on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System
Configuration screen. This setting is also controlled by the settings of the var Min and var Max fields.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-9

Reactive Power Control, var Min. Sets the minimum var setpoint, expressed as a percentage of the rated
generator kVA. A setting of –100 to +100% may be entered in 1% increments.
Reactive Power Control, var Max. Sets the maximum var setpoint, expressed as a percentage of the
rated generator kVA. A setting of –100 to +100% may be entered in 1% increments.
Reactive Power Control, Traverse Rate. Determines the time required to adjust the var setpoint from the
minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200 seconds may be
entered in 1 second increments.
Reactive Power Control, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for var mode. This value
replaces the var setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the var Pre-Position mode is Maintain. The
setting range is identical to the var Setpoint setting range.
Reactive Power Control, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating var setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If
Maintain mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent
setpoint changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.
Reactive Power Control, Var/PF Fine Volt Band. Sets the upper and lower boundaries of voltage
correction when operating in var or PF mode.
Power Factor Control, PF Setpoint. Sets the generator operating power factor. The range of this setting is
determined by the settings of the PF (Leading) and PF (Lagging) fields.
Power Factor Control, PF (Leading). Sets the limit for leading power factor. A setting of –1 to –0.5 may be
entered in 0.005 increments.
Power Factor Control, PF (Lagging). Sets the limit for lagging power factor. A setting of 0.5 to 1 may be
entered in 0.005 increments.
Power Factor Control, Traverse Rate (sec). Determines the time required to adjust the power factor
setpoint from the minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200
seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.
Power Factor Control, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for Power Factor mode. This
value replaces the PF setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the PF Pre-Position mode is Maintain.
The setting range is identical to the PF Setpoint setting range.
Power Factor Control, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to further
setpoint change commands once the operating PF setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If Maintain
mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent setpoint
changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.
Startup
Startup tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-14 and described in the following paragraphs.
Startup Control, Soft Start Level. Sets the generator soft-start voltage offset used during startup. A setting
of 0 to 90% may be entered in 1% increments.
Startup Control, Soft Start Time. Sets the soft-start time limit used during startup. A setting of 1 to 7,200
seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.
Underfrequency Setting, Corner Frequency. Sets the generator corner frequency for generator under-
frequency protection. A setting of 15 to 90 Hz may be entered in 0.1 Hz increments.
Underfrequency Setting, Slope. Sets the generator frequency slope for generator underfrequency
protection. A setting of 0 to 3 V/Hz may be entered in 0.01 V/Hz increments.
Voltage Matching, Band. Configures the generator voltage matching band as a percentage of the
generator rated voltage. When the bus voltage falls outside this band, no voltage matching occurs. A
setting of 0 to 20% may be entered in 0.01% increments.
Voltage Matching, Gen to Bus PT Match Level. Ensures accurate voltage matching by compensation for
the error between the generator and bus voltage sensing transformers. The Match Level is expressed as
the relationship of the generator voltage to the bus voltage (expressed as a percentage). A setting of 90
to 120% may be entered in 0.1% increments.

5-10 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 5-14. System Settings Screen, Startup Tab

OEL Type
Overexcitation Limiter Type tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-15 and described in the following
paragraphs.

Figure 5-15. System Settings Screen, OEL Type Tab

OEL Limiter Style. Selects either the summing-point type of overexcitation limiter or the takeover-type of
overexcitation limiter.
OEL Setting Selection Option. Selects the on-line and off-line OEL settings for various 52J/K and 52L/M
contact statuses.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-11

Option 1 activates the on-line OEL settings when either the 52J/K contact or 52L/M contact is opened.
The off-line OEL settings are activated when both the 52J/K and 52L/M contacts are closed. When the
52L/M contact input is jumpered, the 52J/K input can be used to switch between the on-line OEL and off-
line OEL. If var/PF modes are disabled, a closed 52J/K contact enables AVR mode and an open 52J/K
contact enables droop compensation.
Option 2 configures the 52J/K contact to define when the off-line and on-line limiters are active. When the
52J/K contact is closed, the off-line OEL settings are active. When the 52J/K contact is open, the on-line
OEL settings are active. This configuration is intended for cross-compound generator applications where
both machines are paralleled at low rotational speed. Therefore, droop compensation needs to be active
(open 52L/M contact) as the speed of the machines is increased. However, both machines need active,
off-line overexcitation limiting protection.
Option 3 activates the on-line OEL at all times. This configuration enables the DECS-200 to operate in
AVR mode (stand-alone application) without restriction from the off-line OEL settings. The active on-line
OEL is able to limit excitation current if needed. This configuration also eliminates the need for the DECS-
200 to operate in Droop mode when applied in a single-unit application. Therefore, generator voltage
should not droop as reactive load increases.
OEL (Summing)
Summing-Point Overexcitation Limiter tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-16 and described in the
following paragraphs.

Figure 5-16. System Settings Screen, OEL (Summing) Tab

Off-Line OEL Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the off-line,
summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 30 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Off-Line OEL Setting, High Current Time. Sets the duration for the high current setpoint of the off-line,
summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 10 seconds may be entered in 1 second
increments.
Off-Line OEL Setting, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the off-line,
summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 15 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
On-Line OEL Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the on-line,
summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 30 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
On-Line OEL Setting, Medium Current Level. Establishes the medium-level current setpoint for the on-
line, summing point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 20 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

5-12 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

On-Line OEL Setting, Medium Current Time. Sets the duration for the medium current setpoint of the on-
line, summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 120 seconds may be entered in 1 second
increments.
On-Line OEL Setting, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the on-line,
summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 15 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
OEL (Takeover)
Takeover Overexcitation Limiter tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-17 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Off-Line Settings, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the off-line, takeover-
style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 20 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Off-Line Settings, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the off-line, takeover-
style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 30 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Off-Line Settings, Time Dial. Sets the time delay for the off-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A
setting of 0.1 to 20 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Figure 5-17. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab

On-Line Settings, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the on-line, takeover-
style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 15 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
On-Line Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the on-line, takeover-
style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 30 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
On-Line settings, Time Dial. Sets the time delay for the on-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A
setting of 0.1 to 20 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Off-Line Curve and On-Line Curve Checkboxes. Checking these boxes displays a plot of the takeover-
style off-line and on-line overexcitation limiter curves. Curve magnification is adjusted by the Zoom X,
Zoom Y, Zoom XY, and Zoom OUT buttons.
UEL
Underexcitation Limiter tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-18 and described in the following
paragraphs.
UEL Settings, UEL Curve Type Selection. Selects either a user-configured or internally-configured
underexcitation limiting curve. Selecting “Customized” enables the user to create a custom UEL curve
that matches specific generator characteristics. When “Internal” is selected, the DECS-200 automatically

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-13

creates a UEL curve based on the first point setting of the absorbed, reactive power level. This function
operates in all modes except FCR.
UEL Settings, Real Power. Up to five setting fields may be used to establish up to five real-power (kW)
points of the underexcitation limiter curve. The UEL Curve Type Selection must be set to “Customized” in
order for these setting fields to be enabled. Not all setting fields need be used. For example, entering kW
values in three of the five setting fields produces a three-point UEL curve. The range for each setting field
is based on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration screen.
UEL Settings, Reactive Power. When the UEL Curve Type Selection is set to “Customized”, these five
setting fields establish the five reactive power points of the underexcitation limiter curve. Not all setting
fields need be used. For example, entering kvar values in to of the five setting fields produces a two-point
UEL curve. When the UEL curve Type Selection is set to “Internal”, only the first setting field is enabled
and a UEL curve is internally generated based on the value entered in the field. The range for each
setting field is based on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration
screen.
Curve points are plotted in the UEL graph as values are entered through BESTCOMS. All kW and kvar
settings can also be sent at the same time using the Send all UEL Settings to DECS button.
Internal Curve and Customized Curve Buttons. These buttons can be clicked and held to preview the
corresponding UEL curve.

Figure 5-18. Setting Adjustments Screen, UEL Tab

SCL
Stator Current Limiter tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-19 and described in the following paragraphs.
Stator Current Limiter, Initial Delay. The SCL does not respond until the Initial Delay has expired. A
setting of 0 to 10 may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Stator Current Limiter, High SCL Current Level. Configures the high-level current setpoint for the stator
current limiter. A setting of 0 to 66,000 Aac may be entered in 1.0 Aac increments.
Stator Current Limiter, High SCL Current Time. Sets the time limit for high-level current limiting by the
stator current limiter. A setting of 0 to 60 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.
Stator Current Limiter, Low SCL Current Level. Configures the low-level current setpoint for the stator
current limiter. A setting of 0 to 66,000 Aac may be entered in 1 Aac increments.

5-14 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 5-19. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab

Control Gain
The Control Gain screen consists of a single tab labeled Control Gain. To view the Control Gain screen,
click the Gain button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Control Gain.
Control Gain Tab
Control Gain tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-20 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-20. Control Gain Screen

Stability Range. Entering a value from 1 to 20 selects one of 20 predefined stability setting groups for
exciter field applications. Table 5-1 lists the stability settings for each of the 20 predefined groups.
Entering 21 enables the PID function and allows the user to optimize the stability settings. The PID
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-15
function provides reference gain settings for user-specified generator and/or exciter time constants. See
PID Window for information about customizing stability settings.
Table 5-1. Predefined Stability Setting Groups
Generator Open Circuit
Time
Setting Generator Exciter
Group Constant (T’do) Time Constant (Texc) Kp Ki Kd
1 1.0 0.17 42.20 115.2 4.433
2 1.5 0.25 66.50 150.0 8.750
3 2.0 0.33 87.16 167.9 13.670
4 2.5 0.42 104.50 175.8 18.960
5 3.0 0.50 119.00 177.8 24.500
6 3.5 0.58 131.30 176.4 30.220
7 4.0 0.67 141.80 173.1 36.060
8 4.5 0.75 150.90 168.8 42.000
9 5.0 0.83 158.80 163.9 48.010
10 5.5 0.92 165.70 158.7 54.080
11 6.0 1.00 171.80 153.6 60.200
12 6.5 1.08 177.20 148.5 66.350
13 7.0 1.17 182.10 143.6 72.540
14 7.5 1.25 186.50 138.9 78.750
15 8.0 1.33 190.50 134.4 84.980
16 8.5 1.42 194.10 130.1 91.230
17 9.0 1.50 197.40 125.9 97.500
18 9.5 1.58 200.40 122.1 103.800
19 10.0 1.67 203.20 118.4 110.100
20 10.5 1.75 205.70 114.8 116.400

AVR/FCR, Proportional Gain KP. Selects the proportional constant (KP) stability parameter. The DECS-
200 provides an output value that is equivalent to KP multiplied by the error between the voltage setpoint
and the actual generator output voltage. Typical values of KP range from 0 to 1,000. General guidelines
for tuning KP are as follows: If the transient response has too much overshoot, decrease KP. If the
transient response is too slow with little or no overshoot, increase KP. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be
entered in 0.1 increments.
AVR/FCR, Integral Gain KI. Selects the integral constant (KI) stability parameter. The DECS-200 provides
an output value that is equivalent to KI multi-plied by the integral of the error between the voltage setpoint
and the actual generator output voltage. Typical values of KI range fro 0 to 1,000. Generally, if the time to
reach steady state is deemed too long, then increase the value of KI. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be
entered in 0.1 increments.
AVR/FCR, Derivative Gain KD. Selects the derivative constant (KD) stability parameter. The DECS-200
provides an output value that is equivalent to KD multiplied by the derivative of the error between the
voltage setpoint and the actual generator output voltage. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1
increments. Typical values of KD range from 1 to 10. If the transient response has too much ringing, then
KD should be increased.
AVR/FCR, Derivative Gain TD. Removes the effects of noise on numerical differentiation. A setting of 0 to
1 may be entered in 0.01 increments. Typical TD values range from 0.01 to 0.03.
AVR/FCR, AVR Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for AVR mode. A
setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
_AVR/FCR, FCR Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for FCR mode. A
setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

5-16 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

VAR/PF, var Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the integral gain, which determines the characteristic of the DECS-
200 dynamic response to a changed var setting. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.01
increments.
VAR/PF, PF Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the integral gain, which determines the characteristic of the DECS-
200 dynamic response to a changed power factor setting. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1
increments.
VAR/PF, var Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for var control. A setting
of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.01 increments.
VAR/PF, PF Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for power factor control.
A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
SCL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 limits stator current. A setting of 0 to 1,000
may be entered in 0.1 increments.
SCL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the stator current limiter. A
setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
OEL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 responds during an overexcitation
condition. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
OEL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the overexcitation limiter. A
setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
UEL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 responds during an underexcitation
condition. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
UEL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the underexcitation limiter. A
setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments
Voltage Matching, Loop Gain Kg. Adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for matching the
generator voltage to the bus voltage. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

Analysis
The Analysis screen consists of four tabs labeled AVR, FCR, var, and PF. To view the Analysis screen,
click the Analysis button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Analysis.
Trigger Data Logging on Step Change. Checking this box causes an oscillography report to be triggered
every time that a step change occurs.
AVR
AVR tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-21 and described in the following paragraphs.
Voltage Step Response, Increment of AVR Setpoint. Sets the voltage step size that the DECS-200 uses
when incrementing the generator terminal voltage setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to increment the terminal voltage setpoint. A read-
only field indicates the terminal voltage setpoint that will be achieved when the increment button is
clicked. If the specified step size is outside the setpoint limit, a warning message will appear.
Voltage Step Response, AVR Setpoint. This read-only field indicates the generator terminal voltage set-
point that was set on the AVR/FCR tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. A button adjacent to this field
is clicked to return the AVR setpoint to the displayed value.
Voltage Step Response, Decrement of AVR Setpoint. Sets the voltage step size that the DECS-200 uses
when decrementing the generator terminal voltage setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to decrement the terminal voltage setpoint. A read-
only field indicates the terminal voltage setpoint that will be achieved when the decrement button is
clicked.
Voltage Step Response, Vrms. This read-only field indicates the value of terminal voltage. The other
three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
Alarm Signals. During step response analysis, nine alarm indicators are available to indicate system
alarms. The indicators annunciate the following conditions:
• Field overcurrent
• Field overvoltage
• Generator overvoltage
• Generator undervoltage
• Loss of sensing
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-17
• Overexcitation limiting
• System frequency below 10 Hz
• Underexcitation limiting
• Underfrequency or volts per hertz

Figure 5-21. Analysis Screen, AVR Tab

FCR
FCR tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-22 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-22. Analysis Screen, FCR Tab

5-18 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

Field Current Step Response, Increment of FCR Setpoint. Sets the current step size that the DECS-200
uses when incrementing the field current setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to increment the field current setpoint. A read-only
field indicates the field current setpoint that will be achieved when the increment button is clicked. If the
specified step size is outside the setpoint limit, a warning message will appear.
Field Current Step Response, FCR Setpoint. This read-only field indicates the field current setpoint that
was set on the AVR/FCR tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. A button adjacent to this field is clicked
to return the AVR setpoint to the displayed value.
Field Current Step Response, Decrement of FCR Setpoint. Sets the field current step size that the DECS-
200 uses when decrementing the field current setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to decrement the field current setpoint. A read-only
field indicates the field current setpoint that will be achieved when the decrement button is clicked.
Field Current Step Response, Ifd. This read-only field indicates the value of field current. The other three
fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
Alarm Signals. During step response analysis, nine alarm indicators are available to indicate system
alarms. A list of the indicators is provided under Analysis, AVR. Alarm annunciations are updated
approximately once every second.
Var
Var tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-23 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-23. Analysis Screen, var Tab

Reactive Power Step Response, Range Control, Min. Changes the range indicated by the var Step
Settings dial and the minimum allowable var settings for the generator. To change the minimum dial
value, double-click the field value, enter a new minimum limit, and press the Enter key.
Reactive Power Step Response, Range Control, Max. Changes the range indicated by the var Step
Settings dial and the minimum allowable var settings for the generator. To change the maximum dial
value, double-click the field value, enter a new minimum limit, and press the Enter key.
Reactive Power Step Response, Setpoint Value. This read-only field indicates the reactive power setpoint
established on the var/PF tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. If a step-response setpoint change has
been made from this screen, the actual setpoint value for the regulator will differ from this read-only
indication.
Reactive Power Step Response, Step Value Change var Value. Provides one of three methods for
changing the kvar setpoint and observing the generator response. (The other two methods include

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-19

adjusting the var Step Settings dial or slide bar.) Once the desired value is entered, the value is sent to
the DECS-200 by clicking the Send var Value to DECS (OK) button. When clicked and held, the button
color changes to red and the button label changes to “Index 1”. Upon release of the button, the new var
value setting is sent to the DECS-200 as the reactive power setpoint for the var regulator. If the specified
var value is outside the range limit, a dialog box appears and shows the acceptable values for the step
response. Changing the var setpoint through the var Value field does not change the dial or slide
indicators.
The pointer of the var Step Settings dial can be clicked and dragged to the approximate, desired setting.
As the pointer is dragged, the slide bar moves to show the relative percentage of the minimum or
maximum var setting. The setpoint can then be fine tuned using the up and down scrolling buttons of the
var Value window.
Reactive Power Step Response, Step Value Change Index. Up to three var step-response setpoints
(indexes) can be activated. An index is created by using the methods described in the previous
paragraphs. Index 2 is added by clicking the Add var Step button. (It may be necessary to drag the red
index 1 pointer out of the way to access the yellow index 2 pointer.) When the Send var Value to DECS
button is clicked and held, the button color changes to yellow and the button label changes to “Index 2”. A
third index is added n the same manner as index 2, but the third index color is blue.
Reactive Power Step Response, Var Steps, Add Var Step. Adds a setpoint index. A maximum of three
setpoint indexes may be created. Refer to the previous paragraph for additional information on adding
setpoint indexes (var Steps).
Reactive Power Step Response, Var Steps, Remove Step. Removes the last setpoint index created.
Var, Var Step Response. This read-only field indicates the value of the regulated var level. The other
three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
Alarm Signals. During step response analysis, nine alarm indicators are available to indicate system
alarms. A list of the indicators is provided under Analysis, AVR. Alarm annunciations are updated
approximately once every second.
PF
PF tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-24 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-24. Analysis Screen, PF Tab

Power Factor Step Response, Add PF Step. Adds a power factor setpoint index. Up to three setpoint
indexes can be created. The addition of indexes is discussed in the paragraphs describing the Step Value
Change settings.
Power Factor Step Response, Remove Steps. Removes the last setpoint index created.
5-20 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G
Power Factor Step Response, PF Setpoint Value. This read-only field indicates the reactive power
setpoint established on the var/PF tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. If a step response setpoint
change has been made from this screen, the actual setpoint value for the regulator will differ from this
read-only indication.
Power Factor Step Response, Step Value Change PF Value. Provides one of two methods for changing
the power factor setpoint and observing the generator response. (The other method consists of adjusting
the PF Step Response Settings dial.) Once the desired value is entered, the value is sent to the DECS-
200 by clicking the Send PF Value to DECS button. When clicked and held, the button color changes to
red and the button label changes to “Index 1”. Upon release of the button, the new power factor value is
sent to the DECS-200 and the PF setpoint for the power factor regulator. If the specified PF value is
outside the range limit, a dialog box appears and shows the acceptable values for the step response.
Changing the var setpoint through the PF Value field does not change the dial indicator.
The pointer of the PF Step Response Settings dial can be clicked and dragged to the approximate,
desired setting. The setpoint can then be fine tuned using the up and down scrolling buttons of the PF
Value window.
Power Factor Step Response, Step Value Change Index. Up to three power factor step-response
setpoints (indexes) can be activated. An index is created by using the methods described in the previous
paragraphs. Index 2 is added by clicking the Add PF Step button. (It may be necessary to drag the red
Index 1 pointer out of the way to access the yellow index 2 pointer.) When the Send PF Value to DECS
button is clicked and held, the button color changes to yellow and the button label changes to “Index 2”. A
third index is added in the same manner as index 2, but the third index color is blue.
Power Factor Step Response, PF. This read-only field indicates the value of the regulated power factor
level. The other three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
Alarm Signals. During step response analysis, nine alarm indicators are available to indicate system
alarms. A list of the indicators is provided under Analysis, AVR. Alarm annunciations are updated
approximately once every second.

Protection/Relay
The Protection/Relay screen consists of five tabs labeled Options, Settings, Gain, Relay #1, #2 Logic,
Relay #3 Logic, and Relay Settings. To view the Protection/Relay screen, click the Protection button on
the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Protection/Relay.
Options
Options tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-25 and described in the following paragraphs.
Protection. DECS-200 protection functions are enabled and disabled using these settings. DECS-200
protection functions include generator overvoltage, exciter field overvoltage, open exciter diode, loss of
field, generator undervoltage, exciter field overcurrent, and shorted exciter diode. When a protection
function is enabled or disabled, the change is sent immediately to the DECS-200.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, LOS. Enables and disables the loss of sensing function.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Time Delay. Sets the time delay between when the DECS-200 detects a loss of
sensing voltage and when the alarm annunciates and the output relay actuates (if programmed). A setting
of 0 to 30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Balanced Level. When all phases of sensing voltage decrease below this
setting, the loss of sensing voltage time delay begins timing out. A setting of 0 to 100% (of nominal) may
be entered in 0.1% increments.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Unbalanced Level. When any one of three phases of sensing voltage decreases
below this setting, the loss of sensing voltage time delay begins timing out. This setting applies to three-
phase sensing applications only. A setting of 0 to 100% (of nominal) may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Transfer to FCR Mode. Enables and disables a transfer from AVR mode to FCR
mode when a loss of sensing voltage condition occurs.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-21

 Figure 5-25. Protection Screen, Options Tab
Settings
Settings tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-26 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-26. Protection Screen, Settings Tab

Generator Overvoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint, in primary voltage, for generator overvoltage
protection. This setting is active only when generator overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options
tab. When the generator terminal voltage reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay
expires, the corresponding protection alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis screens for the
location of the specific alarm signal LEDs.) If programmed for the overvoltage function, one or more of the
three programmable output relays are actuated. A setting of 0 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac
increments.
5-22 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G
Generator Overvoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the generator overvoltage protection function. This
setting is active only when generator overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of
0.1 to 60 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Exciter Field Overvoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint for field overvoltage protection. This setting is
active only when field overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the field voltage
reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the corresponding protection alarm
indicator lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis Screen for the detailed alarm LED signals.) If
programmed for the field overvoltage function, one or more of the three programmable output relays are
actuated. A setting of 1 to 325 Vdc may be entered in 1 Vdc increments.
Exciter Field Overvoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the field overvoltage protection function. This
setting is active only when field overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0.2 to
30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Exciter Open Diode, Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that indicates an open exciter
diode. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A
setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Exciter Open Diode, Inhibit Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that disables both open-
and shorted-diode protection. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on
the Options tab. A setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Exciter Open Diode, Delay. Sets the time delay between when an open exciter diode is detected and
annunciated. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab.
A setting of 10 to 60 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Generator Undervoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint for generator undervoltage protection. This
setting is active only when generator undervoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the
generator terminal voltage reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the
corresponding protection alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis screen for the detailed
alarm LED signals.) If programmed for the undervoltage function, one or more of the three programmable
output relays are actuated. A setting of 0 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator Undervoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the generator undervoltage protection function.
This setting is active only when generator undervoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A
setting of 0.5 to 60 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Exciter Field Overcurrent, Level. Configures the setpoint for field overcurrent protection. This setting is
active only when field overcurrent protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the field current
exceeds the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the corresponding protection
alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis Screen for the detailed alarm LED signals.) If
programmed for the field overcurrent function, one or more of the three programmable output relays are
actuated. A setting of 0.1 to 16.0 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Exciter Field Overcurrent, Delay. Selects the time delay between when the field current reaches the
Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting and when the alarm annunciates. The time delay is initiated when
the sensed current exceeds the overcurrent setpoint and is inversely proportional to the overcurrent level.
The higher the current level, the less time delay before alarm annunciations. This setting is active only
when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0.1 to 20 seconds may
be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Exciter Shorted Diode, Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that indicates a shorted exciter
diode. This setting is active only when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A
setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Exciter Shorted Diode, Delay. Sets the time delay between when a shorted exciter diode is detected and
annunciated. This setting is active only when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options
tab. A setting of 5 to 30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Loss of Field, Level. Configures the setpoint for loss of field protection. This setting is active only when
loss of field protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the kvar value decreases below the negative
value of this setting for the duration of the Loss of Field Delay setting, the corresponding protection alarm
LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status tab of the Metering screen or the Analysis screen for the detailed alarm
LED signals.) Any of the three programmable DECS-200 output relays can be programmed to annunciate
a loss of field condition. A setting of 0 to 3,000,000 kvar may be entered in1 kvar increments.
Loss of Field, Delay. Sets the loss of field protection time delay. This setting is active only when loss of
field protection is enabled. A setting of 0 to 9.9 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-23

Relay Logic
Logic settings for the three programmable relays are divided between two tabs labeled Relay #1, #2 Logic
and Relay #3 Logic. Because the settings for each programmable relay are identical, only the Relay #1,
#2 Logic tab is illustrated here (Figure 5-27).

Figure 5-27. Protection Screen, Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab

Protection. A programmable relay can be configured to annunciate any of nine active protection functions.
These protection functions include:
• Field overcurrent • Loss of sensing voltage
• Field overvoltage • Open exciter diode
• Generator overvoltage • Shorted exciter diode
• Generator undervoltage • System frequency below 10 Hz
• Loss of field
Setpoint Limit. A programmable output can be configured to close when the active setpoint reaches the
upper limit or lower limit.
FCR Mode. Enabling this setting closes the programmable output when the DECS-200 is operating in
FCR (Manual) mode.
Limit. A programmable output can be configured to close when the following limits are reached:
overexcitation, stator current, underfrequency or volts per hertz, and underexcitation.
Relay Setting
Contact settings for each of the three programmable relays are adjusted on the Relay Setting tab. Relay
Setting tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-28 and described in the following paragraphs.
Contact Status. Configures the output contacts as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC). Normally
closed, programmable relay outputs do not remain closed when control power is removed from the
DECS-200.
Contact Type. Selects one of three contact types: Momentary, Maintained, or Latched. Selecting
Momentary closes or opens the relay contacts for the duration determined by the Momentary Time
setting. Selecting Maintained closes or opens the relay contact for the duration of the condition triggering
the relay’s change of state. Selecting Latched latches the relay contacts closed or open until the relay is
reset by the user.
Momentary Time. When Momentary is selected as the contact type, this setting controls the duration that
the contact is open/closed when the relay output is active. A setting of 0.1 to 5 seconds may be entered in
0.05 second increments.

5-24 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 5-28. Protection Screen, Relay Setting Tab

Data Log
The Data Log screen consists of three tabs labeled Log Setup/Sequence of Events, Logic Triggers, and
Level Triggers/Logged Parameters. To view the Data Log screen, click the Data Log button on the tool
bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Data Log.
Log Setup/Sequence Of Events
Log Setup/Sequence of Events tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-29 and described in the following
paragraphs.

Figure 5-29. Data Log Screen, Log Setup/Sequence of Events Tab

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-25

Data Logging Setup, Data Logging Enable. Enables and disables data logging.
Data Logging Setup, Pre-Trigger Points. Selects the number of data points that are recorded prior to a
data log being triggered. A setting of 0 to 599 may be entered in increments of 1.
Data Logging Setup, Post Trigger Points. Displays the number of data points that are recorded after a
data log is triggered. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample
Interval settings.
Data Logging Setup, Sample Interval. Establishes the sample rate of the data points. When the Generator
Frequency setting (System Configuration screen, System Options tab) is 60 hertz, a sample interval of
0.016 to 10 seconds may be selected from the pull-down menu. When the Generator Frequency setting is
50 hertz, a sample interval of 0.004 to 10 seconds may be selected from the pull-down menu.
Data Logging Setup, Pre-Trig Duration. Displays the length of time that pre-trigger data points are
recorded. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval
settings.
Data Logging Setup, Post Trig Duration. Displays the length of time that post-trigger data points are
recorded. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval
settings.
Data Logging Setup, Total Log Duration. Displays the total recording time for a data log and equals the
sum of the values in the Pre-Trig Duration and Post Trig Duration fields. The value of this read-only field
is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval settings.
View Sequence Of Events Reporting. Clicking this button displays the Sequence of Events Reporting
screen (Figure 5-30). Sequence of Events Reporting screen displays and controls are described in the
following paragraphs.

Figure 5-30. Sequence of Event Reporting

Report Summary. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of
events records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following
Events setting area.
Event List. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of events
records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following Events
setting area.
Reset New Event List. Clicking this button clears all new events from the Event List.
Display the Following Events. The event type displayed in the Event List is controlled by selection made
here. Available event-type selections are New, All New and Old, New Alarm, New I/O, and New Mode.
Print/Save Report. Clicking this button allows the report to be saved as a text file or printed.
5-26 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G
View and Download Data log. Clicking this button displays the Data Logging screen of Figure 5-31. Data
Logging screen displays and controls are described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-31. Data Logging Screen

Report Summary. This area of the Data Logging screen displays information such as the time and date,
station, device and user identification information, and the number of new and total records.
Event List. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of events
records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following Events
setting area.
Selected Record Information. This area of the Data Logging screen displays information relating to the
data log record selected in the Record List. Displayed information includes the number of pre-trigger
points, number of post-trigger points, total number of points, the sample interval, and the number of
parameters reported.
Data Record List Options, Reset New Record Counter. Clicking this button resets the number of new
records reported in the Report Summary to zero.
Data Record List Options, Reset Total Record Counter. Clicking this button resets the number of total
records reported in the Report Summary to zero.
Data Record List Options, Trigger a Record. Clicking this button manually triggers data record acquisition.
A data log cannot be manually triggered unless data logging is enabled on the Log Setup/Sequence of
Events tab.
Data Record List Options, Stop Record. Clicking this button ends acquisition of a manually triggered data
record.
Data Record List Options, Refresh Summary and List. Clicking this button updates the Report Summary
data and Record List with the latest available information.
Data Record List Options, Download Selected Record. Clicking this button downloads the selected record
and allows it to be saved as either a text file or a COMTRADE file viewable in BESTwave.
Print/Save Report. Clicking this button allows a report to be either saved as a text file or printed.
Print/Save Record. Clicking this button allows a record to be either saved as a text file or printed.

Logic Triggers
Logic Triggers tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-32 and described in the following paragraphs.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-27

 Figure 5-32. Data Log Screen, Logic Triggers Tab
Contact Inputs. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the available DECS-200 contact inputs that can
be selected to trigger a data log report. The following contact inputs are available for triggering a data log
report:
• 52J/K • AVR • Secondary Enable
• 52L/M • FCR • Start
• Alarm Reset • Pre-Position • Stop
Any combination of contact inputs may be selected.
Relay Outputs. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the DECS-200 contact outputs that can be
selected to trigger a data log report. The following relay outputs are available for triggering a data log
report:
• Relay 1 • Relay 3 • Watchdog
• Relay 2 • Stop/Start
Any combination of relay outputs may be selected.
Alarm States. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the available alarm conditions that can be selected
to trigger a data log report. The following alarm conditions are available for triggering a data log report:
• Exciter field overcurrent • Generator sensing <10 Hz • Setpoint at upper limit
• Exciter field overvoltage • Generator undervoltage • Shorted exciter diode
• Exciter open diode • Loss of field • Stator current limit
• FCR mode • Loss of sensing • Underexcitation limit
• Generator overvoltage • Overexcitation limit • Underfrequency
• Setpoint at lower limit
Any combination of alarm states may be selected.
System Status, Start/Stop. Enables the Start or Stop mode to trigger a data log report. Selecting “No
Trigger” disables a Start or Stop mode trigger.
System Status, Soft Start. Enables a data log report to be triggered when Underfrequency protection is
active or inactive. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a Soft Start trigger.
System Status, Underfrequency. Enables a data log report to be triggered when either AVR mode or FCR
mode is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables an Underfrequency trigger.
System Status, Control Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when either AVR mode or FCR
mode is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a control mode trigger.

5-28 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

System Status, Operating Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when power factor control is
active or var control is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables an operating mode trigger.
System Status, Load Compensation. Enables a data log report to be triggered when droop compensation
is active or inactive. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a load compensation trigger.
System Status, Limiter Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when the underexcitation limiter,
overexcitation limiter, or stator current limiter are active. Additionally, a data log report can be triggered
when two of the limiters are active. The available limiter mode selections are listed below:
• No Trigger (disables a limiter mode trigger)
• OEL (overexcitation limiter active)
• Off (no limiters active)
• SCL (stator current limiter active)
• SCL, OEL (stator current limiter and overexcitation limiter active)
• SCL, UEL (stator current limiter and underexcitation limiter active)
• UEL (underexcitation limiter active)
• UEL, OEL (underexcitation limiter and overexcitation limiter active)
System Status, Voltage Matching. Enables a data log report to be triggered when voltage matching is
enabled (On) or disabled (Off). Selecting No Trigger disables a voltage matching trigger.
System Status, Auto Tracking. Enables a data log report to be triggered when the DECS-200 is
functioning as the primary controller or the secondary controller in a redundant DECS-200 system.
Selecting No Trigger disables an auto-tracking trigger.

Level Triggers/ Logged Parameters

The Level Triggers/Logged Parameters tab (Figure 5-33) consists of a list of parameters that can be
selected to trigger a data log report. Up to six parameters can be selected as triggers. Each parameter
has Level Trigger Enable buttons that are used to trigger a data log when the parameter increases above
the upper threshold setting, decreases below the lower threshold setting, or either increases above or
decreases below the upper or lower threshold setting. The available parameters that can be selected to
trigger a data log report are listed in Table 5-2.

Figure 5-33. Data Log Screen, Level Triggers/Logged Parameters

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-29

 Table 5-2. Data Log Report Parameter Triggers
Unit of Threshold
Parameter Measure Lower Upper Increment
Auto Tracking Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Auxiliary Input Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Average Gen. Voltage, L-L PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
AVR Error Signal N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Bus Frequency Hz 0 to 90 0 to 90 0.01
Bus Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Control Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Cross-Current Input PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Field Current PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Field Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Gen. Apparent Power kVA PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Gen. Reactive Power kvar PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Gen. Real Power kW PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Current Ib PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Frequency Hz 0 to 90 0 to 90 0.01
Generator Power Factor PF –1 to 1 –1 to 1 0.01
Generator Voltage Vab PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Voltage Vbc PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Voltage Vca PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Phase Angle, V-I Degrees –180 to 180 –180 to 180 0.01
PID Integrator State N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Var/PF Controller Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1

Metering
The Metering screen consists of two tabs labeled Operation and Alarm/Status. To view the Metering
screen, click the Metering button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click
Metering/Operation.
Operation
Operation tab parameters and controls are illustrated in Figure 5-34 and described in the following
paragraphs.
DECS-200 BESTCOMS software provides real-time monitoring of the following data. This data is
refreshed approximately once every second. Metering is enabled or disabled through the pull-down menu
or by clicking the Metering button.
Real-time metering values on the Operation tab are refreshed approximately once per second. Metering
is enabled or disabled through the Metering menu on the menu bar or by clicking the Metering button.
Gen Voltage. Displays three values of generator voltage: Vab, Vbc, and Vca.
Gen Current. Displays phase B generator current.
Field Voltage. Displays the level of field voltage.
Field Current. Displays the level of field current.
EDM SD/OD Ripple. Displays the percentage of ripple detected across the exciter diodes by the exciter
diode monitor.
Bus Voltage. Displays the level of bus voltage.
Phase Angle. Displays the phase angle between the generator voltage and current.
Position Indication. Displays the relative position (in percent) of the current setpoint value to the
programmed minimum or maximum setpoint.

5-30 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 5-34. Metering Screen, Operation Tab
Frequency. Displays the frequency of the generator voltage and bus voltage.
Aux DC Input. Displays a value of voltage that is relative to the accessory input voltage or current,
depending on the mode selected.
Apparent Power. Displays the apparent power, in VA, being supplied by the generator.
Real Power. Displays the real power, in watts, being supplied by the generator.
Reactive Power. Displays the reactive power, in vars, being supplied by the generator.
Power Factor. Displays the operating power factor of the generator.
Tracking Error. Displays the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the nominal value of the tracking mode
to the mode being tracked. For example, if operating in AVR mode with 100 Vac nominal generator
voltage and a tracking error of –0.5%, a transfer to another operating mode would cause a decrease in
generator output voltage to 99.5 Vac.
Control Mode. AVR and FCR mode status is reported by two indicators. When the DECS-200 is operating
in AVR mode, the AVR indicator changes from gray to red. When operating in FCR mode, the FCR
indicator changes from gray to green. A button is provided to toggle between AVR and FCR modes.
Operating Status. Three indicators report whether Var mode is active, Power Factor mode is active, or
neither mode is active. An option button below each indicator is used to select the corresponding
operating mode. When Var mode is active, the Var indicator changes from gray to green. When Power
Factor mode is active, the PF indicator changes from gray to red. When neither mode is active, the Off
indicator changes from gray to blue. If the control mode is FCR and Var of PF mode is selected, that
selection will be ignored by the DECS-200. Even if the Var or PF indicator turns on, the system will not be
in those modes unless the DECS-200 52J/K input is open. See Table 5-3 for additional information on
52J/K and 52L/M logic.
Table 5-3. 52J/K and 52L/M Logic
DECS-200 Operating Mode 52 L/M 52 J/K Generator Operating Mode
AVR mode active, off-line OEL Closed Closed Single unit/stand-alone
enabled, no droop, no var/PF
Droop mode active, on-line OEL Open Closed Paralleled to the utility grid (droop) or
enabled, no var/PF two or more generators islanded
(droop or cross-current compensation)
Var/PF mode active, on-line OEL Open Open Paralleled to utility grid
enabled
NOTE: If neither var or power factor modes are selected via the operator interfaces, then the operating mode is
droop.
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-31
System Operating Status. Two indicators show the start/stop mode status of the DECS-200. in Start
mode, the START indicator changes from gray to red. In Stop mode, the STOP indicator changes from
gray to green. A button is provided for toggling between Start and Stop modes.
Pre-position Set. Clicking this button adjusts the excitation setpoint to the pre-position value.
Fine Adjustment. Clicking the Raise button increases the active operating setpoint. Clicking the Lower
button decreases the active operating setpoint. The raise and lower increment is a function of the setpoint
range of adjustment and the active operating setpoint. The raise and lower increment is a function of the
setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate. The increments are directly proportional
to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse rate.
Alarm/Status
Alarm/Status tab indicators and controls are illustrated in Figure 5-35 and described in the following
paragraphs.

Figure 5-35. Metering Screen, Alarm/Status Tab

System Status. When any of the 15 conditions listed in Figure 5-35 exist, the corresponding indicator
changes from gray to red. Clicking the Reset Alarms button resets the system status annunciations. Any
condition that remains active will annunciate again after the Reset Alarms button is clicked.
Switch Status. Three indicators provide contact input status. The 52 JK indicator turns on when the 52J/K
contact input is open. The 52 LM indicator turns on when the 52L/M contact is open. The Secondary
DECS indicator turns on when the SECEN (secondary enable) contact input is closed.
Front Panel LED Signal Status. Six indicators provide remote indication of the front panel LEDs. Refer to
Section 2, Human-Machine Interface for information regarding the function of the front panel indicators.

SAVING, PRINTING, AND OPENING FILES

BESTCOMS provides the ability to save DECS-200 settings in a file for reference or future use. Using a
settings file can save setup time when configuring multiple units with the same configuration. Settings
files may be opened and edited using any text editing application. A settings file can also be printed from
BESTCOMS.
Saving Files
A DECS-200 settings file is saved through a Save As dialog box. The Save As dialog box is accessed by
using any of three methods:

5-32 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

• Click the Save File button on the tool bar
• Press Ctrl + A on the keyboard
• Click File, Save As on the menu bar
The Save As dialog box enables you to navigate to the desired folder and save the DECS-200 settings
file. DECS-200 setting files are saved with a .de2 extension.

Printing Files
A printed copy of DECS-200 settings can be made for record keeping or as a reference. Settings are
printed by accessing the print preview screen. The print preview screen is accessed by using any of three
methods:
• Click the Print Data button on the tool bar
• Press Ctrl + P on the keyboard
• Click File, Print on the menu bar
Executing a print command displays a user information box with fields for adding a title and comments to
the printout. Clicking OK or Cancel displays a print preview of the settings. The print preview screen
enables you to select a printer and configure the page layout (Print Setup button), print the settings list
(printer icon button), and save the list of settings in a text file (Save button). The BESTCOMS software
version, the DECS-200 firmware version, and the time and date are printed along with the settings.

Opening/Uploading Files
DECS-200 settings files can be opened by BESTCOMS and uploaded to a DECS-200 communicating
with the PC running BESTCOMS. A DECS-200 settings file is retrieved through the BESTCOMS Open
dialog box. The Open dialog box is accessed by using any of three methods:
• Click the File Open button on the tool bar
• Press Ctrl + O on the keyboard
• Click File, Open on the menu bar
The Open dialog box enables you to navigate to the desired settings file and retrieve the settings.
Settings can be retrieved into BESTCOMS and uploaded to the DECS-200 or retrieved into BESTCOMS
without uploading to the DECS-200. When you execute the Open command, a warning dialog box
appears. This dialog box warns you that equipment damage may occur as a result of the changes that
were made in the computer file. If you have confidence that no damage will occur, you may send the data
to the DECS-200.

CAUTION
A file data transfer while the DECS-200 is on-line may result in poor system
performance or equipment damage. Make sure that the new settings are safe to
upload before you transfer the data file.

If you select Yes, then 17 blocks of DECS-200 setting data are sent to the DECS-200 block by block.
Please wait until all 17 blocks of data have been transferred. When power is next applied to the DECS-
200 unit, the previously saved settings will become the current settings.

PID WINDOW
The PID window of BESTCOMS provides the ability to increase generator stability by changing the PID
(proportional + integral + derivative) parameters. PID parameters are calculated automatically after the
user selects the generator time constant (T’do) and/or exciter time constant (Texc).
The PID window is accessed by clicking the PID button on the tool bar. This button is enabled only when
the Control Gain screen is being viewed and the Stability Range setting is 21.
PID window functions are shown in Figure 5-36 and described in the following paragraphs.
Field Input Data, Generator Information. This setting field is used to enter and display a descriptive name
for the selected group of PID settings. The Generator Information field accepts up to 27 alphanumeric
characters.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-33

Field Input Data, Generator Time Constant T’do. The time constant of the generator is entered in this
field. The generator time constant and exciter time constant are used to calculate gain parameters Kp, Ki,
and Kd. A setting of 1 to 15 may be selected from the pull-down menu.
Field Input Data, Exciter Time Constant Texc. The time constant of the exciter is entered in this field. The
exciter time constant and generator time constant are used to calculate gain parameters Kp, Ki, and Kd.
The exciter time constant setting range varies according to the generator time constant value selected.
The default value for the exciter time constant is the generator time constant divided by six.
Field Output Data, Gain Kp. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kp based on the
generator time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Texc).
Field Output Data, Gain Ki. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Ki based on the generator
time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Te).
Field Output Data, Gain Kd. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kd based on the
generator time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Texc).

Figure 5-36. PID Window

Field Output Data – Gain Kg. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kg based on the
generator time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Texc).
Buttons below the Field Output Data fields enable existing PID records to be deleted (Remove Record),
enable calculated setting to be saved in a record (Add to PID List), enable a set of PID parameters to be
retrieved from the PID list and invoked, and update the PID settings displayed in the PID window and
used by the DECS-200N (Update Setting Screen). Clicking the Close button exits the PID window and
returns to the Control Gain screen.
PID List. This area of the PID window displays the groups of available PID settings.

PID Calculations Based On Input Values

The available exciter time constant range is determined by the generator time constant input value. (The
default value for the exciter time constant is the generator time constant divided by six (T’do ÷ 6).) The
generator time constant input value must be in the range of 1.0 to 15.0 seconds and in 0.05 second
increments. When the generator time constant value is 1.00, the available exciter time constant range is
0.03 to 0.50 in 0.01 second increments. When the generator time constant value is 15.00, the available
exciter time constant range is 0.30 to 3.00 in 0.01 second increments.
For example, when you set T’do = 2.0 seconds, Texc is 0.33. After specifying the input values, a set of
PID parameters (Output Data) is generated automatically. If you set T’do = 5.00 seconds, then Texc will
be 0.83 seconds. The calculated KP is 155.47, KI is 138.72, KD is 48, and Kg is 1.
PID parameters can be directly removed from, added to, or modified in the PID List Data. PID parameters
may also be saved into a file (pidlist.dat).

5-34 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

Adding To PID List

CAUTION
Improper PID numbers can result in poor system performance or equipment
damage.

PID parameters can be added to a list and recalled for operational use and comparison. To add to the list,
type the name for the generator (or other appropriate information) in the generator information box.
Choose the generator time constant and, if appropriate, the exciter time constant. Observe the PID gain
parameters in the Field Output Data boxes. If these gain parameters are appropriate, select the Add to
PID List button. To check for the new parameters, pull down the PID Parameters List (click on the down
arrow). The new gain and time constant parameters will be displayed.

Removing A PID List Record

PID parameters can also be removed from the list. To remove a list (record), pull down the PID
Parameters List and select the record or list so that the gain and time constant parameters are
displayed. Click the Remove Record button and the listed record is deleted.

Retrieving Existing Data From PID List

To retrieve existing data, pull down the PID Parameters List and select the record or list so that the gain
and time constant parameters are displayed and highlighted. Click the Get from a list button and the
listed record input and output data displays in the text boxes.

TERMINATING COMMUNICATION
Communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200 is terminated by clicking Communications on
the menu bar and clicking Close Comm Port.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-35

 This page intentionally left blank.

5-36 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 6 • SETUP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6 • SETUP ................................................................................................................................ 6-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Equipment Required........................................................................................................................... 6-1
System Data ....................................................................................................................................... 6-1
SETTINGS ENTRY................................................................................................................................ 6-1
System Configuration Screen............................................................................................................. 6-1
Setting Adjustments Screen ............................................................................................................... 6-4
Protection/Relay Screen................................................................................................................... 6-10
OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE NOT SPINNING.................................................................................. 6-13
Start/Stop Tests................................................................................................................................ 6-13
Control Gain Settings ....................................................................................................................... 6-14
PID Settings...................................................................................................................................... 6-14
OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE SPINNING .......................................................................................... 6-14
FCR Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 6-14
EXCITATION PERFORMANCE EVALUATION .................................................................................. 6-17
Off-Line Excitation Limiter Operation ............................................................................................... 6-17
Limit and Protection Check .............................................................................................................. 6-18
Parallel Operation, Generator On Line............................................................................................. 6-18
Conclusion Of Testing ...................................................................................................................... 6-20

Figures
Figure 6-1. System Options Tab................................................................................................................ 6-2
Figure 6-2. System Data Tab .................................................................................................................... 6-2
Figure 6-3. Rated Data Tab....................................................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-4. Auxiliary Input Tab .................................................................................................................. 6-4
Figure 6-5. AVR/FCR Tab ......................................................................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-6. Var/PF Tab.............................................................................................................................. 6-5
Figure 6-7. Startup Tab ............................................................................................................................. 6-6
Figure 6-8. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL Type Tab .......................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-9. OEL Summing Tab.................................................................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6-10. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab............................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-11. UEL Tab ................................................................................................................................ 6-9
Figure 6-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab ................................................................................. 6-9
Figure 6-13. Protection Options Tab ....................................................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-14. Protection Settings Tab....................................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-15. Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab ....................................................................................................... 6-12
Figure 6-16. Relay Setting Tab................................................................................................................ 6-13
Figure 6-17. Field Voltage Output Waveform.......................................................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-18. KG Gain Effect on Generator Performance ......................................................................... 6-16
Figure 6-19. Insufficient Proportional Gain.............................................................................................. 6-16
Figure 6-20. Prolonged Instability............................................................................................................ 6-16
Figure 6-21. Insufficient Derivative Gain ................................................................................................. 6-17
Figure 6-22. Final Solution Step Response............................................................................................. 6-17

Tables
Table 6-1. Generator and Field Ratings .................................................................................................... 6-1
Table 6-2. Programmable Output Function Assignments ....................................................................... 6-12

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup i

 This page intentionally left blank.

ii DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 6 • SETUP
INTRODUCTION
This section provides generic setup and operation procedures for excitation systems using the DECS-
200. These procedures are provided only as a guide and are not intended as a replacement for the setup
and operation procedures required by a specific system. In these procedures, DECS-200 settings are
entered through the BESTCOMS interface. Therefore, a PC operating with BESTCOMS software will
need to be connected to the DECS-200 being configured. For information about using BESTCOMS, refer
to Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.

Equipment Required
The following equipment is required to perform the procedures presented here:
• Two-channel chart recorder or the DECS-200’s oscillography. First channel measures the generator
voltage at DECS-200 terminals A1 (E1) and A3 (E3). Second channel measures the field voltage at
DECS-200 terminals C5 (F+) and C6 (F–).
• Oscilloscope
• Personal computer (PC) running BESTCOMS. The minimum requirements for a PC running
BESTCOMS are provided in Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.
• Nine-pin serial communication cable to connect the DECS-200 to the PC.
Basler Electric Application Note 126, while not required, provides helpful information about paralleling
circuits. This application note is available for downloading (in PDF format) from the Basler Electric website
at www.basler.com.

System Data
Record your system ratings in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1. Generator and Field Ratings
Generator Ratings Exciter Field Ratings

Voltage: Vac No-Load Voltage: Vdc

Frequency: Hz No-Load Current: Adc

Reactive Power: kvar Full-Load Voltage: Vdc

Rotational Speed: rpm Full-Load Current: Adc

SETTINGS ENTRY
The DECS-200 settings entered on each BESTCOMS screen should be evaluated to ensure that they are
appropriate for the application. When entering settings, remember to press the Enter key to save
individual settings or click the SendToDECS button to save all of the settings on a screen.

System Configuration Screen

As shown in the following paragraphs, enter the desired settings on each tab of the Configuration screen.
Review those settings and enable the functions that apply.
System Options
Select the desired system options illustrated in Figure 6-1.
Select the limiter mode ................................................................................................................. _________
Select the sensing configuration................................................................................................... _________
Select the underfrequency mode.................................................................................................. _________
Select the nominal generator frequency....................................................................................... _________
Enable or disable voltage matching.............................................................................................. _________

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup 6-1

 Figure 6-1. System Options Tab
System Data
Enter the system PT and CT ratings and configure the internal and external tracking settings illustrated in
Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2. System Data Tab

Enter the generator PT primary voltage rating ............................................................................. ________

Enter the generator PT secondary voltage rating......................................................................... ________

Enter the generator CT primary current rating ............................................................................. ________

6-2 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

Enter the generator CT secondary current rating......................................................................... _________
Enter the bus PT primary voltage rating (if applicable) ................................................................ _________
Enter the bus PT secondary voltage rating (if applicable)............................................................ _________
Enable or disable internal tracking ............................................................................................... _________
Set the internal tracking delay (1 second is suggested)............................................................... _________
Set the internal tracking traverse rate (10 seconds is suggested) ............................................... _________
Enable or disable external tracking (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems).................. _________
Set the external tracking delay (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems)......................... _________
Set the external tracking traverse rate (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems) ............. _________
Rated Data
Enter the generator and exciter field ratings and exciter-to-generator pole ratio settings illustrated in
Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3. Rated Data Tab

Enter the rated generator terminal voltage................................................................................... _________

Enter the rated generator current ................................................................................................. _________
Enter the rated generator power factor ........................................................................................ _________
Enter the exciter-to-generator pole ratio....................................................................................... _________
Enter the rated exciter field voltage ............................................................................................. _________
Enter the rated exciter field current .............................................................................................. _________
Auxiliary Input
Configure the accessory input selections and settings illustrated in Figure 6-4.
Select either voltage or current as the accessory input type........................................................ _________
Select either inner loop (AVR/FCR) or outer loop (var/PF) as the summing type........................ _________
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for AVR mode................................................ _________
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for FCR mode................................................ _________
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup 6-3
 Figure 6-4. Auxiliary Input Tab

Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for var mode .................................................. ________
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for Power Factor mode.................................. ________
Enter the droop compensation level for paralleled generators or line-drop compensation.......... ________
Enter the cross-current compensation (reactive differential) gain for paralleled generators........ ________

Setting Adjustments Screen

Enter the desired settings and enable the desired functions on each tab of the BESTCOMS Setting
Adjustments screen. Figures 6-5 through 6-9 illustrate the settings of each System Configuration screen
tab.
AVR/FCR
Configure the AVR mode and FCR mode settings illustrated in Figure 6-5. During commissioning, review
setpoints unique for starting; especially review those for the FCR (manual) mode where the system would
be started at the no-load excitation value or less. If pre-position is used, set the pre-position values as
required.
Enter the AVR setpoint based on the generator terminal voltage ................................................ ________
Enter the minimum desired AVR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................. ________
Enter the maximum desired AVR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................ ________
Enter the AVR mode traverse rate ............................................................................................... ________
Enter the AVR mode pre-position setpoint ................................................................................... ________
Select either maintain or release as the AVR pre-position mode................................................. ________
Enter the field current setpoint for FCR mode.............................................................................. ________
Enter the minimum desired FCR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................. ________
Enter the maximum desired FCR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................ ________
Enter the FCR mode traverse rate ............................................................................................... ________

6-4 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 6-5. AVR/FCR Tab

Enter the FCR mode pre-position setpoint ................................................................................... _________

Select either maintain or release as the FCR pre-position mode................................................. _________
Var/PF
Configure the var mode and power factor mode settings illustrated in Figure 6-7. If var or PF mode is
enabled, the setpoint will be active only after transfer occurs into the specific mode because autotracking
always forces a null condition to any operating mode.

Figure 6-6. Var/PF Tab

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup 6-5

Enter the var mode setpoint ......................................................................................................... ________
Enter the minimum desired var mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................... ________
Enter the maximum desired var mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal .................. ________
Enter the var mode traverse rate.................................................................................................. ________
Enter the var mode pre-position setpoint...................................................................................... ________
Select either maintain or release as the var pre-position mode ................................................... ________
Set the voltage correction band for var and PF modes ................................................................ ________
Enter the PF mode setpoint.......................................................................................................... ________
Enter the limit for leading power factor ......................................................................................... ________
Enter the limit for lagging power factor ......................................................................................... ________
Enter the PF mode traverse rate .................................................................................................. ________
Enter the PF mode pre-position setpoint...................................................................................... ________
Select either maintain or release as the PF pre-position mode ................................................... ________
Startup
Configure the startup control, underfrequency, and voltage matching settings illustrated in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7. Startup Tab

Enter the soft-start voltage offset used during startup.................................................................. ________
Enter the soft-start time limit used during startup......................................................................... ________
Enter the corner frequency for generator underfrequency protection .......................................... ________
Enter the generator frequency slope for underfrequency protection............................................ ________
Enter the voltage matching band, expressed as a percent of the rated generator voltage.......... ________
Enter the ratio (percentage) of the generator PT output to the bus PT output............................. ________

6-6 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

OEL Type
Select either Summing Point or Takeover as the overexcitation limiter style. Select the desired OEL
setting selection option. OEL Type tab selections are illustrated in Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL Type Tab

Summing-Point OEL
If summing-point overexcitation limiting is enabled, configure the off- and on-line OEL settings illustrated
in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-9. OEL Summing Tab

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup 6-7

Enter the high-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the duration for high-level, off-line overexcitation limiting................................................... ________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ......................................... ________
Enter the high-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the duration for high-level, on-line overexcitation limiting................................................... ________
Enter the medium-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting .................................. ________
Enter the duration for medium-level, on-line overexcitation limiting............................................. ________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ......................................... ________
Takeover OEL
If takeover style overexcitation limiting is enabled, configure the off- and on-line OEL settings illustrated in
Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab

Enter the low-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ......................................... ________
Enter the high-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the time delay for off-line overexcitation limiting ................................................................. ________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ......................................... ________
Enter the high-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the time delay for on-line overexcitation limiting ................................................................. ________
UEL
Set the underexcitation limiter values based on the generator capability curve. Either internal or
customized UEL settings can be applied. When internal UEL settings are used, only one data point is
required. When customized UEL settings are used, up to five data coordinates may be entered to match a
specific generator curve. Figure 6-11 illustrates the settings of the UEL tab.

6-8 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 6-11. UEL Tab
SCL
Configure the stator current limiter settings illustrated in Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab

Enter the high-level current setpoint for stator current limiting..................................................... _________
Enter the duration for high-level stator current limiting................................................................. _________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for stator current limiting ...................................................... _________

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup 6-9

Protection/Relay Screen
Enter the desired settings and enable the desired functions on each tab of the BESTCOMS
Protection/Relay screen. Figures 6-13 through 6-16 illustrate the settings of each Protection/Relay screen
tab.
Options
Enable/disable the protection functions and configure the loss of sensing voltage settings illustrated in
Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13. Protection Options Tab

Enable or disable generator overvoltage protection..................................................................... ________
Enable or disable field overvoltage protection.............................................................................. ________
Enable or disable open exciter diode protection .......................................................................... ________
Enable or disable generator undervoltage protection................................................................... ________
Enable or disable field overcurrent protection .............................................................................. ________
Enable or disable shorted exciter diode protection ...................................................................... ________
Enable or disable loss of field protection...................................................................................... ________
Enable or disable loss of sensing voltage protection ................................................................... ________
Enter the time delay for loss of sensing annunciation .................................................................. ________
Enter the balanced loss of sensing threshold............................................................................... ________
Enter the unbalanced loss of sensing threshold........................................................................... ________
Enable or disable a transfer to FCR mode when loss of sensing is detected .............................. ________
Settings
Enter the protection settings illustrated in Figure 6-14. Only protection functions enabled on the Options
tab need to be configured here.
Enter the threshold for generator overvoltage protection ............................................................. ________
Enter the time delay for generator overvoltage protection ........................................................... ________

6-10 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

 Figure 6-14. Protection Settings Tab

Enter the threshold for field overvoltage protection...................................................................... _________

Enter the time delay for field overvoltage protection .................................................................... _________
Enter the percent of rated field current that indicates an open exciter diode............................... _________
Enter the percent of rated field current that disables open- and shorted-diode protection .......... _________
Enter the annunciation time delay for open exciter diode protection ........................................... _________
Enter the threshold for generator undervoltage protection........................................................... _________
Enter the time delay for generator undervoltage protection ......................................................... _________
Enter the threshold for field overcurrent protection ...................................................................... _________
Enter the time delay for field overcurrent protection..................................................................... _________
Enter the percent of rated field current that indicates a shorted exciter diode............................. _________
Enter the annunciation time delay for shorted exciter diode protection ....................................... _________
Enter the threshold for loss of field protection .............................................................................. _________
Enter the time delay for loss of field protection ............................................................................ _________
Relay Logic
Review the excitation system interconnection drawings and verify the relay configurations. Relay logic
settings for each of the three DECS-200 programmable outputs are contained on two tabs with identical
configuration options. Only the tab for Relays 1 and 2 is illustrated here (Figure 6-15). Table 6-2 lists all of
the available functions that can be assigned to the programmable outputs. Checkmarks may be placed in
Table 6-2 to identify the functions assigned to each relay output.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup 6-11

 Figure 6-15. Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab
Table 6-2. Programmable Output Function Assignments
Relay
Function 1 2 3
Generator overvoltage
Generator undervoltage
Loss of sensing voltage
Open exciter diode
Loss of field
Field overvoltage
Field overcurrent
Sensing input below 10 Hz
Shorted exciter diode
FCR mode
Upper setpoint limit
Lower setpoint limit
Overexcitation limit
Underexcitation limit
Underfrequency or V/Hz limit
Stator current limit

6-12 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

Relay Setting
Configure the contact status and type settings illustrated in Figure 6-16.
Select the Relay #1 contact status as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)................... _________
Configure the Relay #1 contact type as momentary, maintained, or latched............................... _________
If the Relay #2 contact type is momentary, enter the open/closed contact duration.................... _________
Select the Relay #2 contact status as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)................... _________
Configure the Relay #2 contact type as momentary, maintained, or latched............................... _________
If the Relay #2 contact type is momentary, enter the open/closed contact duration.................... _________
Select the Relay #2 contact status as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)................... _________
Configure the Relay #2 contact type as momentary, maintained, or latched............................... _________
If the Relay #2 contact type is momentary, enter the open/closed contact duration.................... _________

Figure 6-16. Relay Setting Tab

OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE NOT SPINNING

In the following tests, control of the machine is demonstrated via BESTCOMS, front panel HMI, and user-
supplied, remote switches. These tests ensure that the machine is not stressed because of incorrect
wiring or faulty components. The parameters listed here are only temporary, initial settings.

Start/Stop Tests
Check the operation of the following start and stop controls.
BESTCOMS Metering Screen, Operation tab .............................................................................. _________

DECS-200 front panel .................................................................................................................. _________

Remote switches .......................................................................................................................... _________
With excitation off, check AVR/FCR transfer from the BESTCOMS, the front panel, and
remote switches............................................................................................................................ _________
Verify transfer indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI, or
BESTCOMS interface................................................................................................................... _________
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup 6-13
Check the raise and lower limits................................................................................................... ________
Verify raise/lower limit indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI,
or BESTCOMS interface .............................................................................................................. ________

Control Gain Settings

Configure the initial gain settings.
Set the generator no-load setpoint in FCR mode (20% of exciter rated current recommended). ________
On the Control Gain screen, enter 200 in the FCR loop gain settings field ................................. ________
Enter the following recommended gain settings for OEL, UEL, and Var/PF.
Set OEL KI at 3............................................................................................................................. ________
Set OEL Kg at 5............................................................................................................................ ________
Set UEL KI at 3 ............................................................................................................................. ________
Set UEL Kg at 5 ............................................................................................................................ ________
Set var/PF KI at 3 ......................................................................................................................... ________
Set var/PF Kg at 5 ........................................................................................................................ ________

PID Settings
On the Control Gain screen, click the tool bar PID button to open the PID window. (The Control Gain
screen Stability Range setting must be 21.) Use the PID window to select the correct PID values based
on generator time constant T’do and exciter time constant Te. For more information about PID settings,
refer to Section 5, BESTCOMS Software, PID Window.

NOTE
If proper startup is not achieved, increase the value of loop gain (Kg) for AVR
and FCR modes.

The following suggested settings may be used for AVR and FCR modes when the generator and exciter
time constants are unknown.
Set KP at 80.................................................................................................................................. ________
Set KI at 20 ................................................................................................................................... ________
Set KD at 15 ................................................................................................................................. ________
Set AVR Kg at 7............................................................................................................................ ________
Set TD at 0.01............................................................................................................................... ________
Set FCR Kg at 400........................................................................................................................ ________
Verify transfer indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI or BESTCOMS

OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE SPINNING

For off-line tests with the turbine spinning, the generator circuit breaker is open.
FCR Mode
Initial testing should be conducted in FCR (manual) mode and minimum generated voltage.
Place the DECS-200 in FCR mode .............................................................................................. ________
Place the Start/Stop switch in the Start position........................................................................... ________
Generator output voltage should build to a percentage of the rated voltage. (The FCR setpoint was set at
20% of the no-load excitation current in a previous step.) ........................................................... ________
Increase the exciter field rated current to 75% of current............................................................. ________

6-14 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

The generator output voltage should build to a percentage of the rated voltage......................... _________
Use an oscilloscope to check the field voltage for proper output (see Figure 6-17) .................... _________

Figure 6-17. Field Voltage Output Waveform

Use a voltmeter to check for correct voltage at generator sensing voltage terminals A1 (E1),
A2 (E2), and A3 (E3) .................................................................................................................... _________
Measure the PT secondary voltages ............................................................................................ _________
Use the Raise/Lower control to raise the terminal voltage to the rated generator level............... _________
Place the Start/Stop switch in the Stop position and let the generator voltage decrease to
the residual level........................................................................................................................... _________
Place the Start/Stop switch in the Start position to initiate buildup again in FCR mode .............. _________
Record the voltage buildup characteristic as it reaches full, rated output .................................... _________
Using the BESTCOMS Analysis Screen, perform 5% step change in FCR mode ...................... _________
Decrease value, then increase the value. Observe stable performance with chart recorder....... _________
Note the Overshoot and settling time. (The FCR output should be very stable.)......................... _________
Verify that the AVR setpoint tracks the FCR setpoint, then transfer. During this test, use the

NOTE
In the following steps, verify that, if the pre-position setpoint is enabled, the
setpoint changes to the assigned value.

Verify that FCR autotracking follows, and is nulled to AVR, then transfer ................................... _________
Use a chart recorder or BESTCOMS oscillography to perform a step response in AVR mode .. _________
Review the PID numbers.............................................................................................................. _________
On the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System Configuration screen, turn all
limiters off ..................................................................................................................................... _________
Perform a 2% voltage step response and record performance to verify stability ......................... _________
Adjust the PID values until desired performance is achieved. If performance appears stable,
repeat step change at 5%............................................................................................................. _________

NOTE
Assuming Te (exciter field) is known (as applicable for exciter field voltage
regulator applications), increasing Kg will decrease the response time of the
generator. See Figure 6-21.

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup 6-15

 Figure 6-18. KG Gain Effect on Generator Performance

When individual adjustment is needed to further refine performance, Figures 6-22 through 6-25
demonstrate the effect that PID changes have for additional control. These figures have a one second
major division.
In Figure 6-22, the generator voltage exhibits one under-damp (overshoot) and one over-damp
(undershoot) before settling. The total time (five seconds) is too long. Here KP (proportional gain) needs
to be increased.

Figure 6-19. Insufficient Proportional Gain

Figure 6-23 demonstrates that the terminal voltage has prolonged instability after a voltage step change
because there is too much integral gain (I). Integral gain value needs to be decreased.

Figure 6-20. Prolonged Instability

6-16 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

In Figure 6-24, less overshoot is desired, KD (derivative gain) is increased.

Figure 6-21. Insufficient Derivative Gain

Figure 6-25 illustrates the final solution. Increased KD (derivative gain) decreases voltage overshoot.

Figure 6-22. Final Solution Step Response

Place the Start/Stop Switch in the Stop position .......................................................................... _________

Place the system in AVR mode .................................................................................................... _________
Monitor the generator voltage soft start time................................................................................ _________
Place the Start/Stop Switch in the Start position .......................................................................... _________
Use the Raise/Lower control to increase the terminal voltage to the setpoint ............................. _________

EXCITATION PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

In this performance evaluation, temporarily settings will be used to enable the testing of excitation
performance without stressing the machine or exceeding ancillary protection device settings. Procedures
are provided that will allow you to set your final operating values. This evaluation is a continuation of the
previous tests.

Off-Line Excitation Limiter Operation

In this test, with the generator set below the rated voltage output, the AVR setpoint will be set above the
maximum setting and the system should annunciate an alarm. If an alarm is not annuciated, the OEL gain
(KI and Kg) may be set too low. If an alarm is annunciated and the system oscillates, the OEL gain, (KI
and Kg) may be set too high.
Enable the Off-Line Overexcitation Limiter (OEL) ........................................................................ _________
Determine the field current required to reach 105% of the rated generator voltage. ................... _________
Set the off-line OEL for a value equal to the no load field current................................................ _________
Lower the terminal voltage to 10% below rated ........................................................................... _________
To speed performance in the following test, you may increase the OEL gain (KI and Kg terms).
On the AVR/FCR tab of the BESTCOMS Setting Adjustments screen, adjust the AVR setpoint
to 110% of the rated output. (the AVR Max setting should remain at 105%.).............................. _________

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup 6-17

If an output relay is programmed to alarm, the output, BESTCOMS, front panel HMI, and
any remote indicator should annunciate the alarm....................................................................... ________
Reset the AVR setpoint to the rated output.................................................................................. ________

Limit and Protection Check

In this test, operation of generator overvoltage protection, generator undervoltage protection, field
overvoltage protection, and field overcurrent protection will be verified.
Review the overvoltage protection settings in BESTCOMS......................................................... ________
Reduce the Generator Overvoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold .................................... ________
Verify that all alarms and annunciation function as programmed ................................................ ________
Reset the generator Overvoltage Level setting to the desired value ........................................... ________
Raise the Generator Undervoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold ..................................... ________
Verify that all alarms and annunciations function as programmed............................................... ________
Reset the Generator Undervoltage Level setting to the desired value......................................... ________
Reduce the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold................................. ________
Verify that all alarms and annunciations function as programmed............................................... ________
Reduce the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting to the desired value .................................... ________
Reduce the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting to the alarm threshold ................................. ________
Verify all alarms and annunciations function as programmed...................................................... ________
Reset the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting to the desired value ....................................... ________

Parallel Operation, Generator On Line

In this test, the generator is connected to the bus and the phase relationship between the current and
sensed voltage is checked. If the polarity of the CT is incorrect, a shorting terminal block can be used to
reverse the CT polarity. If sensed voltage has the wrong phasing, the generator breaker must be opened,
and the wiring corrected. In the following procedures, overexcitation and underexcitation protection is
exercised, and var and power factor performance evaluations are conducted at levels that will not stress
the machine. For more information about paralleling circuits, download Application Note 126 from the
Basler Electric website at www.basler.com.
Phase Relationship Test
Transfer to FCR mode .................................................................................................................. ________
Parallel the generator with the bus ............................................................................................... ________
Set the machine kilowatt level at approximately 25% of the machine rating at 0 vars................. ________
Check for phase shift at the voltage and current sensing inputs of the DECS-200.
The B-phase current should lag the sensed voltage (between E1 and E3) by 90°. If the
phase relationship is correct, proceed with testing. If the phase relationship is incorrect,
troubleshoot the system, resolve the problem, and retest as appropriate before transferring
to AVR mode. ............................................................................................................................... ________
Verify that the AVR setpoint is nulled to the FCR setpoint ........................................................... ________
Verify that all null status indicators provide the null indication ..................................................... ________
Verify that AVR Pre-position mode is disabled or that the external pre-position contacts
are open........................................................................................................................................ ________
In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to Manual mode if the excitation voltage increases
suddenly.
Transfer to AVR ............................................................................................................................ ________

6-18 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

OEL Test
Disable overexcitation limiting on the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System
Configuration screen .................................................................................................................... _________
Set the three on-line, OEL current limits at 15% above the no-load field current, with
a 5 second time delay................................................................................................................... _________
Using a chart recorder, prepare to check the OEL response time. If the response time is too slow,
increase the OEL gain (KI and Kg terms) and repeat the test.
Increase field excitation until the field current reaches 125% of the no load field current setting _________
Enable OEL .................................................................................................................................. _________
Verify that the response time is within specified limits ................................................................. _________
Enter final OEL values.................................................................................................................. _________
UEL Test
Disable underexcitation limiting on the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System
Configuration screen .................................................................................................................... _________
Set the UEL var limit for 5% vars into the generator .................................................................... _________
Adjust the var level into the generator for 15% at 25% load ........................................................ _________
Perform a step response into the UEL limit by enabling underexcitation limiting on the System
Options tab of the BESTCOMS System Configuration screen .................................................... _________
Verify stable performance and speed of response....................................................................... _________
If the response time is too slow, increase the UEL gain (KI and Kg terms) and repeat the test.. _________
Verify stable performance of the UEL by testing the machine from 25 through 100%
real-power loading, underexcited ................................................................................................. _________
Increase the excitation above the UEL limit ................................................................................. _________
Enter the final UEL values ............................................................................................................ _________
Var Test (If Applicable)
Verify that the var setpoint is nulled to the AVR setpoint ............................................................. _________
Verify that all null status indicators provide a null indication ........................................................ _________
Verify that the var Pre-Position mode is disabled or the external pre-position contacts are open_________
In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to AVR if the excitation voltage increases suddenly.
Transfer to var mode .................................................................................................................... _________
Set the kilowatt level for 25% output ............................................................................................ _________
Adjust the var level to 30% of rated.............................................................................................. _________
Monitor the exciter field voltage to determine performance while performing the following step.
Using BESTCOMS, perform 5% step response stability test....................................................... _________
If necessary, increase the var gain, (KI and Kg terms) to decrease the response time.
Repeat the test. ............................................................................................................................
Power Factor Test (If Applicable)
Verify that the PF mode setpoint is nulled to the var mode setpoint ............................................ _________
Verify that all null status indicators provide a null indication ........................................................ _________
Verify that PF Pre-Position mode is disabled or external pre-position contacts are open ........... _________
In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to AVR mode if the excitation voltage increases
suddenly.
Transfer to PF............................................................................................................................... _________

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Setup 6-19

Adjust PF for 0.9, lagging ............................................................................................................. ________
Perform a step response by changing PF setpoint to 0.85, lagging to determine stability .......... ________
If necessary, increase the PF gain (KI and Kg terms) to decrease the response time.
Repeat the test.. ........................................................................................................................... ________

Conclusion Of Testing
Configure the excitation system with the required parameters. Once satisfactory performance is achieved,
save all information to EEPROM.

6-20 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 7 • MODBUS™ COMMUNICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 7 • MODBUS™ COMMUNICATION ......................................................................................... 7-1

INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 7-1
DECS-200 MODBUS PROTOCOL ........................................................................................................ 7-1
MESSAGE STRUCTURE ...................................................................................................................... 7-1
Device Address Field ......................................................................................................................... 7-1
Function Code Field ........................................................................................................................... 7-2
Data Block Field ................................................................................................................................. 7-2
Error Check Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-2
SERIAL TRANSMISSION DETAILS ...................................................................................................... 7-2
Message Framing and Timing Considerations................................................................................... 7-3
Error Handling and Exception Responses ......................................................................................... 7-3
COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................... 7-3
DETAILED MESSAGE QUERY AND RESPONSE................................................................................ 7-4
Read Holding Registers ..................................................................................................................... 7-4
Preset Multiple Registers ................................................................................................................... 7-4
Preset Single Register (Write Single Holding Register)..................................................................... 7-5
Error Response .................................................................................................................................. 7-5
Loop Back Diagnostic Test (FC= 8) with Diagnostic Sub-function, Return Query Data .................... 7-6
Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Restart Communications Option............. 7-6
Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Force Slave to Listen Only Mode ........... 7-6
DATA FORMATS ................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Generic Types UI8 and I8 .................................................................................................................. 7-7
Generic Types UI16 and I16 .............................................................................................................. 7-7
Generic Types UI32 and I32 .............................................................................................................. 7-7
Floating Point (R23_32) Data Format ................................................................................................ 7-8
CRC ERROR CHECK ............................................................................................................................ 7-9
DECS-200 MODBUS REGISTER SPACE............................................................................................. 7-9
DECS-200 REGISTER TABLE ............................................................................................................ 7-10
Holding Registers for Information Category C1 ............................................................................... 7-10
Holding Registers for Information Category C2 ............................................................................... 7-12
Holding Registers for Information Category C3 ............................................................................... 7-14
Holding Registers for Information Category C4 ............................................................................... 7-14
Holding Registers for Information Category C5 ............................................................................... 7-15
Holding Registers for Information Category C6 ............................................................................... 7-16
Holding Registers for Information Category C7 ............................................................................... 7-19
Holding Registers for Information Category C8 ............................................................................... 7-19
Holding Registers for Information Category C9 ............................................................................... 7-21
Holding Registers for Information Category C10 ............................................................................. 7-22
Holding Registers for Information Category C11 ............................................................................. 7-23
Holding Registers for Information Category C12 ............................................................................. 7-23
Holding Registers for Information Category C13 ............................................................................. 7-26
Holding Registers for Information Category C14 ............................................................................. 7-27
Holding Registers for Information Category C15 ............................................................................. 7-27

Tables
Table 7-1. DECS-200 Communication Settings ........................................................................................ 7-2
Table 7-2. Timing Considerations for 10 Character Bits (8 Data Bits + 1 Start Bit + 1 Stop Bit) .............. 7-3
Table 7-3. Supported Exception Response Codes ................................................................................... 7-3
Table 7-4. Generic Data Types and Description ....................................................................................... 7-7
Table 7-5. HR 44005 Contents.................................................................................................................. 7-7
Table 7-6. HR 47003 Mapping .................................................................................................................. 7-7

9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 ModbusTM Communication i

Table 7-7. Typical Mapping ....................................................................................................................... 7-8
Table 7-8. Floating Point Format ............................................................................................................... 7-8
Table 7-9. Number 123 In Floating Point Format ...................................................................................... 7-8
Table 7-10. Information Category Summary ............................................................................................. 7-9
Table 7-11. Information Category C1 (Product Information) ................................................................... 7-10
Table 7-12. Information Category C2 (Metering)..................................................................................... 7-12
Table 7-13. Information Category C3 (Reporting) ................................................................................... 7-14
Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters)................................ 7-14
Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters) ..................................................... 7-15
Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters).................................................................. 7-17
Table 7-17. Information Category C7 (Start-up Parameters) .................................................................. 7-19
Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters) ................................................................... 7-20
Table 7-19. Information Category C9 (Control Loop Gain Parameters).................................................. 7-21
Table 7-20. Information Category C10 (Protective Functions Parameters) ............................................ 7-22
Table 7-21. Information Category C11 (Calibration related Parameters)................................................ 7-23
Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters).................................................................... 7-23
Table 7-23. Information Category C13 (Communications Parameters) .................................................. 7-26
Table 7-24. Information Category C14 (Front Panel Metering Configuration Parameters)..................... 7-27
Table 7-25. Information Category C15 (Control System Configuration Parameters Group II)................ 7-27

ii DECS-200 ModbusTM Communication 9360100990 Rev G

SECTION 7 • MODBUS™ COMMUNICATION
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the Modbus™ communication protocol employed by the DECS-200 and how to
exchange information with the DECS-200 over a Modbus™ network. The DECS-200 communicates by
emulating a subset of the ModiconTM 984 Programmable Controller.

DECS-200 MODBUS PROTOCOL

Modbus communications use a master-slave technique in which only the master can initiate a transaction
called a query. When appropriate, a slave (DECS-200 ) responds to the query. When a Modbus master
communicates with a slave, information is provided or requested by the master.
Information residing in the DECS-200 is grouped characteristically in categories. The following
information categories are maintained by the DECS-200:
C1 - Product Information Registers
C2 - Metering Registers
C3 - Reporting Registers
C4 - Control System Configuration Parameters Registers Group 1
C5 - Operating Mode Parameter Registers
C6 - Setpoints Parameter Registers
C7 - Startup Parameter Registers
C8 - Limiter Parameter Registers
C9 - Gains Registers
C10 - Protective Functions Parameter Registers
C11 - Calibration Parameter Registers
C12 - Relay Parameter Registers
C13 - Communications Parameter Registers
C14 - Front Panel Metering Configuration Registers
C15 - Control System Configuration Parameters Registers Group 2
All supported data can be read or written as specified in the register table. Abbreviations are used in the
register table to indicate the register access type. Register access types are read/write (RW) and read
only (R -).
All categories except Product Information (C1), Metering (C2), Reporting (C3) and Calibration (C11) can
generally be written via a Modbus message as well as read. Categories C1 and C2 are strictly read-only.
(Categories C3 and C11 are currently not supported and therefore cannot be read or written.)
When a slave receives a query, the slave responds by either supplying the requested data to the master
or performing the requested action. A slave device never initiates communications on the Modbus
network and will always generate a response to the query unless certain error conditions occur. The
DECS-200 is designed to communicate on the Modbus network only as a slave device.
A master can only query slaves individually. If a query requests actions unable to be performed by the
slave, the slave response message contains an exception response code defining the error detected.

MESSAGE STRUCTURE
Master initiated queries and DECS-200 (slave) responses share the same message structure. Each
message is comprised of four message fields. They are:
• Device Address (1 byte)
• Function Code (1 byte)
• Data Block (n bytes)
• Error Check field (2 bytes)
Device Address Field
The device address field contains the unique Modbus address of the slave being queried. The addressed
slave repeats the address in the device address field of the response message. This field is one byte.

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-1

Modbus protocol limits a device address from 1 to 247. The address is user-selectable at installation, and
can be altered during real-time operation.

Function Code Field

The function code field in the query message defines the action to be taken by the addressed slave. This
field is echoed in the response message and is altered by setting the most significant bit (MSB) of the
field to 1 if the response is an error response. This field is 1 byte.
The DECS-200 maps all registers into the ModiconTM 984 holding register address space (4XXXX) and
supports the following function codes:
- READ OUTPUT REGISTERS (function code 3),
- PRESET SINGLE REGISTER WRITE (function code 6)
- PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS (function code 16), and
- LOOPBACK DIAGNOSTIC TEST (function code 8) with diagnostic sub-functions:
- Return Query Data (diagnostic code 0),
- Restart Comm. option (diagnostic code 1), and
- Force Slave To Listen Only Mode (LOM, diagnostic code 4).
DECS-200 Modbus performs all of the above functions when a Modbus message has its unique address
which is numbered from 1 to 247. DECS-200 also recognizes a broadcast (group) address of 0. Only
functions 16 and 8 are recognized as valid for broadcast. The DECS-200 does not send a response
message for a broadcast query.
In listen-only mode (LOM), received data is monitored (but no responses are transmitted). The only query
that will be recognized and processed while in LOM is a maintenance restart command (function code 8,
diagnostic code 1).

Data Block Field

The query data block contains additional information needed by the slave to perform the requested
function. The response data block contains data collected by the slave for the queried function. An error
response will substitute an exception response code for the data block. The length of this field varies with
each query. See the paragraphs on Register Definitions in this manual for interpretation of register data.

Error Check Field

The error check field provides a method for the slave to validate the integrity of the query message
contents and allows the master to confirm there validity. This field is 2 bytes.

SERIAL TRANSMISSION DETAILS

A standard Modbus network offers two transmission modes for communication: ASCII or Remote
Terminal Unit (RTU). The DECS-200 supports only the RTU mode via rear RS-485 serial interface.
Communication settings for the DECS-200 Rear RS-485 port are listed in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1. DECS-200 Communication Settings
Default
Setting Programmable Y(Yes) / N(No) Value Value Range
Baud Rate Y 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200
Data Size in Bits N 8 N/A
Parity Y None ‘N’=None, ‘O’=Odd, ‘E’=Even
Stop Bits Y 2 1 or 2
Modbus Slave Y 247 0 for broadcast, 1 to 247 for slave
Address
Modbus Y 10 ms From 0 to 200 ms in increments of
Response Delay 10 ms
Time in ms
Communication settings are user-selectable and can be set at installation and altered during real-time
operation.

7-2 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

Message Framing and Timing Considerations
When receiving a message, the DECS-200 requires an inter-byte latency of 3.5 character times before
considering the message complete.
Once a valid query is received, the DECS-200 waits a specified amount of time as specified in the
Modbus Response Delay Time Register (48108) before responding. This Register contains a value from
0 to 200 milliseconds. The default value is 10 milliseconds. The user may set the remote delay time
parameter to 0 to minimize response latency.
Table 7-2 provides the response message transmission time (in milliseconds) and 3.5 character times (in
milliseconds) for the maximum response message length (225 characters), response to a read query for
125 points and various baud rates.
Table 7-2. Timing Considerations For 10 Character Bits (8 Data Bits + 1 Start Bit + 1 Stop Bit)
1 Character 3.5 Characters Max. Read Register Response Message
Baud Rate Time (ms) Time (ms) (255 characters) Transmission Time (ms)
1,200 8.33 29.17 2,124.15
2,400 4.17 14.58 1,063.35
4,800 2.083 7.292 531.165
9,600 1.0417 3.645 265.6335
19,200 0.52083 1.823 132.812

Error Handling and Exception Responses

Any query received that contains a nonexistent device address, a framing error, or CRC error is ignored.
No response is transmitted. Queries addressed to a DECS-200 with an unsupported function code,
unsupported register references or illegal values in the data block result in an error response message
with an exception response code.
Each error response message consists of a slave (DECS-200) address, function code with the high order
bit set, error code and error check (CRC) field.
The exception response error codes supported by the DECS-200 are provided in Table 7-3.
Table 7-3. Supported Exception Response Codes
Code Name Meaning
01 Illegal Function The query Function/Sub-function Code is unsupported; query read of more
than 125 registers; query “preset multiple registers” of more than 100
registers

02 Illegal Data A register referenced in the data block does not support queried read/write;
Address For Function Codes 3 and 16 additionally:
1. Starting Register address is mapped to DECS-200 Modbus address
space but is not referenced to the highest order 16 bits of the assigned
application data (see explanation in 2.7 Data Formats), and
2. The number of registers is too small to hold entire value of all data
(variables) assigned to those registers (see explanation in 2.7 Data
Formats).
03 Illegal Data A preset register data block contains an incorrect number of bytes or one or
Value more data values out of range.

COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

The DECS-200 RS-485 physical interface consists of three positions of a terminal strip with locations for
Send/Receive A (A), Send/Receive B (B) and Signal Ground (C).

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-3

DETAILED MESSAGE QUERY AND RESPONSE
A detailed description of DECS-200 supported message queries and responses are provided in the
following paragraphs.

Read Holding Registers

Query
This query message requests a register or block of registers to be read. The data block contains the
starting register address and the quantity of registers to be read. A register address of N will read holding
register N+1.

Device Function Starting Starting No. of No. of CRC CRC

Code = Address Address Registers Registers Low High
Address
03 High Low High Low

The number of registers cannot exceed 125 without causing an error response with the exception code
for an illegal function.
Response
The response message contains the data queried. The data block contains the block length in bytes
followed by the data for each requested register. For each requested register, there is one Data Hi and
one Data Lo. Attempting to read an unused register or a register that does not support a read results in
an error response with the exception code for an illegal data address. If the query is a broadcast (device
address = 0), no response message is returned.
Maximum response message length obtained for query of 125 registers is 5 + (125 x 2) = 255 bytes.

Device Function Byte Data Data For each Data Data CRC CRC
Address Code = 03 Count High Low requested High Low Low High
register
250 First First Data High Last Last
max. queried queried and data queried queried
register register Low register register
High Low High Low

Preset Multiple Registers

A preset multiple registers query could address multiple registers in one slave or multiple slaves. If the
query is broadcast (device address = 0), no response is required.
Query
A Preset Multiple Registers query message requests a register or block of registers to be written. The
data block contains the starting address and the quantity of registers to be written, followed by the Data
Block byte count and data. The DECS-200 will perform the write when the device address is the same as
the DECS-200 remote address or when the device address is 0. A device address is 0 for a broadcast
query.
A register address of N will write Holding Register N+1.
All Modbus Generic Data Formats can be loaded by this function (see Data Formats).
No data will be written if any of the following exceptions occur:
• Queries to write to Read Only or unsupported registers result in an error response with an exception
code of Illegal Data Address.
• Queries attempting to write more than 100 registers cause an error response with an exception code
of Illegal Function.
• An incorrect Byte Count will result in an error response with an exception code of “Illegal Function.”
• A query to write an illegal value (out of range) to a register results in an error response with an
exception code of Illegal Data Value.
• Query Starting Register address is mapped to DECS-200 Modbus address space but is not
referenced to the lower order 16 bits of the assigned application data. (See explanation in Data
Formats.)

7-4 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

• The number of query registers is too small to hold entire value of all data (variables) assigned to
those registers. (See explanation in Data Formats.)
Query message format is:
Device Address
Function Code = 10 (hex)
Starting Address High
Starting Address Low
Number of Registers High (total number of registers to be loaded)
Number of Registers Low
Byte Count (total number of registers to be loaded times 2)
Data High
Data Low
...
Data High
Data Low
CRC Error Check (Lo, Hi)
Note: The maximum length of a Preset Multiple Registers Query is 9 + (100 x 2) = 209 bytes.
Response
The response message echoes the starting address and the number of registers. There is no response
message when the query is a broadcast (device address of 0).
Device Function Starting Starting Number of Number of CRC CRC
Address Code = Address Address Registers Registers Low High
10 (hex) High Low High
Low

Preset Single Register (Write Single Holding Register)

A Preset Single Register query message requests a single register to be written. The DECS-200 will
perform the write when the device address is the same as the DECS-200’s remote address.
Query
Device Address
Function Code = 06 (hex)
Address Hi
Address Lo
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check
The response message echoes the Query message after the register has been altered.

Error Response
Data will cease to be written if any of the following exceptions occur.
• Queries to write to Read Only registers result in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal Data
Address.”
• A query to write an out of range value to a register results in an error response with Exception Code of
“Illegal Data Value.”
There are several instances of registers that are grouped together to collectively represent a single
numerical DECS-200 data value (i.e., floating point data and 32-bit integer data). A query to write a
subset of such a register group will result in an error response with Exception Code “Illegal Data
Address”.

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-5

 NOTE
Variables changed by this function will not be directly saved to nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). If
specific categories (one or more) of data have to be saved to EEPROM, then Holding Register 48161
(Data Id=13001, variable “SaveCommand”) has to be preset after a category has been changed. The
exceptions to this rule are only those Holding Registers dealing with communication port RS-485.
They will be changed and immediately saved to EEPROM with the function FC16.

Loop Back Diagnostic Test (FC= 8) with Diagnostic Sub-function, Return Query Data
This query contains data to be returned (looped back) in the response. The response and query
messages should be identical. If the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is
returned.
Function Sub-function Sub-function Data High Data Low CRC CRC
Device Code = High Low
Address XX XX Low High
08 (hex) 00 00 (don’t care) (don’t care)

Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Restart Communications Option
This query causes the remote communications function of the DECS-200 to restart, terminating an active
listen only mode of operation. No effect is made upon primary relay operations. Only the remote
communications function is affected. If the query is a broadcast (device address of 0), no response
message is returned.
If the DECS-200 receives this query while in the listen only mode (LOM), no response message is
generated. Otherwise, a response message identical to the query message is transmitted prior to the
communications restart.

Function Sub-function Sub-function Data High Data Low CRC CRC

Device Code = High Low
Address XX XX Low High
08 (hex) 00 01 (don’t care) (don’t care)

Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Force Slave to Listen Only Mode
This query forces the addressed DECS-200 to the listen only mode for Modbus communications, isolating
it from other devices on the network.
While in Listen Only Mode (LOM), received data is monitored (but no responses are transmitted). The
only query that will be recognized and processed while in LOM is a maintenance restart command
(function Code 8, diagnostic code 1).
When the DECS-200 receives the restart communications query, the Listen Only mode is terminated.
Device Function Sub-function Sub-function Data High Data Low CRC CRC
Address Code = High Low XX XX Low High
08 (hex) 00 04 (don’t care) (don’t care)

DATA FORMATS
DECS-200 data does not need to be converted into any special format for transmission over a Modbus
network.
Modbus Registers hold original DECS-200 data of the generic (built-in) data types listed in Table 7-4.

7-6 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

 Table 7-4. Generic Data Types and Description
Data Total number
Generi Size of Modbus
c Data Corresponding built-in data in Registers to
Types type (Storage Format) Data Range bytes hold data
UI8 UCHAR: unsigned character 0 to 255 1 1
UI6 UINT16: unsigned short integer 0 to 65,535 2 1
UI32 UINT32: unsigned long integer 0 to 4,294,967,295 4 2
I8 CHAR: signed character -128 to 127 1 1
I16 INT16: signed short integer -32,768 to 32,767 2 1
I32 INT32: signed long integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 4 2
-37
R32_23 FLOAT: floating point number From approximately 8.43 x 10 4 2
to 3.38 x 1038

It should be noted that an ASCII string is not a DECS-200 generic data type. An ASCII string will be
considered as a sequence of “(string length + 1)” data of I8 type, and for its transmission via a Modbus
network “(string length + 1)” holding registers are needed.
DECS-200 data is copied to assigned Holding Register(s) [HR] by the rules presented in the following
paragraphs.

Generic Types UI8 and I8

Data of type UI8 or I8 is copied to one holding register (HR). The high (first) HR byte always contains 0,
and second (low) HR byte contains the data.
Example:
Assume that the value of UI8 type data is 0x56, and that the data is mapped to HR 44005.
The content of HR 44005 will be as listed in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5. HR 44005 Contents
HR 44004 HR 44005 HR 44005 HR 44006
Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte
... 0x00 0x56 ...

Generic Types UI16 and I16

Data of type UINT16 or INT16 is saved in 1 one holding register. The high data byte is copied to the high
HR byte and the low data byte to the low HR byte.
Example:
Assume that the DECS-200 UINT16 or INT16 type data value of 0xF067 is mapped to HR 47003.
Data is copied to HR 47003 as shown in Table 7-6.
Table 7-6. HR 47003 Mapping
HR 47002 HR 47003 HR 47003 HR 47004
Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte
... 0xF0 0x67 ...

Generic Types UI32 and I32

Data of type UI32 or I32 is 4 bytes long. The Modbus 4-byte long data generic types use two consecutive
registers to represent a data value. The lower numbered holding register contains the low order 16 bits,
Low Order word [LO w] and the higher numbered holding register contains the higher order 16 bits,
Higher Order word [HO w].

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-7

Example:
The UI32 data type, value is 0xE0234567 and is mapped to two Holding registers (such as 45003 and
45004) as shown in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7. Typical Mapping
Register 45003 45004
Hexadecimal 4567 E023
Binary 0100 0101 0110 0111 1110 0000 0010 0011

HR 45002 HR 45003 HR 45003 HR 45004 HR 45004 HR 45005

LO byte HO byte LO byte HO byte LO byte HO byte
... 45 67 E0 23 ...

Floating Point (R23_32) Data Format

The specific floating-point format matches the floating-point format used for Modicon 984-8 family of
programmable controllers.

Its representation in bit format is:

S EEE EEEE E MMM MMMM MMMM MMMM MMMM
MMMM
byte 3 byte 2 byte 1 Byte 0
where the “S” is the sign bit for the floating point value: 1 if negative and 0 if positive; The “E” field is the
two’s complement exponent biased by 127 decimal; The “M” field is the 23-bit normalized mantissa. The
most-significant bit of the mantissa is always assumed to be 1 and is not explicitly stored yielding an
effective precision of 24 bits.
The value of the floating-point number is obtained by multiplying the binary mantissa times two raised to the
power of the unbiased exponent. The assumed bit of the binary mantissa has the value of 1.0 with the
remaining 23 bits providing a fractional value.
Table 7-8 shows the floating-point format.
Table 7-8. Floating Point Format
Sign 2's Complement Of (Exponent + 127) Mantissa
1 bit 8 bits 23 bits

The floating point format allows a maximum value of 3.38 x 1038.

Note that bytes 0 and 1 of the floating-point value are stored in the lower numbered register and bytes 2
and 3 are contained in the higher numbered register.
For example: Number 123 in floating point format is mapped to two Holding registers (such as 45005 and
45006) as shown in Table 7-9.
Table 7-9. Number 123 in Floating Point Format
Register 45005 45006
Hexadecimal 0000 42F6
Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 0100 0010 1111 0110

CAUTION
For DECS-200 Modbus, two consecutive holding registers which are mapped to any of
the 4-byte generic data types, are considered to be linked together as one atomic,
indivisible unit of information which can be read or written by Modbus message only as
one entity (that is, one cannot be read or written without the other).

7-8 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

CRC ERROR CHECK
This field contains a two-byte CRC value for transmission error detection. The master first calculates the
CRC and appends it to the query message. The DECS-200 recalculates the CRC value for the received
query and performs a comparison to the query CRC value to determine if a transmission error has
occurred. If so, no response message is generated. If no transmission error has occurred, the slave
calculates a new CRC value for the response message and appends it to the message for transmission.
The CRC calculation is performed using all bytes of the device address, function code and data block
fields. A 16-bit CRC register is initialized to all 1's. Then, each eight-bit byte of the message is used in the
following algorithm.
First, exclusive-OR the message byte with the low-order byte of the CRC-register. The result, stored in
the CRC-register, will then be right-shifted eight times. The CRC-register MSB is zero-filled with each
shift. After each shift, the CRC-register LSB is examined. If the LSB a 1, the CRC-register is then
exclusive-ORed with the fixed polynomial value A001 (hex) prior to the next shift. Once all bytes of the
message have undergone the above algorithm, the CRC-register will contain the message CRC value to
be placed in the error check field.

DECS-200 MODBUS REGISTER SPACE

Modbus Address space from 40000 to 49999 refers to Functions Code 3, 6 and 16. The DECS-200 uses
address space from 47001 to 48250 (1250 registers). This address space is divided into 14 areas
referred to as information categories. Table 7-10 provides a statistical summary for each information
category.
Table 7-10. Information Category Summary
Total # of Holding Data Types
Reserved Register Number Mapped To
Information Information Holding Address Of Used Access Registers (Total #
Category ID Category Registers Space Registers Right Of Variables)
C1 Product 250 47001 to 63 R UCHAR: 63
Information 47250
C2 Metering 125 47251 to 55 R FLOAT: 24
47375 UINT16: 7
C3 Reporting 125 47376 to None R None
(Status) 47500 (for future use)
Control System 47501 to 58 RW FLOAT: 26
C4 Configuration 60 47560 59 1R UINT16: 7
Group 1
C5 Operating 60 47561 to 23 16 RW UINT16: 23
Modes 47620 7R
C6 Setpoints 120 47621 to 94 48 R FLOAT: 45
47740 46 RW UINT16: 4
C7 Start-up 60 47741 to 16 RW FLOAT: 8
47800
C8 Limiters 60 47801 to 38 RW FLOAT: 19
47860
C9 Control Loop 60 47861 to 30 RW FLOAT: 15
Gains 47920
C10 Protective 60 47921 to 37 RW FLOAT: 15
Functions 47980 UINT16: 7
47981 to None None
C11 Calibration 60 48040 (for future RW (for future use)
use)

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-9

 Total # of Holding Data Types
Reserved Register Number Mapped To
Information Information Holding Address Of Used Access Registers (Total #
Category ID Category Registers Space Registers Right Of Variables)
C12 Relays 120 48041 to 83 RW UINT16: 83
48160
C13 General 60 48161 to 8 2R UINT16: 6
System 48220 6 RW UCHAR: 2
C14 FP Metering 30 48221 to 3 3 RW UINT16: 3
Configuration 48250
Control System 50 48501 to 10 RW FLOAT: 4
C15 Configuration
48550
Group II

DECS-200 REGISTER TABLE

Each data to be transmitted via Modbus network is identified by its holding register(s). The following
tables provide the complete list of holding register assignments and descriptions for the DECS-200. There
is a separate table for each information category.

Holding Registers for Information Category C1

Table 7-11. Information Category C1 (Product Information)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47001 1st character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47002 2nd character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47003 3rd character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47004 4th character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47005 5th character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47006 6th character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47007 7th character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47008 8th character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47009 Last character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47010 1st character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47011 2nd character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47012 3rd character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47013 4th character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47014 5th character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47015 6th character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47016 7th character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8

7-10 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

 Table 7-11. Information Category C1 (Product Information)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
number
47017 Last character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47018 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47019 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47020 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47021 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47022 5th character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47023 6th character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47024 7th character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47025 8th character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47026 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47027 1st character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47028 2nd character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47029 3rd character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47030 4th character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47031 5th character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47032 6th character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47033 7th character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47034 Last character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47035 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47036 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47037 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47038 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47039 5th character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47040 6th character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47041 7th character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47042 8th character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47043 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47044 1st character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47045 2nd character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47046 3rd character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47047 4th character of the ASCII string of Boot Program version number R- UI8
47048 5th character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-11

 Table 7-11. Information Category C1 (Product Information)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47049 6th character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47050 7th character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47051 Last character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47052 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47053 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47054 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47055 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47056 5th character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47057 6th character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47058 7th character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47059 8th character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47060 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47061 1st character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8
47062 2nd character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8
47063 Last character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8
47064 to Reserved for future C1 data Not Not
47250 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C2

Table 7-12. Information Category C2 (Metering)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47251-52 Phase A to B rms generator voltage R- R32_23
47253-54 Phase B to C rms generator voltage R- R32_23
47255-56 Phase C to A rms generator voltage R- R32_23
47257-58 Average of the 3 rms line-to-line voltages R- R32_23
47259-60 Phase B generator current in amps R- R32_23
47261-62 Generator apparent power in kVA R- R32_23
47263-64 Generator real power in kW R- R32_23
47265-66 Generator reactive power in kvar R- R32_23
47267-68 Power factor R- R32_23
47269-70 Generator frequency in hertz R- R32_23
47271-72 Bus frequency in Hz R- R32_23
47273-74 RMS bus voltage in volts R- R32_23
47275-76 Field voltage in volts R- R32_23

7-12 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

 Table 7-12. Information Category C2 (Metering)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47277-78 Field current in amps R- R32_23
47279-80 Var/PF controller output in volts R- R32_23
47281-82 Phase angle between phase B voltage and current in degrees R- R32_23
47283-84 Auxiliary input in volts (PSS input) R- R32_23
47285-86 Current input for load compensation R- R32_23
47287-88 Null balance (tracking error) in percent R- R32_23
47289-90 Error signal to autotracking loop R- R32_23
47291-92 Active controller output R- R32_23
47293 PF state: 0 = leading / 1 = lagging R- UI16
47294 Generator state: 0 = generating / 1 = motoring R- UI16
47295 Status of the Front panel LEDs (bit flags, where 0=off, 1=on for all R- UI16
LEDs except Null Balance and Internal Tracking which are reversed):
b0=Null Balance, b1=Tracking, b2=Pre-position, b3=Upper Limit,
b4=Lower Limit, b5=Edit, b6-b15=unassigned
47296 Voltage matching status: 0=off / 1=on R- UI16
47297 Protection status bit flags (0=clear, 1=condition present): R- UI16
b0=field overvoltage, b1=field overcurrent, b2=gen. Undervoltage,
b3=gen. overvoltage, b4=underfrequency, b5=in OEL, b6=in UEL,
b7=in FCR mode, b8=loss of sensing voltage, b9=setpoint at lower
limit, b10=setpoint at upper limit, b11=gen. failed to build up, b12=
gen. below 10Hz, b13=unassigned, b14=exciter diode open,
b15=exciter diode shorted.
47298-99 Reserved for future C2 data R- R32_23
47300-01 The active operating setpoint expressed as a percent of its present R- R32_23
adjustment range.
47302 The state of some contact inputs: b0 = 52JK, b1 = 52LM, b2 = R- UI16
Automatic transfer, b3 = External Tracking Enable
47303 Annunciation status bit flags (0=clear, 1=annunciation present): R- UI16
b0=field overvoltage, b1=field overcurrent, b2=gen. undervoltage,
b3=gen. overvoltage, b4=underfrequency, b5=in OEL, b6=in UEL,
b7=in FCR mode, b8=loss of sensing voltage, b9=setpoint at lower
limit, b10=setpoint at upper limit, b11=gen. failed to build up, b12=
gen. below 10Hz, b13=unassigned, b14=exciter diode open,
b15=exciter diode shorted..
47304-05 Reserved R- R32_23
47306 Protection status bit flags (0 = clear, 1 = condition present) R- UI16
b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2 – b15 are unassigned
47307 Annunciation status bit flags (0 = clear, 1 = condition present) R- UI16
b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2 – b15 are unassigned
47308 to Reserved for C2 data
47375

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-13

Holding Registers for Information Category C3
Table 7-13. Information Category C3 (Reporting)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47376 to Reserved for future C3 data Not Not
47500 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C4

Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47501-02 Generator rated frequency, selectable to be 50 or 60 Hz RW R32_23
47503-04 Generator PT primary voltage rating, adjustable from 1 to 30,000 RW R32_23
Vac in 1 volt increments
47505-06 Generator PT secondary voltage rating, adjustable from 1 to 240 RW R32_23
Vac in 1 volt increments
47507-08 Generator CT primary current rating, adjustable from 1 to 60,000 RW R32_23
Aac in 1 amp increments
47509-10 Generator CT secondary current rating, selectable to be 1 or 5 Aac RW R32_23
47511-12 Field current rating, adjustable from 1 to 18 Adc, in 0.1 amp RW R32_23
increments
47513-14 Field voltage connections to isolation box, selectable to be 32V, RW R32_23
63V, 125V, 250V or 375V
47515-16 Bus sensing PT primary rating, adjustable from 1 to 500,000 Vac in RW R32_23
1 volt increments
47517-18 Bus sensing PT secondary rating, adjustable from 1 to 240 Vac in 1 RW R32_23
volt increments
47519-20 Reserved RW R32_23
47521-22 Reserved RW R32_23
47523-24 Generator rated voltage, adjustable from 85 to 30,000 Vac in 1 volt RW R32_23
increments
47525-26 Generator rated output current, adjustable from 10 to 60,000 Aac in RW R32_23
0.1 amp increments
47527-28 Generator rated field voltage, adjustable from 1 to 400 Vdc in 1 volt RW R32_23
increments
47529-30 Generator rated field current, adjustable from 0.1 to 9999.0 Adc in RW R32_23
0.1 amp increments
47531-32 Nominal bus voltage, adjustable from 85 to 500,000 Vac in 1 volt RW R32_23
increments
47533-34 Auxiliary input gain for AVR mode, adjustable from 0 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47535-36 Internal tracking time delay, adjustable from 0 to 8 seconds in 0.1- RW R32_23
second increments
47537-38 Internal tracking traverse rate, adjustable from 1 to 80 seconds in RW R32_23
0.1 second increments

7-14 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

 Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47539-40 Null balance level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 in 0.01 increments RW R32_23
47541-42 Gain for cross current compensation, adjustable from 0 to 30 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47543 Voltage sensing configuration: 0 = 1 phase (A-C) / 1 = 3 phase RW UI16
47544 Auxiliary input summing mode: 0 = Inner Loop for AVR and FCR RW UI16
modes / 1 = Outer Loop for var and PF modes
47545 Control signal output range: 0 or 1 = 0+10V / 2 = -10+10V / 3 = 4-20 RW UI16
mA
47546 Reserved RW UI16
47547 Auxiliary input selection: 0 = voltage input / 1 = current input RW UI16
47548 PSS input mode – reserved for future C4 data RW UI16
47549-50 External tracking time delay, adjustable from 0 to 8 seconds in 0.1 RW R32_23
second increments
47551-52 External tracking traverse rate, adjustable from 1 to 80 seconds in RW R32_23
0.1-second increments
47553 Voltage sensing hardware gain control signal: 0 = gen. PT R- UI16
secondary <= 160 Vac / 1 = gen. PT secondary > 160 Vac
47554-55 Auxiliary input gain for FCR mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47556-57 Auxiliary input gain for var mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47558-59 Auxiliary input gain for PF mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47560 Reserved RW UI16

Holding Registers for Information Category C5

Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47561 Virtual toggle switch for Start or Stop: 0 = no change / 1 = change RW UI16
state. Holding register 47572 contains unit mode status.
Note: Read value of register 47561 is always 0.
47562 Virtual toggle switch for changing control mode from comm. port RW UI16
between AVR and FCR: 0 = no change / 1 = change state. Holding
register 47573 contains Control mode status.
Note: Read value of register 47562 is always 0.
47563 Switch for changing operating mode via comm. port, to one of three RW UI16
modes, 0=OFF / 1=PF / 2=var. Holding register 47571 contains
Operating mode status. Note: Read value of register 47563 is
always 4.
47564 Internal tracking status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47565 Preposition enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-15

 Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47566 Raise input enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47567 Lower input enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47568 External tracking enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47569 Limiter Mode options: 0 = both off / 1 = UEL on / 2 = OEL on / 3 = RW UI16
both on / 4 = SCL / 5 = SCL/UEL / 6 = SCL/OEL / 7 = OEL/UEL/SCL
47570 Voltage matching mode: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47571 Operating mode: 0 = Off / 1 = PF Control / 2 = var Control R- UI16
47572 Unit mode status: 0 = Stop / 1 = Start R- UI16
47573 Control mode status: 1 = FCR / 2 = AVR R- UI16
47574 Internal (mode-to-mode) tracking status: 0 = Off / 1 = On R- UI16
47575 Reserved for future C5 data R- UI16
47576 Secondary unit enable status: 0 = primary unit / 1 = secondary unit R- UI16
47577 Load compensation mode status: 0 = Off / 1 = Droop / 2 = Line Drop R- UI16
47578 Load compensation mode selection via comm. ports: 0 = Off/1 = RW UI16
Droop / 2 = Line Drop. Holding register 47577 contains Load
compensation mode status. Note: Read value of register 47578 is
always 0.
47579 Input for resetting front panel annunciations and latched relay RW UI16
annunciations: 0 = no change / 1 = reset. Note: Read value of
register 47579 is always 0.
47580 Loss-of-sensing detection enable: 0 = disable / 1 = enable RW UI16
47581 Loss of sensing triggered transfer-to-FCR-mode enable. RW UI16
47582 Under frequency or volts per hertz mode enable. RW UI16
47583 External Tracking enabled: 0 = disabled /1 = enabled RW UI16
47584 Virtual toggle switch for OEL style: 0 = no change, 1 = change RW UI16
Read back: 0 = summing point, 1 = takeover
47585 OEL option: 0 = Option 1, 1 = Option 2, 3 = Option 3 RW UI16
47586 PF/var option status: 0 = Off, 1 = PF, 2 = var R- UI16
47587 to Reserved for future C5 data Not Not
47620 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C6

Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47621-22 FCR (field current regulator) mode setpoint; adjustment range is RW R32_23
determined by registers (47699-700) and (47707-08)
47623-24 AVR (automatic voltage regulator) mode setpoint; adjustment range RW R32_23
is determined by registers (47701-02) and (47709-10)

7-16 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

 Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47625-26 Var mode setpoint (in kvar); adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47703-04) and (47711-12)
47627-28 PF mode setpoint; adjustment range is determined by registers RW R32_23
(47705-06) and (47713-14)
47629-30 Droop setting in percent (of rated generator voltage), adjustable from RW R32_23
-30 to 30% in 0.1% increments
47631-32 FCR mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47633-34 AVR mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47635-36 Var mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47637-38 PF mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47639-40 FCR mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47699-700) and (47707-08)
47641-42 AVR mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47701-02) and (47709-10)
47643-44 Var mode setpoint preposition (in kvar); adjustment range is RW R32_23
determined by registers (47703-04) and (47711-12)
47645-46 PF mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47705-06) and (47713-14)
47647-48 FCR mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10): R R32_23
[ (regs. 47707-08) - (regs. 47699-700) ] / [ (regs. 47631-32) x 10 ]
47649-50 AVR mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10): R R32_23
[ (regs. 47709-10) - (regs. 47701-02) ] / [ (regs. 47633-34) x 10 ]
47651-52 Var mode setpoint step size (in kvar) = setpoint range / (traverse R R32_23
rate x 10): [ (regs. 47711-12) - (regs. 47703-04) ] / [ (regs. 47635-
36) x 10 ]
47653-54 PF mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10):[ 2 R R32_23
+ (regs.47713-14) - (regs.47705-06) ] / [ (regs.47635-36) x 10 ]
47655-56 FCR mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated field current), adjustable RW R32_23
from 0 to 100% in 0.1% increments
47657-58 AVR mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated generator output RW R32_23
voltage), adjustable from 70 to 100% in 0.1% increments
47659-60 Var mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated generator VA), adjustable RW R32_23
from -100 to 100% in 0.1% increments
47661-62 PF mode setpoint adjustable minimum, adjustable from 0.5 to 1.0 in RW R32_23
0.005 increments
47663-64 FCR mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated field current), adjustable RW R32_23
from 100 to 120% in 0.1% increments
47665-66 AVR mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated generator output RW R32_23
voltage), adjustable from 100 to 110% in 0.1% increments

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-17

 Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47667-68 Var mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated generator VA), RW R32_23
adjustable from -100 to 100% in 0.1% increments
47669-70 PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum, adjustable from -1.0 to -0.5 RW R32_23
in 0.005 increments
47671-72 Minimum value for FCR mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of R R32_23
rated field current) = 0%
47673-74 Minimum value for AVR mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of R R32_23
rated generator output voltage) = 80%
47675-76 Minimum value for var mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of R R32_23
rated generator VA) = -100%
47677-78 Minimum value for PF mode setpoint adjustable minimum R R32_23
47679-80 Maximum value for FCR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % R R32_23
of rated field current) = 120%
47681-82 Maximum value for AVR mode setpoint adjustable maximum in (in % R R32_23
of rated generator output voltage) = 110%
47683-84 Maximum value for var mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of R R32_23
rated generator VA) = 100%
47685-86 Maximum value for PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum R R32_23
47687-88 Step size for FCR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of rated R R32_23
field current) = 0.1%
47689-90 Step size for AVR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of rated R R32_23
generator output voltage) = 0.1%
47691-92 Step size for var mode setpoint adjustable maximum in % of rated R R32_23
generator VA) = 0.1%
47693-94 Step size for PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum = 0.005 R R32_23
47695 FCR preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16
47696 AVR preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16
47697 Var preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16
47698 PF preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16
47699-700 FCR minimum setpoint (in amps) = % of nominal x rated field R- R32_23
current:(regs. 47655-56) x (regs. 47529-30) / 100
47701-02 AVR minimum setpoint (in volts) = % of nominal x rated gen. R- R32_23
voltage:(regs. 47657-58) x (regs. 47525-26) / 100
47703-04 Var minimum setpoint (in kvar) = % of nominal x rated generator R- R32_23
VA:(regs. 47659-60) x rated VA / 100
47705-06 PF minimum setpoint = registers 47661-62 R- R32_23
47707-08 FCR maximum setpoint (in amps) = % of nominal x rated field R- R32_23
current:(regs. 47663-64) x (regs. 47529-30) / 100
47709-10 AVR maximum setpoint (in volts) = % of nominal x rated gen. R- R32_23
Voltage:(regs. 47665-66) x (regs. 47525-26) / 100

7-18 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

 Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47711-12 Var maximum setpoint (in kvar) = % of nominal x rated gen. R- R32_23
VA:(regs. 47667-68) x rated VA / 100
47713-14 PF maximum setpoint = registers 47669-70 R- R32_23
47715 to Reserved for future C6 data Not Not
47740 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C7

Table 7-17. Information Category C7 (Startup Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47741-42 Soft start level, adjustable from 0 to 90 % (of rated generator RW R32_23
voltage) in 1% increments
47743-44 Soft start duration, adjustable from 1 to 7,200 seconds in 1 second RW R32_23
increments
47745-46 Underfrequency corner frequency, adjustable from 15 to 90 Hz in 0.1 RW R32_23
Hz increments
47747-48 Slope of underfrequency curve, adjustable from 0.00 to 3.00 V/Hz in RW R32_23
0.01 V/Hz increments
47749-50 Width of voltage matching window, adjustable from 0 to 20 % (of RW R32_23
rated generator voltage) in 0.01 % increments
47751-52 Voltage matching reference, adjustable from 90 to 120 % (of rated RW R32_23
generator voltage) in 0.01 % increments
47753-54 Fine voltage adjust band, adjustable from 0 to 30 % (of rated RW R32_23
generator voltage) in 0.1 % increments
47755-56 Time delay for loss of sensing, adjustable from 0 to 3 seconds in RW R32_23
0.1-second increments
47757-58 Loss of sensing level under balanced conditions, adjustable from 0% RW R32_23
to 100% of rated generator voltage in 0.1% increments
47759-60 Loss of sensing level under unbalanced conditions, adjustable from RW R32_23
0% to 100% of rated generator voltage in 0.1% increments
47761 to Reserved for future C7 data Not Not
47800 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C8

Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47801-02 On-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 30 Adc in 0.1- RW R32_23
amp increments
47803-04 Time allowed at on-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 10 RW R32_23
seconds in 1-second increments
47805-06 On-line OEL medium limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 Adc in RW R32_23

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-19

 Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
0.1-amp increments
47807-08 Time allowed at on-line OEL medium limit level, adjustable from 0 to RW R32_23
120 seconds in 1-second increments
47809-10 On-line low OEL low limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 15 Adc in 0.1- RW R32_23
amp increments
47811-12 Internal UEL curve’s starting point (reactive power level at 0 kW). RW R32_23
This should be 0 to allow the programmable UEL curve to be used.
47813-14 Time allowed at off-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 10 RW R32_23
seconds in 1-second increments
47815-16 Off-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 30 Adc in 0.1-amp RW R32_23
increments
47817-18 Off-line OEL low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 15 Adc in 0.1-amp RW R32_23
increments
47819-20 1st UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47821-22 2nd UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47823-24 3rd UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47825-26 4th UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47827-28 5th UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47829-30 1st UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
full rating (in kvar)
47831-32 2nd UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to RW R32_23
generator’s full rating (in kvar)
47833-34 3rd UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
full rating (in kvar)
47835-36 4th UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
full rating (in kvar)
47837-38 5th UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
full rating (in kvar)
47839-40 SCL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 66,000 A in 0.1 A RW R32_23
increments
47841-42 Time allowed at SCL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 60 RW R32_23
seconds in 0.1 second increments.
47843-44 SCL low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 66,000 A, in 0.1 A RW R32_23
increments
47845-46 Takeover OEL offline high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 A increments
47847-48 Takeover OEL offline low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 A increments.

7-20 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

 Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47849-50 Takeover OEL offline time dial, adjustable from 0.1 to 20, in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47851-52 Takeover OEL online high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 A increments.
47853-54 Takeover OEL online low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 a increments.
47855-56 Takeover OEL online time dial, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47857 to Reserved for future C8 data Not Not
47860 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C9

Table 7-19. Information Category C9 (Control Loop Gain Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47861-62 Stability setting group number: 1 to 21, where groups 1 to 20 are RW R32_23
preprogrammed values and group 21 is user programmable
47863-64 AVR/FCR mode proportional gain (Kp), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in RW R32_23
0.1 increments
47865-66 AVR/FCR mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47867-68 AVR/FCR mode derivative gain (Kd), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in RW R32_23
0.1 increments
47869-70 OEL integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47871-72 PF mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47873-74 Var mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47875-76 FCR mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47877-78 AVR mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47879-80 Var mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47881-82 PF mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47883-84 OEL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47885-86 UEL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47887-88 UEL integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47889-90 Voltage matching loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47891-92 AVR mode derivative time constant, adjustable from 0 to 1 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-21

 47893 to Reserved for future C9 data Not Not
47905 supported defined
47906-07 SCL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47908-09 SCL loop gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47910-20 Reserved for future C9 data Not Not
supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C10

Table 7-20. Information Category C10 (Protective Functions Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47921-22 Field overvoltage level, adjustable from 1 to 325 Vdc in 1-volt RW R32_23
increments
47923-24 Field overcurrent base level, adjustable from 0.1 to 16 Adc in 0.1- RW R32_23
amp increments
47925-26 Stator undervoltage level, adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1-volt RW R32_23
increments
47927-28 Stator overvoltage level, adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1-volt RW R32_23
increments
47929-30 Field overvoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.2 to 30 seconds in RW R32_23
0.1-second increments
47931-32 Field overcurrent time dial multiplier, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47933-34 Stator undervoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.5 to 60 seconds in RW R32_23
0.1-second increments
47935-36 Stator overvoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.1 to 60 seconds in RW R32_23
0.1-second increments
47937 Field overvoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47938 Field overcurrent alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47939 Stator undervoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47940 Stator overvoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47941-42 Reserved RW R32_23
47943-44 Reserved RW R32_23
47945 Reserved RW UI16
47946-47 Exciter open diode ripple pickup level, adjustable from 0% to 100% RW R32-23
in 0.1% increments.
47948-49 Exciter open diode time delay, adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds in RW R32-23
0.1 second increments.
47950 Exciter open diode protection enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47951-52 Exciter shorted diode ripple pickup level, adjustable from 0% to RW R32-23
100% in 0.1% increments.
47953-54 Exciter shorted diode time delay, adjustable from 5 to 30 seconds in RW R32-23
0.1 second increments.

7-22 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

 Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47955 Exciter shorted diode protection enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47956-57 Exciter diode protection disable level, adjustable from 0% to 100% of RW R32_23
rated exciter field current in 0.1% increments.
47958 Loss of field alarm enable: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled RW UI16
47959-60 Loss of field level, adjustable from 0 to 3,000 Mvar in 1 kvar RW R32_23
increments
47961-62 Loss of field delay (in seconds): adjustable from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds RW R32_23
47963 to Reserved for future C10 data Not Not
47980 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C11

Table 7-21. Information Category C11 (Calibration related Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47981 to Reserved for future C11 data Not Not
48040 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C12

Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
48041 Annunciation enable for Relay 1: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled RW UI16
b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage,
b3 = gen. Overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in
UEL, b7 = in FCR mode, b8 = loss of sensing voltage, b9 = setpoint
at lower limit, b10 = setpoint at upper limit, b11 = unassigned, b12 =
gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14, b15 are
unassigned.
48042 Annunciation enable for Relay 1: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled b0 = loss RW UI16
of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned
48043 Reserved RW UI16
48044 Reserved RW UI16
48045 Reserved RW UI16
48046 Reserved RW UI16
48047 Reserved RW UI16
48048 Reserved RW UI16
48049 Reserved RW UI16
48050 Reserved RW UI16
48051 Reserved RW UI16
48052 Reserved RW UI16
48053 Reserved RW UI16

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-23

 Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
48054 Reserved RW UI16
48055 Reserved RW UI16
48056 16th annunciation enable for Relay 1 - Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16
48057 Output for Relay 1: 0 = contact open / 1 = contact closed R UI16
48058 Relay 1 annunciation: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = latched RW UI16
48059 Relay 1 contact sense: 0 = closed for normal operation, open for RW UI16
annunciation; 1 = open for normal operation, closed for annunciation
48060 Relay 1 output duration for momentary type, adjustable 2 to 100 in RW UI16
unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 seconds in 0.05-second
increments)
48061 b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage, RW UI16
b3 = gen overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in
UEL, b7 = in FCR mode, b8 = loss of sensing voltage, b9 = setpoint
at lower limit, b10 = setpoint at upper limit, b11 = unassigned, b12 =
gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14-b15 are
unassigned.
48062 b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned RW UI16
48063 Reserved RW UI16
48064 Reserved RW UI16
48065 Reserved RW UI16
48066 Reserved RW UI16
48067 Reserved RW UI16
48068 Reserved RW UI16
48069 Reserved RW UI16
48070 Reserved RW UI16
48071 Reserved RW UI16
48072 Reserved RW UI16
48073 Reserved RW UI16
48074 Reserved RW UI16
48075 Reserved RW UI16
48076 16th annunciation enable for Relay 2 – Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16
48077 Output for Relay 2: 0 = contact open / 1 = contact closed R UI16
48078 Relay 2 annunciation type: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = RW UI16
latched
48079 Relay 2 contact sense: 0 = closed for normal operation, open for RW UI16
annunciation; 1 = open for normal operation, closed for annunciation
48080 Relay 2 output duration for momentary type, adjustable from 2 to 100 RW UI16
in unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 seconds in 0.05 second
increments)

7-24 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

 Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
48081 b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage, RW UI16
b3 = gen overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in
UEL, b7 = in FCR mode, b8 = loss of sensing voltage, b9 = setpoint
at lower limit, b10 = setpoint at upper limit, b11 = unassigned, b12 =
gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14-b15 are
unassigned.
48082 b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned RW UI16
48083 Reserved RW UI16
48084 Reserved RW UI16
48085 Reserved RW UI16
48086 Reserved RW UI16
48087 Reserved RW UI16
48088 Reserved RW UI16
48089 Reserved RW UI16
48090 Reserved RW UI16
48091 Reserved RW UI16
48092 Reserved RW UI16
48093 Reserved RW UI16
48094 Reserved RW UI16
48095 Reserved RW UI16
48096 16th annunciation enable for Relay 3 - Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16
48097 Output for Relay 3: 0 = contact open / 1 = contact closed R UI16
48098 Relay 3 annunciation type: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = RW UI16
latched
48099 Relay 3 contact sense: 0 = closed for normal operation, open for RW UI16
annunciation; 1 = open for normal operation, closed for annunciation
48100 Relay 3 output duration for momentary type, adjustable from 2 to 100 RW UI16
in unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 s in 0.05 s increments)
48101 Reserved RW UI16
48102 Reserved RW UI16
48103 Reserved RW UI16
48104 Reserved RW UI16
48105 Reserved RW UI16
48106 Reserved RW UI16
48107 Reserved RW UI16
48108 Reserved RW UI16
48109 Reserved RW UI16

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-25

 Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
48110 Reserved RW UI16
48111 Reserved RW UI16
48112 Reserved RW UI16
48113 Reserved RW UI16
48114 Reserved RW UI16
48115 Reserved RW UI16
48116 Reserved RW UI16
48117 Reserved RW UI16
48118 Reserved RW UI16
48119 Reserved RW UI16
48120 Reserved RW UI16
48121 Reserved RW UI16
48122 Reserved RW UI16
48123 Reserved RW UI16
48124 to Reserved for future C12 data Not Not
48160 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C13

Table 7-23. Information Category C13 (Communications Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
48161 Save data to EEPROM flags: RW UI16
0x0001 saves C4 and C6; 0x0002 saves C5 and C7; 0x0004 saves
C6; 0x0008 saves C5 and C7; 0x0010 saves C8; 0x0020 saves C9;
0x0040 saves C10; 0x0080 saves C11; 0x0100 saves C12; 0x0800
saves C14. (Changes in C13 are automatically saved.)
48162 Comm. Port 0, front RS-232, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, R UI16
4800, 9600, or 19200
48163 Comm. port 1, rear RS-232, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, R UI16
4800, 9600 or 19200
48164 Comm. port 2, rear RS-485, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, RW UI16
4800, 9600 or 19200
48165 Comm. port 2, Rear RS-485, Parity: ‘O’ = 79 = 0x4F for Odd RW UI8
Parity,‘E’ = 69 = 0x45 for Even Parity, and ‘N’ = 78 = 0x4E for No
Parity
48166 Comm. port 2, Rear RS-485, stop bits, selectable to be 1 or 2 RW UI8
48167 DECS-200 polling address (Modbus slave address), selectable from RW UI16
1 to 247 (slave address)
48168 Modbus Response Time Delay, adjustable from 10 to 200 ms in 10 RW UI16
ms increments

7-26 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

 Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
48169 to Reserved for future C13 Not Not
48220 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C14

Table 7-24. Information Category C14 (Front Panel Metering Configuration Parameters)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
48221 1st metering display field on the front panel metering screen: 0 to 14 RW UI16
nd
48222 2 metering display field on the front panel metering screen: 0 to 14 RW UI16
rd
48223 3 metering display field on the front panel metering screen: 0 to 14 RW UI16
48224 to Reserved for future C14 data Not Not
48250 supported defined

Holding Registers for Information Category C15

Table 7-25. Information Category C15 (Control System Configuration Parameters Group II)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
48501-02 Reserved RW R32_23
48503-04 Reserved RW R32_23
48505-06 Reserved RW R32_23
48505-07 Reserved RW UI16
48505-08 Reserved RW UI16
48505-09, EDM Pole Ratio (1 to 10 in steps of 0.01, Enter 0 if unknown) RW R32_23
10

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-27

 This page intentionally left blank.

7-28 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

SECTION 8 • MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The only preventive maintenance required for the DECS-200 is the periodic checking of DECS-200
connections to ensure that they are clean and tight.

WARRANTY AND REPAIR SERVICE

DECS-200 units are manufactured using state-of-the-art, surface-mount technology. As such, Basler
Electric recommends that no repair procedures be attempted by anyone other than Basler Electric.
The DECS-200 is warranted against defective material and workmanship for 18 months from the date of
shipment from Basler Electric. Units submitted for warranty repair should be returned to Basler Electric’s
Highland, Illinois facility, freight prepaid, with a complete description of the application and the reported
problem. Prearrangement with either the nearest Basler Electric sales office or with the Technical Sales
Support department at Basler Electric will assure the fastest possible turnaround time.

TROUBLESHOOTING
The following troubleshooting procedures assume the excitation system components are properly
matched, fully operational, and correctly connected. If you do not obtain the results that you expect from
the DECS-200, first check the programmable settings for the appropriate function.

DECS-200 Appears Inoperative

If the DECS-200 does not power up (no backlighting on front panel display), ensure that the control power
applied to the unit is at the correct level. If dc control power is being used, verify that the polarity is
correct. Units with style number XL have an input voltage range of 16 to 60 Vdc. Units with style number
XC have an input voltage range of 90 to 150 Vdc or 82 to 132 Vac (50/60 Hz). If the correct control power
is being applied, return the unit to Basler Electric as described under Warranty and Repair Service.

NOTE
When both ac and dc control power is used, an isolation transformer must be
connected between the ac voltage source and the ac control power terminals of
the DECS-200.

Display Blank or Frozen

If the front panel display (LCD) is blank or frozen (does not scroll), remove control power for about 60
seconds and then reapply control power. If the problem occurred during software uploading, repeat the
upload procedures as described in the associated instructions. If the problem persists, return the unit to
Basler Electric as described under Warranty and Repair Service.

Generator Voltage Does Not Build

Check the DECS-200 settings and system voltages for the following:
a. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
b. Generator PT secondary voltage
c. AC voltage on the DECS-200 operating (bridge) power terminals (C5 (A), C6 (B), and C7 (C))
Check the DECS-200 soft start bias and soft start time settings. If necessary, increase the generator soft
start bias and decrease the generator soft start time.
If the generator voltage still does not build, increase the value of Kg.
Temporarily disable the overexcitation limiter.

Low Generator Voltage in AVR Mode

Check the following DECS-200 settings and system parameters:
a. AVR voltage setpoint
b. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
c. Generator PT secondary voltage
9360100990 Rev G DECS-200 Maintenance 8-1
d. Overexcitation limiter (not activated)
e. Accessory inputs (should be zero)
f. Var/PF and droop (should be disabled)
g. Cut-in underfrequency setting (should be below the generator operating frequency)
If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.

High Generator Voltage in AVR Mode

Check the following DECS-200 settings and system parameters:
a. AVR voltage setpoint
b. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
c. Generator PT secondary voltage
d. Accessory inputs (should be zero)
e. Var/PF and droop (should be disabled)
If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.

Generator Voltage Unstable (Hunting)

Verify that the exciter power converter is working correctly by substituting the appropriate battery voltage
in place of the DECS-200 drive voltage. If the problem is caused by the DECS-200, check the gain
settings for the specific mode of operation selected.
If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.

Protection or Limit Annunciation

If a protection function or limiting function is annunciated, check the associated setting values.
If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.

HMI Meter Readings Incorrect

If your PF, var, or watt readings are significantly different from the expected readings for a known load,
verify that the B-phase current sensing input of the DECS-200 is connected to a CT on phase B and not
phases A or C.

No Communication
If communication with the DECS-200 cannot be initiated, check the connections at the communication
ports, the baud rate, and supporting software.

DECS-200 Reboots Frequently

If a single DECS-200 control power source is used and the power source is supplying less than the
minimum required voltage or is fluctuating below the minimum required voltage, the DECS-200 will
reboot. Increase the control power source voltage so that it is within the specified operating range. Units
with style number XL have an input voltage range of 16 to 60 Vdc. Units with style number XC have an
input voltage range of 90 to 150 Vdc or 82 to 132 Vac (50/60 Hz).

8-2 DECS-200 Maintenance 9360100990 Rev G

 ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND, IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, [email protected]
PHONE +1 618-654-2341 FAX +1 618-654-2351